JP7424618B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Pachinko gaming machines are generally equipped with a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state), and for the specific gaming state, there are cases where the specific gaming state is shifted at the first opportunity and cases where it is shifted at the second opportunity. (For example, see FIG. 5 of Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-131353

By the way, when shifting to a specific gaming state at a plurality of opportunities, there is a possibility that it becomes difficult to grasp which opportunity caused the transition to the specific gaming state when starting the specific gaming state.

In view of these circumstances, the present invention aims to make it easier to understand the timing of transition to a specific gaming state.

The gaming machine according to the present invention executes a special game advantageous to the player based on a starting port formed in a gaming area through which a game ball can flow down, and a game ball entering the starting port. a determining means for determining whether or not to execute the special game; a first specific game state to which the special game can be transitioned after executing the special game if it is determined that the special game is to be executed; a second specific game state that can be shifted to without executing the special game; a specific game state control means capable of controlling a second specific game state; and a variable display of identification information based on the game ball entering the starting hole. and an identification information display means capable of executing a variable display game that starts the variable display and derives the determination result by stopping the variable display as the variable time elapses , and starts the first specific gaming state. The combination of identification information displayed on the identification information display means at the time is different from the combination of identification information displayed on the identification information display means when starting the second specific gaming state , During execution of the first specific gaming state, acquisition information regarding the acquisition of game balls can be displayed, and after the first specific gaming state is ended and the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times, the second specific gaming state is displayed. When transitioning to a gaming state, the acquired information that was displayed in the first specific gaming state is not continuously displayed in the second specific gaming state to which the transition is made, and the acquired information is displayed at the beginning after the first specific gaming state ends. In the variable display game, if the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied and the transition is made to the second specific gaming state, the acquired information displayed in the first specific gaming state is transferred. It is characterized in that it is possible to continuously display the game in the second specific gaming state .

According to the present invention, it is possible to easily grasp the timing of transition to a specific gaming state.

1 is an external front view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 is an external rear view of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a block diagram of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing the special symbol winning determination table, normal symbol winning determining table, and gaming state details according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table and a normal symbol determination table according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing details of the winning special symbol according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a special symbol variation pattern table according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a determination information storage area of the main RAM, a counter of the main RAM, and an information storage area of the main RAM according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows main control board main processing concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows setting value change processing concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows setting value confirmation processing concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. 3 is a flowchart showing main control board timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 7 is a flowchart showing input SW detection processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the 1st starting port detection based on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a 2nd starting port detection based on 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing processing at the time of detection of a passing gate according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. It is a flowchart showing special symbol related processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing processing at the start of special symbol variation according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing processing by gaming state according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing winning game processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows abnormality determination processing concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing production control board main processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing production control board timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 3 is a flowchart showing operation device input processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing main command reception processing (1/2) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing main command reception processing (2/2) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows specific production decision processing concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of specific performance concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram explaining the relationship between the winning sound, change sound, and starting port light emitting device (color) for each icon according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the image/sound control part main processing based on 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a process when receiving a volume value/light amount value related subcommand according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of reception of the starting port related subcommand based on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the image/sound control part timer interruption process based on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the light emission drive control part main processing based on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the light emission drive control part timer interruption process based on 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 2 is a conceptual diagram of image generation processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the 1st example of the notification mode concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the 2nd example of the notification mode concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the 2nd example (another example) of the notification mode concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the 3rd example of the notification mode concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the 4th example of the notification mode concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the 5th example of the notification mode concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the 6th example of the notification mode concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the 6th example (another example) of the notification mode concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the 7th example of the notification mode concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the 8th example of the notification mode concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the 9th example of the notification mode concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the 9th example (another example) of the notification mode concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the 10th example of the notification mode concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the 11th example of the notification mode concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the 12th example of the notification mode concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the normal gaming state and the variable probability gaming state according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the normal gaming state according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the normal gaming state according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the normal gaming state according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a notification mode in a game in which the normal game state game number counter becomes a predetermined counter according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a notification mode in a game in which the normal game state game number counter becomes a predetermined counter according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining the time-saving gaming state to which the state was transferred at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state to which the transition was made at opportunity 2 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining the transition to the time-saving gaming state due to opportunity 1 and the transition to the time-saving gaming state due to opportunity 2 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining the transition to the time-saving gaming state due to opportunity 1 and the transition to the time-saving gaming state due to opportunity 2 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining the relationship between the music pieces that can be outputted in Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining the time-saving gaming state to which it moved at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state to which it moved to opportunity 2 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining the performance mode in the normal game state after the end of the time-saving game state according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining the time-saving gaming state to which it moved at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state to which it moved to opportunity 2 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining the time-saving gaming state to which it moved at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state to which it moved to opportunity 2 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining specific production concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart showing an example of updating the normal game state game number counter according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart showing an update example (another example 1) of the normal game state game number counter according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart showing an update example (another example 2) of the normal game state game number counter according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a time-saving gaming state according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a normal gaming state and an example of updating a number of games counter in the normal gaming state according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of motion performance according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing the special symbol winning determination table, normal symbol winning determination table, and gaming state details according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table and a normal symbol determination table according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram (another example) showing a special symbol determination table and a normal symbol determination table according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing processing by gaming state according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing winning game processing according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing winning game processing (another example) according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the normal gaming state and the variable probability gaming state according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing the special symbol winning determination table, normal symbol winning determination table, and game state details according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table and a normal symbol determination table according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the 2nd starting port detection based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the falling lottery process based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart explaining the trigger 1 and the trigger 2 in the fall probability change based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart explaining the trigger 1 and the trigger 2 in the fall probability change based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a diagram showing the special symbol winning determination table, normal symbol winning determination table, and gaming state details according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table and a normal symbol determination table according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a determination information storage area of the main RAM, a counter of the main RAM, and an information storage area of the main RAM according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing processing by gaming state according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining the time-saving gaming state that transitioned to opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state that transitioned to opportunity 3 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining the time-saving gaming state that transitioned to opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state that transitioned to opportunity 3 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining the time-saving gaming state that transitioned to opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state that transitioned to opportunity 3 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining the time-saving gaming state that transitioned to opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state that transitioned to opportunity 3 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining opportunity 1 and opportunity 3 in the normal gaming state according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining opportunity 1 and opportunity 3 in the normal gaming state according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining opportunity 1 and opportunity 3 in the normal gaming state according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining opportunity 1 and opportunity 3 in the normal gaming state according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining opportunity 1 and opportunity 3 in the normal gaming state according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining the time-saving gaming state that transitioned to opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state that transitioned to opportunity 3 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In the following first embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described as an example of a gaming machine according to the present invention. In the following explanation, "front", "rear", "left", "right", "upper", and "lower" refer to the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 is viewed from the player's side. pointing.

(External configuration of pachinko machine 1)
As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 for installation on a game machine installation island (not shown) in a game parlor, and a game board 6 that is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2. a glass frame 4 that is pivotally supported by the middle frame 3, faces the front side of the game board 6, and makes the game board 6 visible through transparent glass; It has a receiving tray member 5 which is pivotally supported by the glass frame 4, is located below the glass frame 4, and is capable of storing game balls. Note that the glass frame 4 and the saucer member 5 may be configured as separate types or may be configured as an integrated type.

Further, the middle frame 3 is provided with a firing device (not shown in FIG. 1) for firing a game ball into the game area 7 of the game board 6. A firing handle 8 is provided. The firing handle 8 is held by the player and can be rotated within a predetermined range, and the firing intensity when firing the game ball into the gaming area 7 can be adjusted by the amount of rotation. It has become. For example, if the ball is rotated by the first amount of rotation (if the first firing intensity is used), the game ball will be fired to the left side of the game area 7 (so-called "left-handed hitting" is possible), and the first When the game ball is rotated with a second rotation amount that is larger than the rotation amount of ” becomes possible).

Although not shown, the firing handle 8 is provided with a handle touch sensor. This handle touch sensor is turned ON when the firing handle 8 is gripped by the player, and the ON signal is inputted to the payout control board 300. This allows the player to understand that the firing handle 8 is being held by the player.

Further, the glass frame 4 is provided with a light emitting device 9 (lamp, LED, etc.), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be decorated by emitting light. For example, in a special symbol hit determination process to be described later, based on the fact that it is determined to be a hit, a rainbow-colored light is emitted, thereby making it possible to perform an effect that notifies you of a win.

Further, a speaker 10 is provided on the glass frame 4 (upper side), and can output audio and sound effects. For example, if the normal gaming state described below is controlled, music corresponding to the normal gaming state can be output, and if the time-saving gaming state described below is controlled, the music corresponding to the time-saving gaming state can be output. It is possible.
Note that a lower speaker 10 is provided on the glass frame 4 (lower side), and can output audio and sound effects. The lower speaker 10 is provided with a speaker lamp 10a, which is designed to emit light during a winning flash effect to be described later.

The tray member 5 is composed of an upper tray 5a and a lower tray 5b, and when the amount of game balls stored in the upper tray 5a exceeds a certain amount, the game balls are paid out to the lower tray 5b. It has become. The tray member 5 also includes a ball removal button 11 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper tray 5a to the lower tray 5b at the end of the game, and a game ball dispensing device (not shown) for discharging the game balls stored in the upper tray 5a. A ball lending button 12 for requesting the payout of a ball, a card return button 13 for requesting the return of valuable media inserted into the insertion slot of the game ball lending device, and a balance for displaying the balance of valuable media. A display section 12a and a ball rental permission lamp 12b are provided to notify that ball rental is possible by operating the ball rental button 12.

In addition, when an operation promotion effect (for example, an image imitating an operation means + an image saying "Press!" on the operation means is displayed) is executed on the saucer member 5 to encourage operation of each operation means, etc. There are provided a performance button 14 and a performance lever 15 that can be operated by the player. The tray member 5 can also be operated by the player to adjust the volume of audio and sound effects output from the speaker 10, adjust the amount of light emitted from the light emitting device 9, and adjust the amount of light emitted from the image display device 26, which will be described later. A cross key button 16 is provided for adjusting the amount of light, activating a menu screen, and performing operations corresponding to each menu. Note that the production button 14 and the production lever 15 may be provided independently, or may be provided integrally.
Note that the cross key button 16 may be used as an operating device for performing operations related to the menu screen, and a dedicated operating device for adjusting the volume and the amount of light may be provided separately and independently.

(About the configuration of the back side of Pachinko gaming machine 1)
Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIG. 2. On the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, various control boards such as a main control board 100, an effect control board 200, a payout control board 300, a payout device 304, and a power supply board 400, which will be described later, are provided (exactly). (These various control boards are attached to the back of the middle frame 3).

Further, the main control board 100 is provided with a RAM clear switch 105. The RAM clear switch 105 is a switch for initializing game information that is rewritten when a game is played in the area of the main RAM 103. For example, if the closing time of the game parlor arrives while in the time-saving gaming mode, if the administrator (e.g., a gaming clerk) turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear switch 105, the gaming information in the time-saving gaming mode will be cleared. , the game can be started from the normal gaming state at the opening time of the next day.

Further, the RAM clear switch 105 is also a switch for switching setting values in a setting change state, which will be described later. Details will be described later in a flowchart, but for example, when six levels of set values are provided, when the RAM clear switch 105 is pressed once while the set value "1" is displayed on the display 104 (described later), the set value When the setting value is changed from "1" to "2" and the RAM clear switch 105 is further pressed once, the setting value is switched from "2" to the setting value "3", and thereafter, each time the RAM clear switch 105 is pressed once. , the setting value "4", the setting value "5", and the setting value "6", and when the setting value "6" is displayed on the display 104, pressing the RAM clear switch 105 once will clear the setting value. The setting value is changed from "6" to the set value "1".

Although the RAM clear switch 105 is provided on the main control board 100, it may be provided on the power supply board 400 or directly on the middle frame 3, for example, as long as it can be input to the main control board 100.

Further, the main control board 100 is provided with a setting change keyhole 31 (also referred to as a setting key SW in this embodiment). The setting change keyhole 31 is used when setting any setting value from a plurality of setting values to be described later. Specifically, a setting change key (not shown) managed by a clerk at the game parlor is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31 and rotated 90 degrees clockwise (rotated from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction). Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on (power switch 400a is turned on) while pressing the RAM clear switch 105 described above, a setting change state is entered in which setting values can be set. Note that details of the setting change state will be described later using a flowchart.

Further, the setting change keyhole 31 is also used when checking the currently set setting values. Specifically, a setting change key managed by a clerk at the game parlor is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31 and rotated 90 degrees clockwise (rotated from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction) to change the settings of the pachinko game machine 1. When the power is turned on (power switch 400a is turned on), a setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting values can be confirmed. Note that details of the setting confirmation state will be described later in a flowchart.

Note that the setting change keyhole 31 can be rotated by a setting change key, and for example, the main CPU 101 can be moved to three positions (states): vertical position, horizontal position, and diagonal position. can be detected.

Note that although the setting change keyhole 31 is provided in the main control board 100, the installation location is not limited to this. For example, a setting change keyhole 31 may be provided in the middle frame 3.

Further, the main control board 100 is provided with a display 104. The display 104 displays the setting value if the setting is changed or confirmed, and if it is not changed or confirmed, the display 104 displays, for example, "(Game ball in normal gaming state)". Game performance information calculated using the formula ``Number of paid out pieces ÷ Number of out pieces in normal gaming state) x 100'' is displayed.

Note that the gaming performance information is calculated for each interrupt (for example, every 4 ms) in a state that is not a setting change state or a setting confirmation state (for example, a state where interrupts are permitted in step S18 in FIG. 10). The current section and the past 3 sections (1 section before, 2 sections before, and 3 sections before) are displayed at every predetermined display timing (for example, every 5 seconds). It is now possible. That is, the display of the current section → the elapse of a predetermined time (5 seconds elapsed) → the display of the past section (1) → the elapse of the predetermined time (5 seconds elapsed) → the display of the past section (2) → the elapse of the predetermined time (5 seconds) A switching display is performed in the following order: display of the past section (3) -> elapse of a predetermined time (5 seconds elapsed) -> display of the current section.

(About the configuration of the game board 6)
Next, the configuration of the game board 6 of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained based on FIG. 3.

The game board 6 is made of a plywood material or a transparent synthetic resin material, and an image display device 26 is removably assembled on the back side. In addition, the game board 6 is formed with a game area 7 in which game balls can roll, and is provided with an outer rail member 18 and an inner rail for guiding the game ball launched from the firing device to the game area 7. A member 19 is formed. The gaming area 7 also includes a gate member 20 through which the game ball can pass, a first starting port 21 into which the game ball can enter, and a stage 17 for facilitating the ball entering the first starting port 21. , a second starting hole 22 into which a game ball can enter, a normal winning hole 23 into which a game ball can enter, and a second starting hole 22 into which a game ball can enter when a winning game (see FIG. 22) described later is being executed. A possible large winning opening 24, an out opening 25 for discharging game balls that have not entered any winning opening outside the gaming area (gaming ball discharge gutter), and a movable body 28 that moves in the vertical direction. In addition, game nails (not shown), windmills, etc. are provided.

The gaming area 7 includes a first gaming area 7a formed on the left side of the center line C (a so-called “left-handed playing area”) and a second gaming area 7b formed on the right side of the center line C (so-called “left-handed” gaming area). It has a gaming area for "right-handed hitting".

(Regarding the gate member 20)
The gate member 20 is provided at the right center part of the game area 7, and allows the game ball to pass through when the game ball is fired to the right side of the game area 7, so-called "right-handed hitting". It has become. Additionally, it is always open upward, allowing game balls to pass through at all times. Then, when the game ball passes through the gate member 20, the "passing gate detection process" described later is performed, and the "normal" After the normal symbol variation time has elapsed, a "normal symbol variation game" is executed in which the determination result of the normal symbol winning determination process is derived.
Note that the gate member 20 may also be provided at the left center portion of the gaming area 7.

In addition, when a game ball further passes through the gate member 20 while a normal symbol variation game based on passing through the gate member 20 is being performed, execution of the normal symbol variation game based on the passage is suspended. Excluding the normal symbol variation game that is being executed, up to a maximum of 4 symbols can be put on hold. Specifically, the main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for holding the normal symbol variation game, and the holding storage area corresponds to the normal symbol variation game that is currently changing, as shown in FIG. 9(B). "The relevant fluctuation storage area", the "first storage area" corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation game to be played after the currently fluctuating normal symbol fluctuation game ends, and hereinafter, the "second storage area", It is composed of a "third storage area" and a "fourth storage area", and when the currently fluctuating normal symbol fluctuation game finishes fluctuating, it is stored in "the said fluctuation storage area" and "the first storage area". The stored determination information (random value) is transferred to the "first storage area", and the determination information (random value) stored in the "second storage area" is transferred to the "second storage area". The determination information (random value) stored in the "third storage area" is transferred, and the determination information (random value) stored in the "fourth storage area" is transferred to the "third storage area". The storage area becomes empty.

(About the first starting port 21)
The first starting port 21 is provided in the center of the game area 7, and when a game ball is fired to the left side of the game area 7, so-called "left-handed hitting", the game ball enters the ball. It is now possible. Additionally, it is always open at the top, allowing game balls to enter at all times. Then, when a game ball enters the first starting port 21, for example, "3" game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if any reserved storage area is empty in addition to the prize balls, the special symbol Perform the hit determination process, display the special symbol, decorative symbol image, and fourth symbol image in a variable manner, and derive the determination result (special symbol and decorative symbol) of the special symbol hit determination process after the variation time described below has elapsed. A “symbol variation game” (determined display) is executed.

Furthermore, if a game ball further enters the first starting port 21 while a symbol changing game based on the ball entering the first starting port 21 is being played, the execution of the symbol changing game based on the entering ball will be suspended. Excluding the symbol variation game that is currently being executed, up to 4 symbols can be put on hold.

Specifically, in the main RAM 103, a pending storage area for the symbol variation game is provided, and as shown in FIG. ``The said fluctuation storage area'', the ``first storage area'' corresponding to the symbol fluctuation game to be played after the end of the currently changing symbol fluctuation game, hereinafter referred to as the ``second storage area'', and the ``third storage area''. ” and a “fourth storage area.” Then, when the currently fluctuating symbol fluctuation game finishes fluctuating with determination information (random values) stored in all pending storage areas, it is stored in "the relevant fluctuation storage area" and in the "first storage area". The stored determination information (random value) is transferred to the "first storage area", and the determination information (random value) stored in the "second storage area" is transferred to the "second storage area". The determination information (random value) stored in the "third storage area" is transferred, and the determination information (random value) stored in the "fourth storage area" is transferred to the "third storage area". The storage area becomes empty.
Although the first starting port 21 is configured as a ball entry port into which game balls can enter, it may be configured with a passage area through which game balls can pass.

Furthermore, a starting port light emitting device 21b is provided around the first starting port 21. For example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 21, the starting port light emitting device 21b emits light to notify that the game ball has entered the ball, or when performing a pending pre-reading effect to be described later, a pending pre-reading effect. It is possible to emit light in the same color as the pending icon.

(About the second starting port 22)
The second starting port 22 is provided at the right center part of the gaming area 7, and when a game ball is fired to the right side of the gaming area 7, so-called "right-handed hitting", the game ball enters. The ball is now possible. Further, unlike the first starting port 21, the second starting port 22 is not always open upward, and in principle does not allow the entry of game balls (it is in a "closed" state). That is, the second starting port 22 has a protruding member that can protrude to the front side, and only when this protruding member protrudes to the front side (in the "open" state), the game ball enters. It becomes possible.

Whether or not to allow the game ball to enter by protruding the protruding member forward is determined by the opening/closing of the second starting port shown in FIG. It is possible to open and close in the opening/closing manner shown in "Aspect". Then, when a game ball enters the second starting port 22, for example, the "2" game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and if any reserved storage area is empty in addition to the prize ball, the symbol change The game is run.

Furthermore, if a game ball further enters the second starting port 22 while a symbol variation game based on the ball entering the second starting port 22 is being played, the execution of the symbol variation game based on the entering ball will be suspended. Excluding the symbol variation game that is currently being executed, up to 4 symbols can be put on hold. The specific configuration of the main RAM 103 related to suspension is the same as that of the first starting port 21 described above, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted.

Although a protruding member movable in the front-rear direction is used as the second starting port 22, a so-called "electric tulip" having movable wing pieces may also be used.
Further, although the second starting port 22 is configured as a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, it may also be configured with a passage area through which a game ball can pass.

In addition, in this embodiment, a game ball enters the first starting port 21 and the second starting port 22, a special symbol hit determination process is performed, and the special symbol, decorative symbol image, and fourth symbol image are displayed in a variable manner. Then, after the variation time has elapsed, the judgment result of the special symbol hit judgment process (special symbol, decorative symbol image, and fourth symbol image) is derived (determined display). , it is sometimes simply referred to as a "1 variation game." Furthermore, the execution of the "symbol variation game" is sometimes referred to as "variation display."

In addition, when one game ball enters the first starting port 21, the first special symbol display 27a and the image display device 26 display a "symbol change" based on the entry of one game ball. When the "game" is executed and one game ball enters the second starting port 22, the second special symbol display 27b and the image display device 26 recognize that the first game ball has entered the ball. A "symbol variation game" based on the above is executed. Therefore, the "symbol variation game" is a general term for a game played on the first special symbol display 27a and the image display device 26, and a game played on the second special symbol display 27b and the image display device 26. It refers to the general term for the games being played.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the variation time in the symbol variation game has elapsed, the determination results of the special symbol hit determination process (the special symbol and the decorative symbol image and the fourth symbol image) are derived (the special symbol and the decorative symbol image). (of the symbol image and the fourth symbol image) is referred to as "confirmed display". On the other hand, in a symbol variation game, temporarily stopping the decorative symbol image before the variation time elapses is called "temporary stop display" of the decorative symbol image. Examples of "temporary stop display" include "reach", which will be described later, and "shaking fluctuation display" before "confirmation display". "Sway fluctuation display" before "confirmed display" means, for example, that the decorative pattern image is "temporarily stopped display" at "767" etc., then "confirmed display" at "767", or once " 767" is displayed as a "temporary stop display", and after performing a reversal effect and deriving "777", "777" is "confirmed display", or a variable display is performed at the branch point. It will be done.

(About normal prize opening 23)
A total of 4 normal winning holes 23 are provided, 3 in the lower left of the gaming area 7 and 1 in the lower right, and the 3 normal winning holes 23 in the lower left are , the game ball can enter when the so-called "left-handed hit" is being performed, and the "1" normal winning hole 23 at the lower right can be entered when the so-called "right-handed hit" is being performed. Game balls can be entered. In addition, the normal winning opening 23, like the first starting opening 21, is always open upward and always allows the entry of game balls. When a game ball enters the normal winning hole 23, for example, "8" game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the arrangement position of the normal winning a prize opening 23 can be changed arbitrarily, and the number may also be less than "4". Further, the number of prize balls may be made different between the "3" normal winning holes 23 at the lower left and the "1" normal winning hole 23 at the lower right.
In addition, in a winning game, when a game ball enters the normal winning hole 23, a ball entering notification is performed using the speaker 10 and the image display device 26 (see FIG. 53), and other than winning games (for example, normal game state) When a game ball enters the normal winning hole 23, the ball entering notification using the speaker 10 and the image display device 26 is not performed.
In the winning game, the normal winning holes 23 to be notified of ball entry may be "4" normal winning holes 23, only "1" normal winning hole 23 in the lower right corner, or the normal winning hole 23 in the lower left corner. It is also possible to have "3" normal winning openings 23.

(About the big prize opening 24)
The grand prize opening 24 is provided in the lower right part of the game area 7, and allows a game ball to enter when so-called "right-handed hitting" is performed. In addition, the big prize opening 24 has an opening/closing door, and when a win is determined in the special symbol hit determination process, a winning game is executed, the opening/closing door tilts forward, and the game ball enters. is allowed. When a game ball enters the big prize opening 24, for example, "12" game balls are paid out as prize balls.
In other words, in the winning game in this embodiment, "right-handed hitting" is essential.
In addition, the arrangement of the big winning hole 24 is not limited to this, and for example, it may be provided at a position where the ball can be entered by a "left-handed hitter", or a position where the ball can be entered by a "left-handed hitter" and a "right-handed hitter" position. They may be provided at positions where the ball can be hit by a right-handed ball, or a plurality of balls may be provided at positions where the ball can be hit by a right-handed ball.

Here, in the winning game, the opening/closing door of the big prize opening 24 is opened (tilted forward) for the number of awarded rounds shown in FIG. Then, it is opened (tilted forward) for 29.5S (S = seconds) per round, and when the entry of 10 game balls is detected by the later-described big winning hole detection SW 24a before 29.5S elapses. , 29. Even before 5S has elapsed, the opening/closing door will be closed and the next round will proceed, and this will be repeated for the specified number of rounds. On the other hand, if 29.5 seconds elapse (so-called "attacker full open") before the entry of 10 game balls is detected by the big winning opening detection SW 24a, the opening/closing door will be closed and the game will proceed to the next round. Become. In this case, one round of the game ends without reaching 10 balls, which is the prescribed number of balls per round, which is disadvantageous for the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, a door that tilts forward is used as the big prize opening 24, but a so-called "electric tulip" may be used, or a "shutter member" that moves forward and backward may be used. good.

(Regarding the image display device 26)
The image display device 26 has a display area over almost the entire area, is located above the stage 17, and is capable of displaying a symbol variation game and an effect image in the display area. That is, based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 21 or the second starting port 22 and the special symbol hit determination process is performed, the left decorative pattern image 26a, the middle decorative pattern image 26b, the right decorative pattern image The symbol image 26c is varied (vertically scrolled) in the variable display area. Note that whether a game ball enters the first starting port 21 or a game ball enters the second starting port 22, the left decorative pattern image 26a, the middle decorative pattern image 26b, and the right decorative pattern are common. The symbol image 26c is varied (vertically scrolled) in the variable display area (the special symbol display devices are different, but the decorative symbol images used in the image display device 26 are common).

Then, a performance image is displayed within the variable time described below, and when the variable time has passed, if it is a win, for example, "7" is stopped on each decorative pattern image, and a combination of decorative patterns of "777" is displayed. By displaying the confirmation, it is notified that the game has won. On the other hand, if it is a loss, the loss is notified by, for example, displaying the combination of decorative symbols "765".

In addition, apart from each decorative pattern image, a fourth pattern image 26d (the "4th" pattern next to the left decorative pattern image 26a, middle decorative pattern image 26b, and right decorative pattern image 26c described above) is placed on the right side of the display area. It can be displayed at the bottom, and variable display and fixed display are possible in synchronization with each decorative pattern image. The image display device 26 also displays a first starting opening pending number image 26e that displays the number of pending symbols in the symbol variation game at the first starting opening 21 from “0” to “4” and a symbol variation image 26e at the second starting opening 22. A second starting port pending number image 26f that displays the number of pending games as "0" to "4" and a first starting port that displays the number of pending balls in the symbol variation game at the first starting port 21 as a pending ball image. The first held ball image display area 26g, the first starting port second held ball image display area 26h, the first starting port third held ball image display area 26i, the first starting port fourth held ball image 26 display area j, and ( In FIG. 3, the second starting opening 22 (simply indicated as "g", "h", "i", and "j") displays the number of holds in the symbol variation game at the second starting opening 22 as a held ball image. 1 held ball image display area 26k, 2nd starting port 2nd held ball image display area 26l, 2nd starting port 3rd held ball image display area 26m, 2nd starting port 4th held ball image display area 26n (FIG. can be displayed simply as ``k'', ``l'', ``m'', and ``n''). Further, a variable icon display area 26o (simply indicated as "o" in FIG. 3), which displays an icon image corresponding to the symbol variable game currently being executed, is enabled to be displayed.

The number of pending balls displayed in the first starting port pending number image 26e and the number of pending balls displayed in the first starting port first held ball image display area 26g to the first starting port fourth held ball image display area 26j In principle, the number of pending balls displayed in the second starting port pending number image 26f and the second starting port first held ball image display area 26k to second starting port are synchronized (excluding cases where a command error etc. occurs). In principle, the number of pending balls displayed in the starting port fourth held ball image display area 26n is synchronized (except when a command error or the like occurs). For example, when "4" is displayed in the first starting port held ball image 26e, "4" balls are displayed in the first starting port first held ball image display area 26g to the first starting port fourth held ball image display area 26j. The held ball image will be displayed.

Note that the number of reservations displayed as the first starting gate reservation number image 26e and the number of reservations displayed as the second starting gate reservation number image 26f may be referred to as "numeric reservation" hereinafter. Also, the first starting port first held ball image display area 26g, the first starting port second held ball image display area 26h, the first starting port third held ball image display area 26i, the first starting port fourth held ball image 26 display area j, 2nd starting port 1st held ball image display area 26k, 2nd starting port 2nd held ball image display area 26l, 2nd starting port 3rd held ball image display area 26m and the second starting port and the held ball image displayed in the fourth held ball image display area 26n may be referred to as a "holding icon" below. Furthermore, the icon image displayed in the variable icon display area 26o may be hereinafter referred to as "the variable icon". Further, the variable icon and the pending icon may be collectively referred to simply as an "icon."

In addition, the fluctuation icon display area 26o, the first starting port first held ball image display area 26g, the first starting port second held ball image display area 26h, the first starting port third held ball image display area 26i, the first Starting port fourth held ball image display area 26j, second starting port first held ball image display area 26k, second starting port second held ball image display area 26l, second starting port third held ball image display area 26m, Although the second starting port fourth held ball image display area 26n is displayed on the image display device 26, it is not limited to this, and may be displayed on an LED, a lamp, etc. may be displayed on another display device (for example, a second image display device, so-called "sub-liquid crystal").

The left decorative pattern image 26a, the middle decorative pattern image 26b, the right decorative pattern image 26c, and the fourth pattern image 26d can display pattern images from "1" to "8", and are used in the special pattern hit determination process. If the judgment result is a hit, one of the following symbol combinations can be displayed: "111", "222", "333", "444", "555", "666", "777", "888" It is.

In this embodiment, basically, once "special symbol A" and "special symbol E", which will be described later in FIG. ” is determined, the symbol combination “333” can be displayed, and if “special symbol C” and “special symbol F” are determined, “111”, “222”, “444”, and “555” are displayed. ”, “666”, and “888” can be displayed.

In addition, as an exception, when "Special Design A" or "Special Design E" is determined, either "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", or "888" is selected. A combination of symbols may also be displayed. In this case, after the winning game ends, the actual gaming state is a variable probability gaming state, which will be described later, but the appearance of the image display device 26 (background image, etc.) will be a display of a time-saving gaming state, which will be described later. In this way, the time-saving gaming state is not made to be a low-probability state, but the player is made to have expectations for the variable-probability gaming state even in the time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, if the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, symbol combinations other than the above symbol combinations can be displayed. In the case of a loss, if a special symbol variation pattern with "Reach" is determined in the special symbol variation pattern described later, a combination of symbols such as "767" will be confirmed and displayed, and a special symbol variation pattern without "Reach" will be displayed. When the symbol variation pattern is determined, a combination of symbols such as "765" will be displayed as determined, for example.

In addition, "reach" is a state in which the left decorative pattern image 26a and the right decorative pattern image 26c are displaying the same number image (temporarily stopped display), and the middle decorative pattern image 26b is fluctuating (temporarily displayed). In this embodiment, if the judgment result of the "special symbol hit determination process" is a hit, "reach" is always selected. Since the game is structured so that the game goes through the game, it can be said that the player can expect a winning game.

In addition, the fourth symbol image 26d may not be a combination of the above-mentioned symbols, but may simply display a one-digit number or a two-digit number. It may also be possible to identify the type of pattern, whether it is a loss or a loss.

(About the pattern display device 27)
The symbol display device 27 is provided outside the game area (outside the outer rail member 18), which is a different area from the game area 7 of the game board 6. As shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 has a first special symbol that is display-controlled by the main control board 100 and is used to execute a symbol variation game based on a game ball entering the first starting port 21. A display 27a and a second special symbol display 27b for executing a symbol variation game based on a game ball entering the second starting port 22 are provided. Here, the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b are composed of 7-segment displays, and in the symbol variation game, the special symbols are displayed with a "-" (horizontal bar) from the start of variation. When the timing comes to derive the judgment result of the special symbol hit determination process, if it is a loss, a "-" (horizontal bar symbol) will be lit up (confirmed display), and if it is a win, for example, "7" is lit (confirmed display). In other words, the "special symbol" refers to a symbol whose display is controlled by the main control board 100.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "special design", the above-mentioned left decorative design image 26a, middle decorative design image 26b, right decorative design image 26c, and fourth design image 26d are simply referred to as "design" or "identification". Sometimes referred to as "information." Moreover, the left decorative pattern image 26a, the middle decorative pattern image 26b, and the right decorative pattern image 26c managed by the production control board 200 may be simply referred to as "decorative patterns." Further, the left decorative pattern image 26a, middle decorative pattern image 26b, right decorative pattern image 26c, and fourth pattern image 26d, which are managed by the production control board 200, may be collectively referred to as "sub-designs."

In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 is controlled to display by the main control board 100, and displays the number of pending symbols of the symbol variation game based on the game ball entering the first starting port 21. A first special symbol reservation display 27c is provided to display the first special symbol reservation display 27c, and a second special symbol reservation display 27d is provided to display the number of reservations in the symbol variation game based on the game ball entering the second starting port 22. ing.

The first special symbol reservation display 27c and the second special symbol reservation display 27d are each composed of two dot LED indicators, and the number of reservations is indicated by "turning off", "lighting", and "blinking". It is possible to display. For example, if the number of pending items is ``0'', both dot LED indicators will be ``off'', and if the number of pending items is ``1'', one will be ``lit'' and the other will be ``unlit''. However, if the number of pending items is ``2'', both will be ``lit'', and if the number of pending items is ``3'', one will be ``lit'', the other will be ``blinking'', and the number of pending items will be ``lit''. If it is "4", both will "flash". In addition, in the following, turning off the lights on the first special symbol holding display 27c and the second special symbol holding display 27d may be indicated by "○", lighting may be indicated by "●", and blinking may be indicated by "◎". .

In addition, the first special symbol holding display 27c displays the number of holdings displayed as the above-mentioned first starting hole holding number image 26e, and the first starting hole first holding ball image display area 26g to the first starting hole fourth In principle, the second special symbol holding display 27d is synchronized with the number of holding balls displayed in the holding ball image display area 26j (except when a command error etc. occurs), and the second special symbol holding display 27d displays the above-mentioned second start opening holding number image. In principle, the number of pending balls displayed as 26f is synchronized with the number of pending balls displayed as the second starting port first held ball image display area 26k to the second starting port fourth held ball image display area 26n (command (Excluding cases where an error etc. occurs). For example, when both the first special symbol reservation indicators 27c are "blinking" (when the number of pending symbols is 4), "4" is displayed as the first starting opening pending number image 26e, and the first starting opening "4" held ball images are displayed in the 1st held ball image display area 26g to the 1st starting port 4th held ball image display area 26j. In addition, below, the 1st special symbol reservation display 27c and the 2nd special symbol reservation display 27d may be called a "main reservation display."

In addition, although the 1st special symbol reservation display 27c and the 2nd special symbol reservation display 27d were each comprised by two dot LED display devices, it is not restricted to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device whose display is controlled by the main control board 100 may be provided, and the information may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 includes a normal symbol display that is display-controlled by the main control board 100 and that executes a normal symbol variation game based on the passage of a game ball to the gate member 20. 27e is provided. The normal symbol display 27e is composed of two dot LED displays, and in the normal symbol variation game, from the start of variation, one is lit and the other is turned off, and one is turned off and the other is lit. When the timing for deriving the judgment result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is reached by repeating the above steps, if it is a loss, one light will turn on and the other one will turn off. A confirmation display is made by turning off one light and turning on the other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 is display-controlled by the main control board 100, and displays the number of suspensions of the normal symbol variation game based on the game ball passing through the gate member 20. A normal symbol retention display 27f is provided. In addition, the normal symbol retention display 27f is composed of two dot LED indicators, similar to the above-mentioned first special symbol retention display 27c and second special symbol retention display 27d, and indicates the number of symbols reserved. Since the display mode is also the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 also displays a "round number" (a given round in FIG. A round display 27g is provided to display "Reference number)". The round indicator 27g is composed of "4" dot LED indicators, one for 5 rounds and one for 10 rounds as shown in FIG. 6. For example, if you win with special symbol A, the LED indicator for round 10 will light up, and the others will turn off, and if you win with special symbol B, the LED indicator for round 5 will light up. lights up and others go off.

In addition, the gaming board 6 is provided with a plurality of board lighting devices 29 (for example, full-color LEDs), which emit light in a predetermined light pattern when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. The decorativeness of the game machine 1 is enhanced. For example, the board lighting device 29 can decorate the entire game area 7 of the game board 6, as shown by reference numeral 29 in FIG. Further, in order to make the display contents of the image display device 26 stand out, the panel illumination device 29 can be completely turned off. Further, the predetermined light emission pattern is composed of a plurality of light emission patterns that define a light emission speed, a light emission color, which LEDs are to be emitted and which LEDs are not to be emitted, and the like.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 26 (so-called "center accessory"), a first special symbol sub-holding display 29a and a second special symbol sub-holding display 29b, which are one aspect of the board lighting device 29, are provided. and a right-hand hit indicator 29c are provided. The first special symbol sub-reservation display 29a and the second special symbol sub-reservation display 29b are display-controlled by the performance control board 200, and are each composed of two dot LED indicators, and are set to "off", " It is possible to display the number of pending items by ``lighting up'' or ``flashing''. For example, if the number of pending items is ``0'', both dot LED indicators will be ``off'', and if the number of pending items is ``1'', one will be ``lit'' and the other will be ``unlit''. However, if the number of pending items is ``2'', both will be ``lit'', and if the number of pending items is ``3'', one will be ``lit'', the other will be ``blinking'', and the number of pending items will be ``lit''. If it is "4", both will "flash". In addition, in the following, turning off in the first special symbol sub-holding display 29a and the second special symbol sub-holding display 29b is indicated by "○", lighting is indicated by "●", and blinking is indicated by "◎". There is.

In addition, the first special symbol sub-holding display 29a displays the number of holdings displayed as the first starting hole holding number image 26e and the first starting hole first holding ball image display area 26g to the first starting hole fourth holding. In principle, it is synchronized with the number of pending pieces displayed in the ball image display area 26j (except when a command error etc. occurs), and the second special symbol sub-holding display 29b is displayed as the second start opening pending number image 26f. In principle, the number of held balls displayed is synchronized with the number of held balls displayed as the second starting port first held ball image display area 26k to the second starting port fourth held ball image display area 26n (command error etc. (except in cases where this occurs). For example, when both the first special symbol sub-reservation indicators 29a are "blinking" (when there are four reservations), "4" is displayed as the first starting opening pending number image 26e, and the first starting opening "4" held ball images are displayed in the first held ball image display area 26g to the first starting port fourth held ball image display area 26j. In addition, below, the 1st special symbol sub-reservation display 29a and the 2nd special symbol sub-reservation display 29b may be called a "sub-reservation display."

Although the first special symbol sub-reservation display 29a and the second special symbol sub-reservation display 29b are each composed of two dot LED displays, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image may be displayed on a display device other than the image display device 26 (for example, a second image display device, a so-called "sub-liquid crystal").

The display of the right-hand display 29c is controlled by the production control board 200, and, for example, it lights up based on receiving an opening command in a winning game, or displays a game state command (probability change) or a game state command (time saving), for example. It lights up based on what is received. This allows the player to be encouraged to play right-handed. On the other hand, when in the normal gaming state, the light is turned off (the light is turned off based on the reception of the gaming state command (normal)), thereby encouraging the player to play left-handed.
Note that the right-handed hitting indicator 29c is in an off state to encourage the player to play left-handed, but by providing a left-handed hitting indicator and lighting the left-handed hitting indicator, the player can The player may also be encouraged to hit left-handed.

(Internal configuration of pachinko machine 1)
Next, the internal configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIG. 4. Note that the description of the components described in the configuration of the game board 6 in FIG. 3 will be omitted as appropriate.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a main control board 100, an effect control board 200, a payout control board 300, and a power supply board 400 mounted on the rear side of the middle frame 3 (see FIG. 2). As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 and the production control board 200 only have one-way communication from the main control board 100 to the production control board 200 via a harness etc. (not shown). are connected in such a way that this is possible. Further, the main control board 100 and the payout control board 300 are connected via a harness or the like so that bidirectional communication is possible. Further, the payout control board 300 is connected to the production control board 200 so that only one-way communication is possible. In addition, the power supply board 400 receives external power via a power plug (not shown), and transmits the supplied external power to any of the main control board 100, the effect control board 200, and the payout control board 300. It is connected in such a way that it can be supplied even if

In addition, the main control board 100 is connected via harnesses, relay boards, etc. to enable input from various SWs, and also controls display to various indicators and drive control to various solenoids. They are connected to each other via harnesses, relay boards, etc. to make this possible. In addition, the production control board 200 is connected via harnesses, relay boards, etc. to enable input from various SWs, and is also connected via harnesses and relay boards to enable display control to various displays. They are connected via a relay board or the like.

(About the main control board 100)
The main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs control processing related to the progress of the game, a main ROM 102 that stores control programs necessary for the control processing related to the progress of the game, and a main ROM 102 that stores control programs necessary for the control processing related to the progress of the game. A main RAM 103 that can be read and written is provided. In addition to these, although not shown, an interrupt controller circuit that provides an interrupt signal to the main CPU 101, a hardware random number generation circuit that generates random numbers within a certain range, and the like are provided. Note that the control processing related to the progress of the game in the main CPU 101 will be described in detail later using a flowchart.

Further, the main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area (see FIG. 9) for managing various information. For example, a setting value storage area that stores setting value information, a special symbol status flag storage area that stores the status of special symbols, a gaming status storage area that stores gaming status, a winning status storage area that stores the status of winning games, A normal symbol state flag storage area that stores the state of the normal symbol, a normal symbol per state state storage area that stores the state of the normal symbol per game, and an executed flag storage area that stores information that the time saving game state has been activated due to opportunity 2, which will be described later. can be mentioned.

Further, the main RAM 103 is provided with a counter (see FIG. 9) for managing various information (time and number of times). For example, a normal game state game counter for counting (counting memory) the number of times a symbol variation game has been played in the normal gaming state, and a number counter for counting (counting memory) the number of times a symbol variation game has been played in the time saving gaming state. A time-saving game state game number counter, a variable probability game state game number counter for counting (memory counting) the number of times the symbol variation game has been played in a variable probability gaming state, a time management counter for managing various times, and a time management counter for winning games. One example is a round number counter for managing the number of rounds.

Note that the game number counter may be used as both the normal game state game number counter and the time saving game state game number counter (one counter may be used). In this case, counting may be started from the start of the time-saving game state after the end of the winning game, and the counter value may be inherited even if the time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is entered. For example, at the start of the time-saving game state after the end of the winning game, the counter value is "0", and when the time-saving game state ends and shifts to the normal game state, the counter value becomes "100". Then, if the counter value is determined to be "1000" in step S105-4-12-8 of the game state-based processing to be described later, the processing may be affirmed.

(About gate detection SW20a)
The gate detection SW 20a is provided inside the passage opening of the gate member 20 of the game board 6, and is a SW for detecting that a game ball has passed through the gate member 20. In other words, the gate detection SW 20a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and when the passing of a game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. Become. Then, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) that inputs the detected information determines that the normal symbol variation game is not being executed on the normal symbol pending display 27f, and that the number of pending normal symbol variation games is "0". If so, the normal symbol variation game is controlled to be executed immediately, and if the number of suspensions of the normal symbol variation game is "1" to "3", the execution of the normal symbol variation game is suspended. When the number of suspensions of the normal symbol variation game is "4", the execution of the normal symbol variation game is controlled not to be suspended.

(Regarding the first starting port detection SW21a)
The first starting hole detection SW 21a is provided inside the winning hole of the first starting hole 21 of the game board 6, and is a SW for detecting that a game ball has entered the first starting hole 21. In other words, the first starting port detection SW 21a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and when the entry of a game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. will be done. Then, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) inputting the detected information causes the payout control board 300 to pay out three game balls as prize balls due to the game balls entering the first starting port 21. Process.

Furthermore, when the input is made from the first starting port detection SW 21a, the main control board 100 does not execute the symbol variation game on either the first special symbol display 27a or the second special symbol display 27b. , and when the number of pendings on the first special symbol pending display 27c and the second special symbol pending display 27d is "0", the symbol variation game is immediately executed on the first special symbol display 27a. If the number of pending symbol fluctuation games on the first special symbol suspension display 27c is between "1" and "3", the execution of the symbol fluctuation game is suspended, and the first special symbol When the number of pending symbol variation games on the pending display 27c is "4", control is performed so that execution of the symbol variation game is not suspended.

(Regarding the second starting port detection SW22a)
The second starting opening detection SW 22a is provided inside the winning opening of the second starting opening 22, and is a SW for detecting that a game ball has entered the second starting opening 22. In other words, the second starting port detection SW 22a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and when the entry of a game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. will be done. Then, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) inputting the detected information causes the payout control board 300 to pay out two game balls as prize balls due to the game balls entering the second starting port 22. Process.

In addition, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) executes the symbol variation game on both the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b when an input is made from the second starting port detection SW 22a. If not, and the number of pending on the second special symbol pending display 27d is "0", the second special symbol display 27b is immediately controlled to execute the symbol variation game, and When the number of pending symbols in the symbol variation game on the second special symbol preservation display 27d is between "1" and "3", the execution of the symbol variation game is controlled to be postponed, and the number on the second special symbol preservation display 27d is When the number of suspensions of the symbol variation game is "4", control is performed so that execution of the symbol variation game is not suspended.

(Regarding the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 22b)
The second starting port opening/closing solenoid 22b is provided behind the second starting port 22, and is a solenoid for causing a protruding member provided in the second starting port 22 to perform an opening/closing operation. In other words, the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 22b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) determines whether the normal symbol hits or not in the normal symbol hit determination process. When it is determined, the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 22b is drive-controlled in order to open and close in the opening/closing manner shown in “Opening/closing mode of second starting port” in FIG.

(About normal winning opening detection SW23a)
The normal winning hole detection SW 23a is provided inside the normal winning hole 23 of the game board 6, and is a SW for detecting that a game ball has entered the normal winning hole 23. In other words, the normal winning opening detection SW 23a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and when the entry of a game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. That will happen. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101) inputting the detected information then controls the payout control board 300 to cause the payout control board 300 to pay out 8 game balls as prize balls due to the game balls entering the normal winning slot 23. Perform processing.

(About the big winning opening detection SW24a)
The big winning hole detection SW 24a is provided inside the big winning hole 24, and is a SW for detecting that a game ball has entered the big winning hole 24. In other words, the big winning opening detection SW 24a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and when the entry of a game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. That will happen. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101) inputting the detected information then controls the payout control board 300 to make the payout control board 300 pay out 12 game balls as prize balls due to the game balls entering the big prize opening 24. Perform processing. In addition, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) transmits to the performance control board 200 a large winning opening winning command indicating that a game ball has entered the large winning opening 24. Thereby, the performance control board 200 can also recognize the state of entry of game balls into the grand prize opening 24.

(About the grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 24b)
The big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 24b is provided behind the big winning opening 24, and is a solenoid for causing the opening/closing door provided in the big winning opening 24 described above to perform an opening/closing operation. In other words, the big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 24b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) controls the number of award rounds shown in FIG. 6 in the winning game. In order to open and close the opening/closing door, the large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 24b is driven and controlled.

(About the outlet detection SW25a)
The out port detection SW 25a is provided inside the entrance of the out port 25, and is a SW for detecting that a game ball has entered the out port 25. In other words, the outlet detection SW 25a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and when the entry of a game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. It turns out. This allows the main control board 100 to know the number of outs.

(About the first special symbol display 27a)
The first special symbol display 27a is provided in the symbol display device 27, is display-controlled by the main control board 100, and is used to execute a symbol variation game based on the game ball entering the first starting port 21. This is an indicator. In other words, the first special symbol display 27a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) controls the symbol variation on the first special symbol display 27a. When the game execution conditions are met, the display of the symbol variation game is controlled on the first special symbol display 27a. It should be noted that the execution condition of the symbol variation game on the first special symbol display 27a is satisfied when an affirmative determination is made in the process of step S105-2-4 in the "Special symbol variation start process" (see FIG. 19), which will be described later. This applies in some cases.

(About the second special symbol display 27b)
The second special symbol display 27b is provided in the symbol display device 27, is display-controlled by the main control board 100, and is used to execute a symbol variation game based on the game ball entering the second starting port 22. This is an indicator. In other words, the second special symbol display 27b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) controls the symbol fluctuations on the second special symbol display 27b. When the game execution conditions are met, the display of the symbol variation game is controlled on the second special symbol display 27b. Note that the condition for executing the symbol variation game on the second special symbol display 27b is satisfied when an affirmative determination is made in the process of step S105-2-1 in the "Special symbol variation start process" (see FIG. 19). Applicable.

(About the first special symbol holding display 27c)
The first special symbol suspension display 27c is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is display-controlled by the main control board 100, and indicates the suspension of the symbol variation game based on the game ball entering the first starting port 21. It is a display device for displaying numbers. In other words, the first special symbol holding display 27c and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 receives information about the detected game ball from the first starting opening detection SW 21a. When inputted, if the upper limit value of reservation (4 pieces) has not been reached, the display of the first special symbol reservation display 27c is controlled (from off to on, or from on to blinking). On the other hand, when the symbol fluctuation game based on the game ball entering the first starting port 21 which is currently fluctuating ends, the display of the first special symbol holding display 27c is controlled (from blinking to lighting, or from lighting to turning off). ).

(About the second special symbol holding display 27d)
The second special symbol suspension display 27d is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is display-controlled by the main control board 100, and indicates the suspension of the symbol variation game based on the game ball entering the second starting port 22. It is a display device for displaying numbers. In other words, the second special symbol holding display 27d and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 receives information about the game ball detected from the second starting port detection SW 22a. When inputted, if the upper limit value of reservation (4 pieces) has not been reached, the display of the second special symbol reservation display 27d is controlled (from off to on, or from on to blinking). On the other hand, when the symbol fluctuation game based on the game ball entering the second starting port 22 which is currently fluctuating ends, the display of the second special symbol holding display 27d is controlled (from blinking to lighting, or from lighting to extinguishing). ).

(About the normal symbol display 27e)
The normal symbol display 27e is provided in the symbol display device 27 and is a display for executing the normal symbol variation game whose display is controlled by the main control board 100. In other words, the normal symbol display 27e and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) executes the normal symbol fluctuation game on the normal symbol display 27e. When the condition is satisfied, the display of the normal symbol variation game is controlled on the normal symbol display 27e.

(About the normal symbol holding display 27f)
The normal symbol reservation display 27f is provided in the symbol display device 27, is display-controlled by the main control board 100, and displays the number of reservations in the regular symbol variation game based on the passage of the game ball to the gate member 20. It is an indicator for In other words, the normal symbol hold display 27f and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) receives information on detecting game balls from the gate detection SW 20a. When input, if the upper limit value of reservation (4 pieces) has not been reached, the display of the normal symbol reservation display 27f is controlled (from off to on, or from on to blinking). On the other hand, when the currently fluctuating normal symbol variation game ends, the display of the normal symbol pending display 27f is controlled (from blinking to lighting, or from lighting to extinguishing).

(About round display 27g)
The round display 27g is provided in the symbol display device 27, is display-controlled by the main control board 100, and is a display for displaying the number of openings of the big prize opening 24 in the above-mentioned winning game. In other words, the round display 27g and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and for example, when a symbol variation game that is determined to be a hit in the special symbol hit determination process ends, the first special symbol At the timing of displaying a special symbol (for example, "7") indicating a win on the display 27a, the LED display for the number of rounds corresponding to the determined winning game is controlled to light up. Then, when a winning game is being executed, the round indicator 27g is controlled to be lit continuously, and when the winning game is finished, the round indicator 27g is controlled to be turned off.

(About magnetic sensor 27h)
The magnetic sensors 27h are provided at multiple locations on the game board 6, and are sensors for detecting magnetism. In other words, the magnetic sensor 27h and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and for example, when abnormal magnetism exceeding a predetermined value is detected, the detected information is transmitted to the main control board 100. It will be input to the control board 100. Thereby, abnormal magnetism can be detected in the main control board 100. When abnormal magnetism is detected, information on the detection of abnormal magnetism is transmitted to the production control board 200. This makes it possible to notify that abnormal magnetism has been detected.

(About the radio sensor 27i)
The radio wave sensors 27i are provided at multiple locations on the game board 6, and are sensors for detecting radio waves. That is, the radio wave sensor 27i and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and for example, when an abnormal radio wave exceeding a predetermined value is detected, the detected information is transmitted to the main control board 100. It will be input to the control board 100. This allows the main control board 100 to detect abnormal radio waves. Then, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, information on the detection of the abnormal radio wave is transmitted to the production control board 200. This makes it possible to notify that an abnormal radio wave has been detected.

(About the production control board 200)
As shown in FIG. 4, the production control board 200 is provided with a production control section 200a, and the production control section 200a includes a sub CPU 201 that performs production control processing, and a control program necessary for the production control processing. It has a sub-ROM 202 for storing and a sub-RAM 203 capable of reading and writing necessary for the production control process. Further, an image/sound control section 200b is provided which is connected to the production control section 200a via a harness or the like to enable two-way communication, and the image/sound control section 200b performs image/sound control processing. It has an image/sound CPU 204 that performs this, a sound ROM 205 that stores sound data, a CGROM 206 that stores image data, and a VRAM 207 that includes a frame buffer that stores image generation data and the like. Further, a light emission drive control unit 200c is provided which is connected to the production control unit 200a via a harness etc. so as to enable two-way communication, and the light emission drive control unit 200c performs light emission control processing, drive control processing, etc. A light emission drive CPU 208 that performs the light emission control processing, a light emission drive ROM 209 that stores control programs necessary for the light emission control processing and drive control processing, and a light emission drive RAM 210 that can read and write necessary for the light emission control processing and drive control processing. have.

Further, the production control unit 200a is connected so that operation information from the production button detection SW 14a, operation information from the production lever detection SW 15a, and operation information from the cross key detection SW 16a can be input.

(About production button detection SW14a)
The performance button detection SW 14a is provided on the performance button 14, and is a SW for detecting that the performance button 14 has been pressed by the player when the performance button 14 is in its valid operation period. In other words, the production button detection SW 14a and the production control board 200 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and information indicating that the production button 14 has been pressed is input to the production control board 200. There is. The performance control board 200, which has received the information indicating that the performance button 14 has been pressed, controls the performance in response to the depression of the performance button 14 via the image display device 26 and the speaker 10. Here, the production button 14 has a valid operation period set for a predetermined period of time in, for example, a symbol variation game, and the production button detection SW 14a detects only the press when the valid operation period is set.

(About production lever detection SW15a)
The production lever detection SW 15a is provided on the production lever 15, and is a SW for detecting that the production lever 15 has been operated by the player when the production lever 15 is in the valid operation period. In other words, the production lever detection SW 15a and the production control board 200 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and information indicating that the production lever 15 has been operated is input to the production control board 200. There is. Then, the performance control board 200 inputted with the information indicating that the performance lever 15 has been operated controls the performance according to the operation of the performance lever 15 via the image display device 26 and the speaker 10. Here, the production lever 15 has a valid operation period set for a predetermined period of time in, for example, a symbol variation game, and the production lever detection SW 15a detects only the operation when the valid operation period is set.

(About cross key detection SW16a)
The cross key detection SW 16a is provided on the cross key button 16, and is a SW for detecting that the cross key button 16 has been pressed by the player. In other words, the cross key detection SW 16a and the production control board 200 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and information indicating that the cross key button 16 has been operated is input to the production control board 200. ing.

As described above, by operating the cross key button 16, the amount of light emitted from the light emitting device 9, the amount of light emitted from the image display device 26, and the volume emitted from the speaker 10 can be adjusted. Specifically, by pressing the upward button of the cross key button 16, the light intensity can be increased (in steps), and by pressing the downward button of the cross key button 16, the light intensity can be decreased (in steps). By pressing the right button of the cross key button 16, the volume can be increased (in steps), and by pressing the left button of the cross key button 16, the volume can be decreased (in steps).

Note that the amount of light may be set in three levels: "strong," "medium," and "weak," or may be set in five subdivided levels. Further, the volume may be set in three levels: "loud," "medium," and "low," or may be set in five sub-levels. Furthermore, a level gauge image (for example, see layer 3 in FIG. 38) indicating the degree of adjustment of the light amount and sound volume may be displayed, and adjustment sounds may be emitted in accordance with the stages. For example, when configuring the level of volume adjustment in 5 levels, the adjustment sound corresponding to the lowest volume value level 1 is set as "do♪", the adjustment sound corresponding to volume value level 2 is set as "re♪", and the adjustment sound corresponding to the lowest volume value level 1 is set as "re♪". The adjustment sound corresponding to level 3 may be "mi♪", the adjustment sound corresponding to volume value level 4 may be "fa♪", and the adjustment sound corresponding to the maximum volume value level 5 may be "so♪".

Note that the level gauge image may be displayed in a manner that matches the level of the light amount or sound volume, or may be displayed in a constant manner regardless of the light amount or sound volume level.
Specifically, the display mode that matches the light amount and volume level is, for example, the size (display area) of the level gauge image that indicates volume level 1, and the volume level 2 whose volume value is larger than volume level 1. It is assumed that the size (display area) of the level gauge image indicating the level gauge will be displayed in a large size (see FIG. 42, etc.).
On the other hand, the constant display mode regardless of the light amount or volume level is assumed to be a display in which the size (display area) of the level gauge image does not change whether the volume level is 1 or 2.

Moreover, the adjustment sound according to the stage may be configured to notify the current volume level by emitting a different sound for each stage.
Specifically, when the volume level is 1, it emits the sound "do ♪", when the volume level is 2, it emits the sound "re ♪", and when the volume level is 3, it emits the sound "mi ♪". is expected to be emitted.
As another example, the sound "pi♪" may be uniformly emitted at all stages, and the volume value may be varied for each stage.
Specifically, when the volume level is 1, a "pi♪" sound is emitted at a volume value corresponding to volume level 1, and when the volume level is 2, a sound "pi♪" is emitted at a volume value corresponding to volume level 2 (from volume level 1). It is assumed that a "pi♪" sound will be emitted at a high volume value).

Note that in this embodiment, the adjustment of the light intensity and the volume can be performed when the symbol variation game is not being played, but they may also be performed even when the symbol variation game is being played. good. In this case, it is preferable to perform the adjustment without emitting the above-mentioned level gauge image or adjustment sound, or by displaying it in a small size and outputting the adjustment sound at a low volume. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect image and effect sound corresponding to the symbol variation game from being obstructed by the level gauge image and adjustment sound.

Further, an image display device 26 is connected to the image/sound control section 200b, and can display image information generated by the image/sound control section 200b. Furthermore, a speaker 10 is connected to the image/sound control section 200b, so that sound information generated by the image/sound control section 200b can be output.

(About speaker 10)
As explained in FIG. 1, the speaker 10 is capable of outputting audio and sound effects. For example, if information indicating that the inner frame 3 is in the open state is not inputted from the frame open detection SW 3a, which will be described later, a notification sound indicating that the inner frame 3 is in the open state is output. That is, the speaker 10 and the image/sound control section 200b are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the above-mentioned sound is output from the speaker 10 under the control of the image/sound control section 200b.

Further, the light emitting device 9, the starting port light emitting device 21b, and the panel lighting device 29 are connected to the light emitting drive control section 200c, and the light emission can be controlled by the light emitting drive control section 200c. Further, a panel drive device 30 is connected to the light emission drive control section 200c, and the movable body 28 can be driven and controlled via the panel drive device 30.

(About the movable body 28)
The movable body 28 is provided on the game board 6, and is capable of operations such as "falling", "swinging", and "rotating". By performing these actions, it is suggested that a winning game may be awarded.

Furthermore, when the movable body 28 receives a power-related subcommand, it checks whether the above-mentioned "falling", "swinging", "rotating", etc. operations are performed normally in front of the display area of the image display device 26. It is designed to perform initial operations for In the initial operation, the movable body 28 moves in front of the display area of the image display device 26, so that the display content displayed in the display area becomes difficult to see for a certain period of time due to the movable body 28.
Note that the initial operation is performed at a position facing the display area of the image display device 26, and the movable body 28 does not move to a position facing outside the display area (outside the end of the display area). That is, even if the display content displayed in the display area becomes difficult to see due to the initial operation, other members (for example, the starting port light emitting device 21b, the first special symbol retention display 27c, the second special symbol retention display) 27d, panel illumination device 29, etc.) will not become difficult to see due to the initial movement of the movable body 28.

In addition to these, although not shown, an interrupt controller circuit that provides an interrupt signal to the sub CPU 201, a hardware random number generation circuit that generates random numbers within a certain range, and the like are provided.

(About the payout control board 300)
As shown in FIG. 4, the payout control board 300 includes a payout CPU 301 that performs a payout control process, a payout ROM 302 that stores a control program necessary for the payout control process, and a payout ROM 302 that stores reading and writing necessary for the payout control process. A possible payout RAM 303 is provided. Further, a payout device 304 is connected to the payout control board 300 via a harness or the like, and by controlling the payout device 304, game balls are paid out to the upper tray 5a.

Specifically, in the main control board 100, for example, when information that a game ball is detected from the first starting hole detection SW 21a described later is input, the main control board 100 sends out a command to pay out three prize balls. A payout command signal is transmitted to the payout control board 300, and the payout control board 300 that receives the command controls the payout device 304 to pay out three prize balls to the upper tray 5a. Then, when the payout of the three prize balls is completed, a payout completion signal is transmitted from the payout control board 300 to the main control board 100, and the information that the game ball has been detected is input from the first starting port detection SW 21a. Completes the payout of game balls for.

Further, a firing handle 8 is connected to the payout control board 300 via a harness or the like, and when the player touches the above-mentioned handle touch sensor provided on the firing handle 8, the firing handle 8 is gripped. The amount of rotation of the firing handle 8 is input based on the amount of a firing volume (not shown) provided on the firing handle 8.

Further, a firing device 305 is connected to the payout control board 300 via a harness or the like, and by controlling the firing device 305, game balls are fired into the gaming area 7. Specifically, the payout control board 300 controls the firing handle 8 when the player grasps the firing handle 8 and inputs the amount of rotation of the firing handle 8. The firing device 305 is controlled with intensity to fire the game ball.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, the payout control board 300 is connected to receive the input signal from the ball lending button 12 shown in FIG. 1 via a ball lending unit, etc. When the lending button 12 is operated by the player, the payout control board 300 controls the payout device 304 to dispense the number of game balls (for example, 125 balls) corresponding to one operation of the ball lending button 12. is delivered to the upper tray 5a.

(About frame open detection SW3a)
The frame open detection SW 3a is provided in the middle frame 3, and detects when the glass frame 4 is open, when the glass frame 4 and the middle frame 3 are open, or when the middle frame 3 is open. It is possible to detect the "open" state such as in the case where the glass frame 4 and the middle frame 3 are closed, and to detect the "closed" state when the glass frame 4 and the middle frame 3 are closed. In other words, the frame open detection SW 3a and the payout control board 300 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and when the frame is in the "closed" state described above, information indicating the closed state is input to the payout control board 300. That will happen. On the other hand, when in the above-mentioned "open" state, the information indicating the above-mentioned closed state is not input to the payout control board 300, and as a result of not being input, the payout control board 300 (payout CPU 301) is in the "open" state described above. can be detected.
Note that the payout control board 300 (payout CPU 301) can transmit information detected as being in the "closed" state and information detected as being in the "open" state to the production control board 200.

(About full tank detection SW300a)
A passage is formed between the upper tray 5a and the lower tray 5b for guiding game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 5a to the lower tray 5b, and a full tank detection SW 300a is provided in the passage. There is. If the game balls guided to the lower tray 5b are stored without being ejected (outside the game machine), the game balls will stop in the aisle, and when a predetermined amount of balls are stopped, the full tank detection SW 300a will be turned on. . Thereby, it is possible to detect that the lower tray 5b is also full of game balls.
Then, when the full tank detection SW 300a is turned ON, the payout CPU 301 stops the payout of game balls by the payout device 304, and transmits information that the full tank detection SW 300a is ON to the performance control board 200. There is. Thereby, in the production control board 200, it becomes possible to execute a notification urging the player to discharge the game balls stored in the lower tray 5b.

(About the power supply board 400)
As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100, the production control board 200, and the payout control board 300 are connected to the power supply board 400 via a harness etc., and as described above, a power plug (not shown) is connected to the power supply board 400. The external power is supplied to each of the main control board 100, the production control board 200, and the payout control board 300. Although not shown, the power supply board 400 is provided with a conversion circuit and the like that converts external power (100 volts AC) to 24 volts DC.

(About the special symbol hit determination table)
The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 5(A) is stored in the main ROM 102. Here, in this embodiment, six levels of setting values can be set, and FIG. 5(A) shows an example of a special symbol hit determination table for setting value 1. For example, if 1 is set as the setting value, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol hit determination process by referring to the special symbol hit determination table for the setting value 1 shown in (A), and if the other set values are If set, special symbol hit determination processing is performed with reference to a special symbol hit determination table for each set value (not shown). In addition, the first starting port and the second starting port common means that even if a game ball enters the first starting port 21 or a game ball enters the second starting port 22, the special symbol to be referred to This indicates that the determination table is common. Note that the set value is not limited to the "6" level, but can be set to any value. For example, it may be a "4" stage or a "2" stage. Alternatively, only the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 5(A) may be provided without providing set values.

In the special symbol hit determination table of FIG. 5(A), the probability of being determined to be a hit in the special symbol hit determination process is "1" when the gaming state is the normal gaming state and when the time saving gaming state is set. /319", the probability of being determined to be a loss is "318/319", and when the gaming state is a variable probability gaming state, the probability of being determined to be a loss in the special symbol hit determination process is "1/319". 32'', the probability of being judged as a loser is ``31/32''. In other words, when the gaming state is a variable probability gaming state, the probability of winning is approximately 10 times higher than in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. It can be said that this is a gaming state that is advantageous for the player compared to the current state.

In addition, in the special symbol hit determination table of FIG. 5(A), the hit determination probability is as described above, but in the special symbol hit determination table with other setting values not shown, the special symbol hit determination The probability of being judged as a hit is different. For example, in the special symbol hit determination table for the setting value "6", the probability of being determined to be a hit in the special symbol hit determination process is set when the gaming state is the normal gaming state and when it is the time saving gaming state. At "1/280", the probability of being determined to be a loss is "279/280", and when the gaming state is a variable probability gaming state, the probability of being determined to be a win in the special symbol hit determination process is "279/280". 1/28'', and the probability of being judged as a loser is ``27/28''. In this way, by being able to set different winning probabilities for each set value, it becomes easier for the game parlor to manage the ball output.

In addition, in the time saving gaming state and the variable probability gaming state, compared to the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 5(B) and FIG. Since the opening/closing mode that is easy to hit and is advantageous as the opening/closing mode of the protruding member of the second starting port 22 when the player hits a hit is selected, the variable probability gaming state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player. Next, the time-saving gaming state is the gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the normal gaming state is the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the gate member 20 is provided on the right side of the game area 7, and is not provided on the left side of the game area 7. If you hit right in the normal gaming state and let the game ball pass through the gate member 20, as shown in FIG. Although the protruding member can be opened, since the opening time is "0.9S", it is difficult to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 22, and most of the game balls launched enter the out port 25. It will pass.
Therefore, in the normal game state, the best game for the player is to hit the ball to the left and let the game ball enter the first starting port 21.
For this reason, when the gate detection SW 20a detects a game ball in the normal gaming state, a left-handed hit notification (see FIG. 40) is performed to encourage the player to play the optimal game.

Note that hereinafter, the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state may be collectively referred to as a low probability state, and the variable probability gaming state may be referred to as a high probability state. In addition, the normal gaming state is sometimes referred to as a non-variable short-term state, a non-variable short-term state, or a non-improving ball entry rate state, and the variable probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state are collectively referred to as a variable short-term state. , a short-change state, or an improved ball entry rate state.

(About the normal symbol hit determination table)
The normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 5(B) is stored in the main ROM 102. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the normal symbol hit determination process is "4/256", and the probability of being determined to be a loss is "252/256". , when in the time-saving gaming state and when in the variable probability gaming state, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the normal symbol hit determination process is "251/256", and the probability of being determined to be a loss is "5/256". ”. Therefore, compared to the normal gaming state, the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state is more likely to be determined as a hit in the normal symbol hit determination process, and can be said to be an advantageous gaming state for the player. . In addition, although a set value is not provided in the normal symbol hit determination table, a set value may be provided similarly to the special symbol hit determination table. For example, the set value "6" may be easier to hit in normal symbol hit determination than the set value "1".
In addition, in the normal gaming state, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the normal symbol hit determination process is set to "4/256", and the probability of being determined to be a loss to be "252/256", but this is not limited to this. , the probability of being determined to be a loss may be set to "256/256".

In addition, in this embodiment, for convenience, the state of the normal symbols in the normal game state is assumed to be "state A" (e.g., corresponding to the above-mentioned state in which the ball entry rate is not improved), and the state of the normal symbols in the time-saving gaming state and the variable probability gaming state is The state is assumed to be "state B" (e.g., corresponding to the above-mentioned ball entry rate improvement state).
In the time saving game state, the state is "state B" until 100 symbol variation games are played, and in the probability variable game state, the state is "state B" until the next winning game occurs.

(About the special symbol determination table)
The special symbol determination table in FIG. 6(A) shows the results of the special symbol hit determination process based on the game ball entering the first starting port 21, in which case it is a hit and when it is a loss. (1) Based on the table for the first starting port 21 and the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 22, which is referred to when determining the special symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display 27a. (2) The second symbol is referred to when determining the special symbol to be definitely displayed on the second special symbol display 27b depending on whether it is a hit or a loss as a result of the special symbol hit determination process. It has two tables, a table for the starting port 22 and a table for the starting port 22, and these are stored in the main ROM 102. Then, the main CPU 101 refers to the table corresponding to the starting hole into which the game ball entered, and determines a special symbol based on the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In the special symbol determination table (1) of FIG. 6A, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a win, the main CPU 101 selects "special symbol A" and "special symbol B." , one of the special symbols is determined from among the "special symbols C". Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting port 21, a random number for determining a special symbol is obtained, and one of the special symbols is determined by referring to the obtained random number for determining a special symbol. . For example, if the obtained random number for determining a special symbol is "0 to 9", "Special symbol A" is determined, and if the obtained random number for determining a special symbol is "10 to 64", "special symbol B" is determined. is determined, and if the obtained random number for determining a special symbol is "65 to 99", a "special symbol C" is determined. Then, when the special symbol is determined, the "number of rounds awarded" and the "game state after winning" are uniquely determined. When the "special symbol A" is determined, 10 rounds are awarded as the "number of rounds awarded", and a variable gaming state is awarded as the "gaming state after winning". In addition, when the "special symbol B" is determined, 5 rounds are awarded as the "number of rounds awarded", and a variable probability gaming state is awarded as the "gaming status after winning". Furthermore, when the "special symbol C" is determined, 10 rounds are awarded as the "number of rounds awarded", and a time-saving gaming state is awarded as the "gaming state after winning". On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines the "special symbol D", and the "special symbol D" contains the "number of rounds awarded" and the "game after winning". Since the "state" is not determined, no winning games are awarded.

In addition, in the special symbol determination table (2) of FIG. 6(A), if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a win, the main CPU 101 selects "special symbol E", "special symbol F", etc. From this, one of the special symbols is determined. The specific determination method is the same as (1) in FIG. 6(A) described above, so a description thereof will be omitted. For example, if the obtained random number for determining the special symbol is "0 to 64", "special symbol E" is determined, and if the obtained random number for determining the special symbol is "65 to 99", "special symbol E" is determined. Determine "F". When the "special symbol E" is determined, 10 rounds are awarded as the "number of rounds awarded", and a variable probability gaming state is awarded as the "game status after winning". Furthermore, when the "special symbol F" is determined, 10 rounds are awarded as the "number of rounds awarded", and a time-saving gaming state is awarded as the "gaming state after winning". On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines "special symbol G".

In this way, the rate at which the variable gaming state is given is "65%" for the first starting port 21 and "65%" for the second starting port 22, so the probability of entering the variable gaming state is There is no difference between the first starting port 21 and the second starting port 22. On the other hand, the "number of rounds awarded" is such that 10 rounds are always awarded to the second starting port 22 and 5 rounds are not awarded, so a winning game is awarded based on the ball entering the first starting port 21. It can be said that it is more advantageous for the player if a winning game is awarded based on the ball entering the second starting port 22 than if the ball enters the second starting port 22. In addition, in this embodiment, although the setting value was not provided in the special symbol determination table, you may make it provide a setting value. For example, the determination ratio of special symbols may be different depending on whether the set value is "1" or "6". In that case, the entry rate into the variable probability gaming state is the same for all set values, but the "number of rounds awarded" may be set at different rates for each set value. For example, the more the set value is "6", the more advantageous the number of rounds may be given, or the more the set value is "1", the more advantageous the number of rounds may be given.

In this way, it is more advantageous for the player to be awarded a winning game based on the ball entering the second starting port 22 than to be awarded a winning game based on the ball entering the first starting port 21. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state or variable probability gaming state in which the second starting port 22 can be opened in "1.8S x 3 times", the game ball can be entered into the second starting port 22 by hitting to the right. This is the optimal game for the player.
Therefore, when the first starting port detection SW 21a detects a game ball in the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state, a right-hit notification (see FIG. 41) is performed to encourage the player to play the optimal game.

(About the normal symbol determination table)
The normal symbol determination table of FIG. 6(B) is stored in the main ROM 102, and as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process being performed based on the game ball passing through the gate member 20, when the normal symbol is a hit. This table is referred to when determining the normal symbol to be confirmed and displayed on the normal symbol display 27e in the case of a normal symbol loss and the case of a normal symbol loss. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the main CPU 101 selects "normal symbol A" in the normal symbol determination process performed in the normal symbol related process. ” is determined, and if the normal symbol is a loss, the “normal symbol B” is determined. In addition, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol hit determination processing when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state and when the probability variable gaming state is performed, and if it is a common symbol winning, in the normal symbol related processing. In the normal symbol determination process that is carried out, the "normal symbol C" is determined, and if the regular symbol is a loss, the "normal symbol D" is determined.

In addition, also in the normal pattern, the content provided is uniquely determined as in the above-mentioned special pattern. When "normal symbol A" is determined, the protruding member of the second starting port 22 opens "1" time in "0.9S", and when "normal symbol B" is determined, the second starting port 22 is opened "1" time. The protruding member 22 does not open. In addition, when "normal symbol C" is determined, the protruding member of the second starting port 22 opens "3" times in "1.8S", and when "normal symbol D" is determined, the second The protruding member of the starting port 22 does not open. Therefore, the opening/closing mode of the protruding member of the second starting port 22 is more advantageous in the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state than in the normal gaming state when winning a normal figure. , it can be said that this is an advantageous gaming state for the player.

Note that although no set value is provided in the normal symbol determination table, a set value may be provided similarly to the special symbol determination table. For example, the probability of determining a normal symbol hit in the normal symbol hit determination process may be different for each setting value, and when the setting value is "6", it is easier to hit than when the setting value is "1". or vice versa. Moreover, the opening/closing manner of the second starting port 22 may be different for each set value. For example, when the setting value is "6", the opening/closing mode may be more advantageous than when the setting value is "1", or vice versa.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing details of the winning special symbol. "Special symbol A", "Special symbol C", "Special symbol E", "Special symbol F", the opening and closing door of the big prize opening 24 is opened for 29.5 seconds per round, and 10 game balls are inserted. If 29.5S elapses before a ball is detected or the entry of 10 game balls is detected, the opening/closing door of the big prize opening 24 is closed. Then, when the closing interval time 2S has elapsed, the next round is started, and this is performed for 10 rounds. Note that after the 10th round ends, the game shifts to a winning game ending (for example, 10S).

"Special symbol B" means that the opening/closing door of the big prize opening 24 is opened for 29.5 seconds per round and detects the entry of 10 game balls, or before detecting the entry of 10 game balls. When 29.5S elapses, the opening/closing door of the big prize opening 24 closes. Then, when the closing interval time 2S has elapsed, the next round is started, and this is performed for five rounds. Furthermore, after the end of the 5th round, the game shifts to a winning game ending (for example, 10S). Although not particularly shown, there is no difference in setting values for the round opening/closing mode.

(About the special symbol variation pattern table)
The special symbol variation pattern table in FIG. 8 is stored in the main ROM 102, and is a table that is referred to when determining the variation time in the symbol variation game. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 101 selects one of "variable patterns 1" to "variable patterns 5". Determine the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 21 or the second starting port 22, a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern is obtained, and the obtained random number for determining a fluctuation pattern is referred to. , determine any variation pattern. Although not shown, when the game ball enters the first starting port 21 or the second starting port 22, a random number for reach determination is obtained, and the random number for reach determination corresponds to the random number for executing reach. If so, determine one of the fluctuation patterns from "Variation Pattern 2" to "Variation Pattern 5", and if the random number for reach determination does not correspond to the random number for executing reach, determine "Variation Pattern 1". You can do it like this. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a win, the main CPU 101 refers to the random number for determining the variation pattern and selects "variation pattern 6". One of the "variation patterns 11" is determined.

When the fluctuation pattern is determined, the "performance content" and the "fluctuation time" (number of seconds S) are uniquely determined. When "variation pattern 1" is determined, "normal variation" is determined as "performance content" and "7S" is determined as "variation time". Here, "normal fluctuation" refers to fluctuation that does not result in reach. Further, when "variation pattern 2" is determined, "normal reach" is determined as the "performance content" and "15S" is determined as the "variation time". Here, "normal reach" refers to a reach in which a reach is performed but no special development effects are performed (for example, an effect in which the medium decorative pattern image 26b is changed after temporarily stopping display due to a loss). Since the selection ratio is low at times and the selection ratio is high at times of loss, it is positioned as a reach with low expectation of winning.

Further, when "variation pattern 3" is determined, "super reach" is determined as the "performance content" and "40S" is determined as the "variation time". Here, "super reach" refers to a reach in which a development effect is performed during the execution of a reach (normal reach), and a live-action image is displayed on the image display device 26 at the development destination, and the selection ratio at the time of winning is is higher than ``Normal Reach'', and the selection ratio in the event of a loss is lower than ``Normal Reach'', so it is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of winning than ``Normal Reach''.

Further, when "variation pattern 4" is determined, "pseudo-continuation 2 normal reach" is determined as the "performance content" and "50S" is determined as the "variation time". Although "Pseudo-Reach" will be explained in detail later, "Pseudo-Reach 2 Normal Reach" is a reach that has a higher expectation of winning than "Normal Reach" alone, and a lower expected probability of winning than "Super Reach". It is positioned as In addition, when "variation pattern 5" is determined, "pseudo series 3 super reach" is determined as the "performance content" and "70S" is determined as the "variation time". "Pseudo-Run 3 Super Reach" is positioned as a reach with higher expectation of winning than "Super Reach" alone. In addition, "Variation pattern 6" to "Variation pattern 9" differ from "Variation pattern 2" to "Variation pattern 5" only in terms of loss or hit, and the content and variation time are the same, so explanations will be omitted. do.

In addition, when "variation pattern 10" is determined, "pseudo consecutive 4 super reach" is determined as "performance content", and "90S" is determined as "variation time". Here, the "Pseudo-Run 4 Super Reach" is a variation pattern that is selected only in the case of a win, so if the "Pseudo-Run" described later is performed four times, the win is confirmed at that point. Further, when "variation pattern 11" is determined, "full rotation reach" is determined as the "performance content" and "120S" is determined as the "variation time". Here, "full rotation reach" means that the left decorative pattern image 26a, the middle decorative pattern image 26b, and the right decorative pattern image 26c are changed to "111", "222", "333", "444", "555", For example, it is possible to scroll (fluctuate display) with "666," "777," and "888" aligned, and finally display "777" as a fixed number.

In addition, the selectable variation pattern in the case of a hit may be determined by the determined special symbol. For example, variation patterns 6 to 10 can be selected even if special symbol A, special symbol B, or special symbol C is determined, and variation pattern 11 is selectable even when special symbol A is determined. You may select as many as possible.
Further, even if any of the special symbols A, B, and C has been determined, variation patterns 6 to 11 may be selectable.

In addition, the main CPU 101 determines whether the game state is a time-saving game state or a variable probability game state, and if the result is a loss as a result of the special symbol hit determination processing, the "fluctuation pattern 12" to " One of the fluctuation patterns 15 is determined. When "variation pattern 12" is determined, "shortening variation" is determined as the "performance content" and "2S" is determined as the "variation time". Here, the "shortening variation" refers to a variation that does not result in a reach and simultaneously stops the left decorative pattern image 26a, middle decorative pattern image 26b, and right decorative pattern image 26c, and the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state. , and when it is in the probability variable gaming state, as a result of the special symbol hit judgment process, if it is a loss, this "shortening variation" is more likely to be selected, so the time saving gaming state or , it is possible to efficiently digest variable gaming conditions.

Further, when "variation pattern 13" is determined, "reach stimulation" is determined as the "performance content" and "10S" is determined as the "variation time". Here, "reach stimulation" means, for example, to temporarily stop and display the "7" pattern as the left decorative pattern image 26a, and to stimulate whether or not to temporarily stop and display the 7 pattern as the right decorative pattern image 26c. This is a performance that will incite whether a reach will be formed or not. As a result of "reach stirring", for example, if 8 symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern image 26c, no reach is formed, and for example, if 7 symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern image 26c A reach is formed, which develops into a "variable short medium super reach" in "variation pattern 15" and "variation pattern 17" described later.

In addition, when "variation pattern 14" is determined, "super reach in short and short" is determined as the "performance content", and "30S" is determined as the "variation time". Here, the "super reach during variable short time" is a "super reach" exclusively for the time saving gaming state and the variable probability gaming state, and is different from the "super reach" performed in the normal gaming state.

Further, when "variation pattern 15" is determined, "reach incitement → super reach during short duration" is determined as the "performance content", and "40S" is determined as the "variation time". "Variation pattern 16" and "Variation pattern 17" are the same as "Variation pattern 14" and "Variation pattern 15", and the only difference is whether it is a loss or a hit, and the content of the effect and the fluctuation time are the same, so the explanation will be omitted. . In addition, "Reach incitement → Variable short medium super reach" has a higher selection ratio when winning than "Variable short medium super reach", and a lower selection ratio when losing than "Variable short medium super reach". Because of this, it is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of winning than the ``Hen-short medium super reach''.

The above-mentioned special symbol variation patterns are not limited to those shown in FIG. 8, and may further include a plurality of special symbol variation patterns. For example, a "shortening variation" (2S) may be provided even in the normal gaming state. Further, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table to be referred to may be different depending on the number of reserved balls in the symbol fluctuation game of the first starting opening 21, or the special symbol fluctuation pattern table to be referred to depending on the number of reserved balls in the symbol fluctuation game of the second starting opening 22. The symbol variation pattern table may be different. For example, in the case of a loss, if the number of reserved balls is 4, it is easier to select "normal fluctuation" of "variation pattern 1" than when the number of reserved balls is 1, and the game is improved. The operation may be improved.

In addition, if a loss is determined in the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state, and as a result of starting the symbol variation game in the second starting opening 22, the number of reserved balls in the second starting opening 22 becomes 0, For example, the normal variation (loss) at 0:00 hold consisting of 30S may be selected to secure the time for the game ball to enter the second starting port 22.

Further, the special symbol variation pattern table to be referred to may be changed depending on the set value. For example, a special symbol variation pattern that is easy to select for each setting value may be provided, or a special symbol variation pattern that can be selected only with that setting value may be provided. As a result, it is possible to estimate (or understand) what the set value is based on the content of the performance of the executed special symbol variation pattern, which leads to an increase in the interest of the game.

(About main RAM judgment information storage area, main RAM counter, and main RAM storage area)
FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing the determination information storage area (reserved storage area) provided in the main RAM 103, the counter of the main RAM, and the storage area of the main RAM.

As mentioned above, the main RAM 103 is provided with (A) a reservation storage area corresponding to special symbols and (B) a reservation storage area corresponding to normal symbols. Judgment information (random value) related to the special symbol can be stored in the "variable storage area", "first storage area", "second storage area", "third storage area", and "fourth storage area", respectively. , also in the second starting port 22, determinations related to special symbols are made in "the relevant variable storage area", "first storage area", "second storage area", "third storage area", and "fourth storage area", respectively. Information (random values) can be stored in the gate member 20 as well, such as "the relevant variable storage area", "first storage area", "second storage area", "third storage area", and "fourth storage area". ” can store judgment information (random value) related to each normal symbol.
Note that the counter of the main RAM and the storage area of the main RAM are as described above, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

(About the control processing performed by the main CPU 101)
The control processing performed by the main CPU 101 will be explained using FIGS. 10 to 23.

(About main control board main processing)
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the main processing performed in the main control board 100. This process is started by the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and voltage is supplied from the power supply board 400 to each control board.

(Step S1)
In step S1, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a power outage state (power outage state). As a result, if the power is being cut off (power outage state), the process of step S1 is repeatedly executed, and if the power is not being cut off (power outage state), the process moves to step S2. Note that when the power is interrupted (power outage state), the process can be executed using a backup power source (not shown).

(Step S2)
In step S2, the main CPU 101 prohibits interrupts. As a result, the main CPU 101 executes only the process shown in FIG. 10 until an interrupt is permitted in S18, which will be described later. Then, when interrupts are prohibited, the process moves to step S3.

(Step S3)
In step S3, the main CPU 101 determines whether the RAM clear switch 105 is ON (pressed down). That is, it is determined whether the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (the power SW 400a is turned on) while the RAM clear switch 105 is pressed down. As a result, if the RAM clear switch 105 is ON, the process moves to step S4, and if the RAM clear switch 105 is not ON, the process moves to step S9.

(Step S4)
In step S4, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting change key is in the setting change position. For example, when it is detected that the setting change key is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31 and the setting change key is rotated 90 degrees, it is determined that the setting change key is in the setting change position, and the above detection is performed. If this is not done, it is determined that the setting change key is not in the setting change position. As a result, if the setting change key is in the setting change position, the process moves to step S5, and if the setting change key is not in the setting change position, the process moves to step S7.

(Step S5)
In step S5, the main CPU 101 performs a setting value change process shown in FIG. Note that this process will be explained in detail later using FIG. 11. When the set value changing process is finished, the process moves to step S6.

(Step S6)
In step S6, the main CPU 101 transmits a power-on command. The power-on command is a command indicating that the RAM clear switch 105 is turned on and the power is turned on. When the production control board 200 receives the command, the production control board 200, for example, displays an image via the image/sound control unit 200b. The device 26 displays the message "Power is being turned on" and the speaker 10 outputs a voice saying "The power is being turned on". After transmitting the power-on command, the process moves to step S17.

(Step S7)
In step S7, if the RAM clear switch 105 is ON and the power SW 400a is ON, the main CPU 101 initializes areas 1 and 2 (excluding the setting value storage area) of the main RAM 103. Thereby, for example, if the time-saving gaming state is in effect when the gaming parlor closes, the game can be started from the normal gaming state when the gaming parlor opens the next day. In addition, in this process, each game number counter shown in FIG. 9 is also cleared (the counter value becomes 0). Further, if the executed flag in the executed flag storage area shown in FIG. 9 is ON, it is turned OFF. After area 1 and area 2 (excluding the setting value storage area) of the main RAM 103 are initialized, the process moves to step S8.

(Step S8)
In step S8, the main CPU 101 transmits a power-on command. After transmitting the power-on command, the process moves to step S17.

(Step S9)
In step S9, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting change key is at the setting change position. As a result, if the setting change key is in the setting change position, the process moves to step S10, and if the setting change key is not in the setting change position, the process moves to step S11.

(Step S10)
In step S10, the main CPU 101 performs a setting value confirmation process shown in FIG. Note that this process will be explained in detail later using FIG. 12. When the set value confirmation process is completed, the process moves to step S11.

(Step S11)
In step S11, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is any backed up data. For example, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off, a backup process (not shown) is performed, and data retention, checksum storage, and backup flags are turned on. If the backup flag is ON, it is determined that there is backed up data, and if the backup flag is not ON, it is determined that there is no backed up data. As a result, if there is backed up data, the process moves to step S12, and if there is no backed up data, it is determined that the power is turned on for the first time, and the process moves to step S17.

(Step S12)
In step S12, the main CPU 101 calculates a checksum of the area of the main RAM 103. After calculating the checksum of the area of the main RAM 103, the process moves to step S13.

(Step S13)
In step S13, the main CPU 101 determines whether the checksum of the area of the main RAM 103 is normal. For example, it is determined whether the checksum value stored in the backup process (not shown) matches the checksum value calculated in step S12, and if they match, the checksum is determined to be normal; if they do not match, it is determined that the checksum value is normal. It is determined that the checksum is not normal. As a result, if the checksum is normal, the process moves to step S15, and if the checksum is not normal, the process moves to step S14.

(Step S14)
In step S14, the main CPU 101 performs game stop processing (error setting). Specifically, an error command for making an error notification using the light emitting device 9, the speaker 10, the image display device 26, etc. is not sent to the production control board 200, and the setting value change process shown in FIG. 11 is not performed. In some cases, processing may be performed that makes it impossible to resolve the error. The process remains as long as the setting value change process shown in FIG. 11 is not performed.

(Step S15)
In step S15, the main CPU 101 performs a return process. In other words, the power is restored normally to the state before the power outage. Then, when the power is restored normally to the state before the power outage, the process moves to step S16.

(Step S16)
In step S16, the main CPU 101 transmits a power restoration command. The power restoration command is a command indicating that the power has been restored by turning off the RAM clear switch 105. When the production control board 200 receives the command, the production control board 200, for example, displays an image via the image/sound control unit 200b. The device 26 displays "Power is being restored" and the speaker 10 outputs a voice saying "Power is being restored". After transmitting the power restoration command, the process moves to step S17.

(Step S17)
In step S17, the main CPU 101 performs CTC settings. In other words, the CTC (counter timer circuit), which has the function of creating pulse output with a constant period and the function of time measurement, is set up so that the main control board timer interrupt processing described below is performed periodically every 4 ms. , set the time constant register of CTC. After setting the CTC, the process moves to step S18.

(Step S18)
In step S18, the main CPU 101 allows an interrupt. Then, after allowing the interrupt, it waits, and thereafter, the main control board timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed every 4 ms.

(About setting value change processing)
FIG. 11 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S5 of the main control board main processing) showing the setting value changing process performed in the main control board 100. Note that the state in which the process shown in FIG. 11 is being performed corresponds to the above-mentioned "setting change state."

(Step S5-1)
In step S5-1, the main CPU 101 initializes the area of the main RAM 103 (excluding the setting value storage area). In addition, in this process, each game number counter shown in FIG. 9 is also cleared (the counter value becomes 0). Further, if the executed flag in the executed flag storage area shown in FIG. 9 is ON, it is turned OFF. After initializing the area of the main RAM 103 (excluding the setting value storage area), the process moves to step S5-2.

(Step S5-2)
In step S5-2, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting value changing command. The setting value changing command is a command indicating that a setting value changing process is being performed, and upon receiving the command, the effect control board 200, for example, displays an image via the image/sound control unit 200b. The device 26 displays "Settings are being changed" and the speaker 10 outputs a voice saying "Settings are being changed". Then, when the setting value changing command is sent, the process moves to step S5-3.

(Step S5-3)
In step S5-3, the main CPU 101 reads the current set value and displays it on the display 104. For example, if the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the main RAM 103 is "1", "1" is displayed on the display 104. After reading out the current set value and displaying it on the display 104, the process moves to step S5-4.

(Step S5-4)
In step S5-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether a setting value changing operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 105 is turned on. If the RAM clear switch 105 is turned on, the process moves to step S5-5, and if the RAM clear switch 105 is not turned on, the process moves to step S5-7.

(Step S5-5)
In step S5-5, the main CPU 101 performs processing to change the set value. For example, if the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON when the set value is "1", the set value will be changed to "2", and if the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON when the set value is "2", the set value will be changed to "2". is changed to "3" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned on when the set value is "3", the set value is changed to "4" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned on when the set value is "4". When it turns ON, the set value is changed to "5", and when the RAM clear switch 105 turns ON when the set value is "5", the set value is changed to "6", and when the set value is "6" When the RAM clear switch 105 is turned on, the set value is changed to "1". After changing the set value, the process moves to step S5-6.

(Step S5-6)
In step S5-6, the main CPU 101 displays the changed setting value on the display 104 (for example, the rightmost segment). For example, if the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while displaying the set value "1", the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while displaying the set value "2", and the set value "2" is displayed. If the RAM clear switch 105 is turned on while the set value "3" is displayed, the set value "4" will be displayed and the set value "4" will be displayed. If the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the setting value is "5", the set value "5" will be displayed. If the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the set value "5" is being displayed, the set value "6" will be displayed. However, when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned on while the set value "6" is being displayed, the set value "1" is displayed. After the changed setting values are displayed on the display 104, the process moves to step S5-7.

(Step S5-7)
In step S5-7, the main CPU 101 determines whether a setting value confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting change key is from a position rotated 90 degrees clockwise (horizontal direction) to a position rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (vertical direction). If the setting value confirmation operation has been performed, the process moves to step S5-8, and if the setting value confirmation operation has not been performed, the process moves to step S5-4.

(Step S5-8)
In step S5-8, the main CPU 101 stores the setting value in the setting value storage area of the main RAM 103. That is, when the setting change key is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (vertical direction) with the desired setting value displayed on the display 104, the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is determined. become. As a result, subsequent games will be played based on the stored setting values. After the set value is stored in the set value storage area of the main RAM 103, the process moves to step S5-9.

(Step S5-9)
In step S5-9, the main CPU 101 hides the display 104. That is, the set value displayed on the display 104 in step S5-6 is hidden. Then, when the display 104 is turned off, the process moves to step S5-10.

(Step S5-10)
In step S5-10, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting value information command. The setting value information command is a command indicating information on a setting value, and upon receiving the command, the effect control board 200 stores the information on the setting value in the sub-RAM 203, and when executing the setting value suggestion effect described later. The setting value information stored in the sub-RAM 203 is referred to. Further, upon receiving the command, the production control board 200 ends the above-mentioned notification such as "Settings are being changed". After transmitting the setting value information command, the process moves to step S6 of the main control board main process.

(About setting value confirmation process)
FIG. 12 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S10 of the main control board main processing) showing the setting value confirmation process performed in the main control board 100. Note that the state in which the processing in FIG. 12 is being performed corresponds to the above-mentioned "setting confirmation state."

(Step S10-1)
In step S10-1, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting value confirmation command. The setting value confirmation command is a command indicating that the setting value confirmation process is being performed, and upon receiving the command, the production control board 200, for example, displays an image via the image/sound control unit 200b. The device 26 displays "Settings are being checked" and the speaker 10 outputs a voice saying "Settings are being checked". Then, when the setting value confirmation command is sent, the process moves to step S10-2.

(Step S10-2)
In step S10-2, the main CPU 101 reads the current set value and displays it on the display 104. For example, if the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the main RAM 103 is "1", "1" is displayed on the display 104. After reading out the current set value and displaying it on the display 104, the process moves to step S10-3.

(Step S10-3)
In step S10-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether a termination operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting change key is from a position rotated 90 degrees clockwise (horizontal direction) to a position rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (vertical direction). If the termination operation is performed, the process moves to step S10-4, and if the termination operation is not performed, the process is looped until the termination operation is performed.

(Step S10-4)
In step S10-4, the main CPU 101 hides the display 104. That is, the set value displayed on the display 104 in step S10-2 is hidden. Then, when the display 104 is turned off, the process moves to step S10-5.

(Step S10-5)
In step S10-5, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting value confirmation end command. The setting value confirmation end command is a command indicating that the setting value confirmation process has ended, and upon receiving the command, the production control board 200 ends the above-mentioned notification such as "Setting confirmation in progress". After transmitting the setting value confirmation end command, the process moves to step S11 of the main control board main process.

(About main control board timer interrupt processing)
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the main control board timer interrupt processing performed in the main control board 100. This process is executed by interrupting the main control board main process described above periodically (for example, every 4 ms).

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 101 saves the information stored in the register. After the information stored in the register is saved, the process moves to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 101 performs time management processing to update a timer used in the game (for example, the opening time of the big prize opening 24, etc.). After updating the timer used in the game, the process moves to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S103, the main CPU 101 updates initial value random numbers such as a random number for determining a hit, a random number for determining a special symbol, and a random number for determining a variation pattern. When the various random number update processes are completed, the process moves to step S104.

(Step S104)
In step S104, the main CPU 101 detects input from each SW shown in FIG. Note that this process will be described in detail later using FIG. 14. When input from each SW is detected, the process moves to step S105.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 101 performs processing related to special symbols. Note that this process will be explained in detail later using FIG. 18. Then, when the process related to the special symbol is finished, the process moves to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S106, the main CPU 101 performs processing related to normal symbols. For example, when the game ball passes through the gate member 20, a "normal symbol hit determination process" is performed, and processing for determining the normal symbol and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is performed. When the process related to the normal symbol is finished, the process moves to step S107.

(Step S107)
In step S107, the main CPU 101 performs processing related to the payout of game balls. For example, in the input SW detection process of step S104, when the entry of a game ball is detected, the payout command signal is sent to the payout control board 300 in order to pay out the corresponding prize ball. A payout command signal is set in the command transmission area of , and a payout completion signal is received from the payout control board 300. When the process related to the payout of game balls is completed, the process moves to step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 101 performs abnormality determination processing. Note that this process will be explained in detail later using FIG. 23. When the abnormality determination process is finished, the process moves to step S109.

(Step S109)
In step S109, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting various commands to the production control board 200. For example, in the process, the main CPU 101 checks whether a command is set in the command transmission area provided on the main control board 100, and if a command is set, the set command is used for effect control. It is transmitted to the board 200 and the payout control board 300. When the command transmission process is finished, the process moves to step S110.

(Step S110)
In step S110, if the game is a symbol variation game based on a game ball entering the first starting port 21, the main CPU 101 controls the display of special symbols (variable display and fixed display) on the first special symbol display 27a. ), and if it is a symbol variation game based on the game ball entering the second starting port 22, special symbol display control (variation display and fixed display) is performed on the second special symbol display 27b. Also, based on the fact that a game ball has entered each starting port and the symbol variation game in each starting port has ended, the first special symbol holding display 27c and the second special symbol holding display 27c are displayed. It also controls the display of 27d. Then, when the special symbol display control is finished, the process moves to step S111.

(Step S111)
In step S111, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol display control (variable display and fixed display) on the normal symbol display 27e. Furthermore, based on the passing of the game ball through the gate member 20 and the completion of the normal symbol variation game, display control of the normal symbol retention display 27f is also performed. Then, when the normal symbol display control is finished, the process moves to step S112.

(Step S112)
In step S112, the main CPU 101 performs gaming performance information management processing. Specifically, gaming performance information is calculated using the above-mentioned formula of "(number of game balls paid out in normal gaming state ÷ number of balls out in normal gaming state) x 100", and the calculated gaming performance information is displayed on the display 104. Perform processing such as displaying. When the gaming performance information management process is finished, the process moves to step S113.

(Step S113)
In step S113, the main CPU 101 restores the information saved in step S101 to the register. Then, after restoring the saved information to the register, the main control board timer interrupt processing ends.

(About input SW detection processing)
FIG. 14 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) showing the input SW detection process performed in the main control board 100.

(Step S104-1)
In step S104-1, the main CPU 101 performs a first starting port detection process. Note that this process will be explained in detail later using FIG. 15. When the first starting port detection process is completed, the process moves to step S104-2.

(Step S104-2)
In step S104-2, the main CPU 101 performs a second starting port detection process. Note that this process will be explained in detail later using FIG. 16. When the second starting port detection process is completed, the process moves to step S104-3.

(Step S104-3)
In step S104-3, when the main CPU 101 inputs the information that the entry of game balls is detected from the normal winning opening detection SW 23a, in order to cause the payout control board 300 to pay out 8 game balls as prize balls, A process is performed to set a payout command signal in the payout command transmission area. In addition, as described above, in a winning game, when a game ball enters the normal winning hole 23, in order to notify the ball entering using the speaker 10 and the image display device 26, the ball entering the normal winning hole is sent to the command transmission area. Set the detection signal. Then, when the normal winning opening detection process is completed, the process moves to step S104-4.

(Step S104-4)
In step S104-4, when the main CPU 101 inputs the information that detected the entry of the game ball from the big winning opening detection SW 24a, in order to cause the payout control board 300 to pay out 12 game balls as prize balls, A process is performed to set a payout command signal in the payout command transmission area. Further, in order to notify that a game ball has entered the big winning hole 24 using the image display device 26 or the like, a big winning hole entering ball detection signal is set in the command transmission area. Notification using the image display device 26 or the like means, for example, when more than 10 game balls are detected by the big winning opening detection SW 24a in one round (also referred to as over-winning), the image display device 26 will notify that fact. For example, the information may be notified by display or sound from the speaker 10 (for example, a sound such as "Pirro Leen"). Then, when the big winning opening detection process is completed, the process moves to step S104-5.
Note that the notification of excessive winnings is not limited to the sound from the speaker 10, but may be from the light emitting device 9, may be from displaying a specific character on the image display device 26, or may be from the production button 14. Alternatively, the production lever 15 may be vibrated by a vibration device.

(Step S104-5)
In step S104-5, the main CPU 101 performs processing upon detection of a passing gate. Note that this process will be explained in detail later using FIG. 17. When the passing gate detection process is completed, the process moves to step S104-6.

(Step S104-6)
In step S104-6, the main CPU 101 performs processing when information indicating that the entry of a game ball is detected is input from the exit detection SW 25a. For example, in order to transmit an exit passage command to the production control board 200, the exit passage command is set in the command transmission area. When the exit detection process is completed, the process moves to step S105 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(About processing when first starting port is detected)
FIG. 15 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S104-1 of the input SW detection process) showing the first starting port detection process performed in the main control board 100.

(Step S104-1-1)
In step S104-1-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether information indicating the entry of a game ball has been input from the first starting port detection SW 21a. If the information that the entry of the game ball was detected is input from the first starting port detection SW 21a, the process moves to step S104-1-2, and the entry of the game ball is detected from the first starting port detection SW 21a. If the information has not been input, the process moves to step S104-2 of the input SW detection process.

(Step S104-1-2)
In step S104-1-2, the main CPU 101 sends a payout command in order to have the payout control board 300 payout three game balls as prize balls for the game balls entering the first starting port 21. Set the prize ball command in the area. After setting the prize ball command, the process moves to step S104-1-3.

(Step S104-1-3)
In step S104-1-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether data up to the above-mentioned "fourth storage area" has been stored. In other words, it is determined whether the number of pending games in the symbol variation game at the first starting port 21 is "4". If the "fourth storage area" is stored, the process moves to step S104-2 of the input SW detection process, and if the "fourth storage area" is not stored, step S104-1- Processing moves to step 4.

(Step S104-1-4)
In step S104-1-4, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number value for hit determination. The random number value obtained in this process will be used in the winning determination process (step S104-1-8) and the special symbol fluctuation start process (see FIG. 19), which will be described later. When the random number value for hit determination is obtained, the process moves to step S104-1-5.

Note that the acquisition of the random number value for hit determination may be performed before step S104-1-3. If it is determined in step S104-1-3 that up to the "fourth storage area" is stored, the obtained random number value may be discarded.

(Step S104-1-5)
In step S104-1-5, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number value for determining a special symbol. The random number value obtained in this process will be used in the winning determination process (step S104-1-8) and the special symbol fluctuation start process (see FIG. 19), which will be described later. When the special symbol determination random number value is obtained, the process moves to step S104-1-6.

Note that the acquisition of the random number value for determining the special symbol may be performed before step S104-1-3. If it is determined in step S104-1-3 that up to the "fourth storage area" is stored, the obtained random number value may be discarded.

(Step S104-1-6)
In step S104-1-6, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern. The random number value obtained in this process will be used in the winning determination process (step S104-1-8) and the special symbol fluctuation start process (see FIG. 19), which will be described later. When the random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern is obtained, the process moves to step S104-1-7.

Note that the acquisition of the random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern may be performed before step S104-1-3. If it is determined in step S104-1-3 that up to the "fourth storage area" is stored, the obtained random number value may be discarded.

(Step S104-1-7)
In step S104-1-7, the main CPU 101 stores the random number value for hit determination, the random number value for special symbol determination, and the random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination in a vacant storage area as determination information. For example, if the "third storage area" is stored and the "fourth storage area" is empty, each random number value is stored in the "fourth storage area". After each random number value is stored in a vacant storage area, the process moves to step S104-1-8.

(Step S104-1-8)
In step S104-1-8, the main CPU 101 performs a winning determination process. This winning determination process is a process that determines whether the random value obtained in step S104-1-4 is a win, prior to the special symbol winning determination process in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19). be. As a result, for example, if the random number value for hit determination stored in the "fourth storage area" in step S104-1-7 is a win, a preview effect ("pre-read effect" to be described later) is performed across multiple variations. can be executed. When the winning determination process is completed, the process moves to step S104-1-9.

(Step S104-1-9)
In step S104-1-9, the main CPU 101 sets the first starting opening winning command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the first starting opening winning command to the production control board 200. Note that the first starting opening winning command also includes information on the determination result of the winning determination process in step S104-1-8, and by receiving the command, the production control board 200 performs the winning determination process. It is possible to recognize whether the judgment result of the process is a hit or a loss. Then, when the first starting opening winning command is set, the process moves to step S104-1-10.

(Step S104-1-10)
In step S104-1-10, the main CPU 101 sets the reserved storage area designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the reserved storage area designation command to the production control board 200. The reserved storage area specification command is a command that indicates the storage status of the judgment information storage area (reserved storage area) of the main RAM 103. For example, if only the variable storage area is stored, "0", the first "1" if the storage area is stored, "2" if the second storage area is stored, "3" if the third storage area is stored, and "3" if the fourth storage area is stored. If it is, it is a command that includes information such as "4". As a result, the performance control board 200 can also recognize the storage status of the determination information storage area (pending storage area) of the main RAM 103. Then, when the reserved storage area designation command is set, the process moves to step S104-2 of the input SW detection process.

(Step S104-1-11)
In step S104-1-11, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current gaming state is a time saving gaming state or a variable probability gaming state. Specifically, in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103, it is determined whether "1" indicating a time-saving gaming state or "2" indicating a variable probability gaming state is stored. If the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state or a variable-probability gaming state, the process moves to step S104-1-12, and if the current gaming state is not a time-saving gaming state or a variable-probability gaming state, the input SW The process moves to step S104-2 of the detection process.

(Step S104-1-12)
In step S104-1-12, the main CPU 101 sets the left-handed error specification command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the left-handed error specification command to the production control board 200. In other words, if you play left-handed in the time-saving gaming state or variable-probability gaming state and enter the game ball into the first starting port 21, a notification regarding the left-handed hitting error (for example, "Please hit right" will be displayed and voiced). notification) will be carried out. Then, when the left-handed hitting error designation command is set, the process moves to step S104-2 of the input SW detection process.
Note that if the gate member 20 is also provided in the first game area 7a, the game ball enters the gate member 20 without setting the left-handed error designation command when the game ball enters the first starting port 21. You can set the left-handed hitting error specification command by passing .

(About processing when detecting the second starting port)
FIG. 16 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S104-2 of the input SW detection process) showing the second starting port detection process performed in the main control board 100. Note that FIG. 16 differs from FIG. 15 only in the starting port, but the basic processing content is the same, so the description will be omitted as appropriate.

(Step S104-2-1)
In step S104-2-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether information indicating the entry of a game ball has been inputted from the second starting opening detection SW 22a. If the information that the entry of the game ball is detected is input from the second starting port detection SW 22a, the process moves to step S104-2-2, and the entry of the game ball is detected from the second starting port detection SW 22a. If the information has not been input, the process moves to step S104-3 of the input SW detection process.

(Step S104-2-2)
In step S104-2-2, the main CPU 101 sends a command for payout in order to have the payout control board 300 pay out two game balls as prize balls for the game balls entering the second starting port 22. Set the prize ball command in the area. After setting the prize ball command, the process moves to step S104-2-3.

(Step S104-2-3)
In step S104-2-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether data up to the above-mentioned "fourth storage area" has been stored. In other words, it is determined whether or not the number of pending games in the symbol variation game at the second starting port 22 is "4". If up to the "fourth storage area" is stored, the process moves to step S104-3 of the input SW detection process, and if up to the "fourth storage area" is not stored, step S104-2- Processing moves to step 4.

(Step S104-2-4)
In step S104-2-4, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number value for hit determination. When the random number value for hit determination is obtained, the process moves to step S104-2-5.

(Step S104-2-5)
In step S104-2-5, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number value for determining a special symbol. When the special symbol determination random number value is obtained, the process moves to step S104-2-6.

(Step S104-2-6)
In step S104-2-6, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern. When the random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern is acquired, the process moves to step S104-2-7.

(Step S104-2-7)
In step S104-2-7, the main CPU 101 stores the random number value for hit determination, the random number value for special symbol determination, and the random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination in a vacant storage area as determination information. After each random number value is stored in a free storage area, the process moves to step S104-2-8.

(Step S104-2-8)
In step S104-2-8, the main CPU 101 performs a winning determination process. When the winning determination process is completed, the process moves to step S104-2-9.

(Step S104-2-9)
In step S104-2-9, the main CPU 101 sets the second starting opening winning command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the second starting opening winning command to the production control board 200. Then, when the second starting opening winning command is set, the process moves to step S104-2-10.

(Step S104-2-10)
In step S104-2-10, the main CPU 101 sets the reserved storage area designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the reserved storage area designation command to the production control board 200. Then, when the reserved storage area designation command is set, the process moves to step S104-3 of the input SW detection process.

(About processing when passing gate is detected)
FIG. 17 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S104-5 of the input SW detection process) showing the process performed in the main control board 100 when detecting a passing gate.

(Step S104-5-1)
In step S104-5-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether information indicating that the entry of a game ball has been detected has been input from the gate detection SW 20a. If the information that the entry of a game ball was detected is input from the gate detection SW 20a, the process moves to step S104-5-2, and the information that the entry of the game ball was detected is input from the gate detection SW 20a. If not, the process moves to step S104-6 of the input SW detection process.

(Step S104-5-2)
In step S104-5-2, the main CPU 101 determines whether data up to the above-mentioned "fourth storage area" is stored. In other words, it is determined whether the number of suspensions in the normal symbol variation game is "4" or not. If up to the "fourth storage area" is stored, the process moves to step S104-6 of the input SW detection process, and if up to the "fourth storage area" is not stored, step S104-5- Processing moves to step 3.

(Step S104-5-3)
In step S104-5-3, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number value for normal symbol hit determination. Then, when the random number value for normal symbol hit determination is acquired, the process moves to step S104-5-4.

(Step S104-5-4)
In step S104-5-4, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number value for determining a normal symbol. Then, when the random number value for determining the normal symbol is acquired, the process moves to step S104-5-5.

Note that the acquisition of the random number value for determining the normal symbol may be performed before step S104-5-4. If it is determined in step S104-5-2 that up to the "fourth storage area" is stored, the obtained random number value may be discarded.

(Step S104-5-5)
In step S104-5-5, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number value for determining a normal symbol variation pattern. Then, when the random number value for determining the normal symbol variation pattern is acquired, the process moves to step S104-5-6.

(Step S104-5-6)
In step S104-5-6, the main CPU 101 stores the random number value for determining a normal symbol hit, the random number value for determining a regular symbol, and the random number value for determining a regular symbol fluctuation pattern in an empty storage area as determination information. . After each random value is stored in a free storage area, the process moves to step S104-5-7.

(Step S104-5-7)
In step S104-5-7, the main CPU 101 sets the general figure holding increase command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the general figure holding increase command to the production control board 200. Then, when the general figure reservation increase command is set, the process moves to step S104-5-8.

(Step S104-5-8)
In step S104-5-8, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol retention storage area designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the normal symbol retention storage area designation command to the production control board 200. Then, when the normal symbol retention storage area designation command is set, the process moves to step S104-5-9.

(Step S104-5-9)
In step S104-5-9, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Specifically, it is determined whether "0" indicating the normal gaming state is stored in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. If the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S104-5-10, and if the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S104-6 of the input SW detection process. Migrate processing.

(Step S104-5-10)
In step S104-5-10, the main CPU 101 sets a right-handed error specification command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the right-handed error specification command to the production control board 200. That is, when a ball is hit right in the normal gaming state and the game ball is passed through the gate member 20, a notification regarding a right-hand ball error (for example, a display and audio notification such as "Please hit left") is performed. Become. Then, when the right-hand hitting error designation command is set, the process moves to step S104-6 of input SW detection processing.

(About special design related processing)
FIG. 18 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S105 of main control board timer interrupt processing) showing special symbol related processing performed in the main control board 100.

(Step S105-1)
In step S105-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether a flag indicating stopping is stored in the special symbol status flag storage area of the main RAM 103. For example, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 sets a value “1” indicating that the special symbol is being varied in the special symbol status flag storage area (step S105-2-16 in FIG. 19, which will be described later), and When stopping the fluctuation of the symbols, a value "0" indicating that the symbols are stopped is set in the special symbol state flag storage area (step S105-4-3 in FIG. 20, which will be described later). Note that after setting the value "0" indicating that the game is stopped, if it is a win, the value "2" indicating a winning game is set. If the value "0" indicating stopped is set, the process moves to step S105-2, and if the value "0" indicating stopped is not set, the process goes to step S105-3. Migrate.

(Step S105-2)
In step S105-2, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol fluctuation start processing shown in FIG. 19. Note that this process will be described in detail later using FIG. 19. Then, when the special symbol variation start time process is finished, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-3)
In step S105-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether a flag indicating that the symbol is changing is stored in the special symbol status flag storage area of the main RAM 103. If the value "1" indicating that the fluctuating state is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4, and if the value "1" indicating the fluctuating state is not set, the process proceeds to step S105-5. Migrate.

(Step S105-4)
In step S105-4, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol fluctuation processing shown in FIG. 20. Note that this process will be described in detail later using FIG. 20. Then, when the special symbol fluctuation processing is completed, the processing moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-5)
In step S105-5, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value "0" indicating stopped is not set, and also determines that the value "1" indicating fluctuating is not set, the winning game It is determined that the value "2" indicating ``2'' is set, and the winning game process shown in FIG. 22 is performed. Note that this process will be explained in detail later using FIG. 22. When the winning game process is completed, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(About processing at the start of special symbol fluctuation)
FIG. 19 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S105-2 of special symbol related processing) showing the special symbol fluctuation start time processing performed in the main control board 100.

(Step S105-2-1)
In step S105-2-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is a hold in the hold storage area of the symbol variation game corresponding to the second starting port 22 provided in the main RAM 103. If there is a hold corresponding to the second starting port 22, the process moves to step S105-2-2, and if there is no hold corresponding to the second starting port 22, the process moves to step S105-2-4. Migrate.

(Step S105-2-2)
In step S105-2-2, the main CPU 101 subtracts “1” from the number of holds in the second starting port 22. Regarding the subtraction, as mentioned in the section "About the second starting port 22" above, after sliding the judgment information (random value) of "the relevant variable storage area" to "the fourth storage area", Empty the storage area of "1" corresponds to this. Along with this, the display on the second special symbol reservation display 27d also changes to a display mode (from "blinking" to "lit" or from "lit" to "unlit") according to the number of reservations. Then, after subtracting "1" from the number of reservations in the second starting port 22, the process moves to step S105-2-3.

(Step S105-2-3)
In step S105-2-3, the main CPU 101 sets a second starting opening subtraction command in the command transmission area in order to subtract the number of reservations managed in the production control board 200. Then, when the second starting port subtraction command is set, the process moves to step S105-2-8.

(Step S105-2-4)
In step S105-2-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is a reservation in the reservation storage area corresponding to the first starting port 21 provided in the main RAM 103. If there is a hold corresponding to the first starting port 21, the process moves to step S105-2-5, and if there is no hold corresponding to the first starting port 21, the process moves to step S105-2-7. Migrate.

(Step S105-2-5)
In step S105-2-5, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the number of holds in the first starting port 21. Regarding the subtraction, as mentioned in the section "About the first starting port 21" above, after sliding the judgment information (random value) of "the relevant variable storage area" to "the fourth storage area", Empty the storage area of "1" corresponds to this. Along with this, the display on the first special symbol reservation display 27c also changes to a display mode (from "blinking" to "lit" or from "lit" to "unlit") according to the number of reservations. After "1" is subtracted from the number of reservations in the first starting port 21, the process moves to step S105-2-6.

(Step S105-2-6)
In step S105-2-6, the main CPU 101 sets a first start opening subtraction command in the command transmission area in order to subtract the number of reservations managed in the production control board 200. After setting the first starting port subtraction command, the process moves to step S105-2-8.

(Step S105-2-7)
In step S105-2-7, the main CPU 101 displays "Waiting for Customer" on the image display device 26 when there is no hold corresponding to the second starting port 22 and no holding corresponding to the first starting port 21. To display the screen, set the customer waiting command in the command sending area. After setting the customer waiting command, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

In addition, the "waiting for customer" screen includes, for example, the sub-symbols that were confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation game that ended immediately before, the background image that was displayed in the symbol variation game that ended immediately before, and the display of the relevant variation icon. Area 26o, first starting port first held ball image display area 26g to first starting port fourth held ball image display area 26j (may also include second starting port held ball image display area) are displayed. This is a state in which, for example, an image is additionally displayed to notify that the volume or amount of light can be adjusted. Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed while the user is "waiting for customers," a "demonstration performance" is performed. In addition, in the "demonstration production", the sub-patterns and background images that were displayed in "waiting for customers", the relevant variable icon display area 26o, the first starting port first held ball image display area 26g to the first starting port The fourth held ball image display area 26j (which may also include the held ball image display area of the second starting port), the first starting port held number image 26e, and the second starting port held number image 26f are not displayed, and, for example, Display the model name and manufacturer name using the entire display area. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed during the "demonstration performance", the display becomes "waiting for customers" again.

(Step S105-2-8)
In step S105-2-8, the main CPU 101 sets the reserved storage area designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the reserved storage area designation command to the production control board 200. Then, when the reserved storage area designation command is set, the process moves to step S105-2-9.

(Step S105-2-9)
In step S105-2-9, if the main CPU 101 reaches the process after performing step S105-2-2, the main CPU 101 uses the determination information (random value) acquired and stored in the second starting port detection process. On the other hand, if the process is reached after performing step S105-2-5, the judgment information (random value) acquired and stored in the first starting port detection process is used to calculate the judgment information (random value). Determine whether the value) is the hit determination information (random value). Furthermore, the main CPU 101 determines a special symbol based on the result of the determination. For example, if the judgment information (random value) acquired and stored in the first starting opening detection process determines that it is a hit, one of the special symbols A to C is determined, and when the first starting opening is detected, When it is determined that the determination information (random value) acquired and stored in the process is a loss, a special symbol D is determined. When the special symbol hit determination process is completed, the process moves to step S105-2-10.

(Step S105-2-10)
In step S105-2-10, the main CPU 101 updates the game number counter in the main RAM 103 according to the gaming state. For example, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state game number counter is set to "+1", and if the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state game number counter is set to "-1". Then, if the current gaming state is a variable probability gaming state, the variable probability gaming state game number counter is incremented by "+1". This allows it to be recognized that one symbol variation game has been played. Note that it is not necessary to provide the variable probability game state game number counter. Further, the configuration of addition and subtraction is merely an example, and may be changed as appropriate (addition may be replaced with subtraction, subtraction may be replaced with addition, etc.). After updating the game number counter according to the gaming state, the process moves to step S105-2-11.

(Step S105-2-11)
In step S105-2-11, the main CPU 101 sets a game number counter command. Specifically, in order to transmit the value of the game number counter updated in the process of step S105-2-10 to the production control board 200, a game number counter command is set in the command transmission area. After setting the game number counter command, the process moves to step S105-2-12.

(Step S105-2-12)
In step S105-2-12, the main CPU 101 sets the symbol designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the symbol designation command to the production control board 200. For example, in step S105-2-9, when special symbol D is determined, a symbol designation command indicating that it is special symbol D is set. Then, when the symbol designation command is set, the process moves to step S105-2-13.

(Step S105-2-13)
In step S105-2-13, the main CPU 101 determines a special symbol variation pattern in the symbol variation game. After determining the special symbol variation pattern, the process moves to step S105-2-14.

(Step S105-2-14)
In step S105-2-14, the main CPU 101 designates a special symbol variation pattern in the command transmission area in order to transmit a command indicating the special symbol variation pattern determined in step S105-2-13 to the production control board 200. Set command. For example, when "variation pattern 9" is determined in step S105-2-13, a special symbol variation pattern designation command indicating "variation pattern 9" is set. Then, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is set, the process moves to step S105-2-15.

(Step S105-2-15)
In step S105-2-15, the main CPU 101 sets a variation time (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in step S105-2-13 in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. For example, when "variation pattern 9" is determined, the variation time "70S" is set. After setting the variable time, the process moves to step S105-2-16.

(Step S105-2-16)
In step S105-2-16, the main CPU 101 sets a value "1" in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 to indicate that it is changing. This makes it possible to recognize that the special symbol is changing. Also, in this process, subtraction of the fluctuation time set in step S105-2-15 is started. Then, in the special symbol state flag storage area, when the value "1" indicating that the flag is changing is set, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

In the above description of FIG. 19, if there is determination information for the second starting port 22 in step S105-2-1, the special symbol hit determination process is executed with priority over the first starting port 21. The special symbol hit determination process may be executed in the order in which the ball enters the first starting port 21 and the second starting port 22.

(About special symbol fluctuation processing)
FIG. 20 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S105-4 of special symbol-related processing) showing the special symbol fluctuation processing performed in the main control board 100.

(Step S105-4-1)
In step S105-4-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether the set variable time has elapsed in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. For example, if "variation pattern 9" is determined and "70S" is set, it is determined whether "70S" has elapsed. If the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the process moves to step S105-4-2, and if the special symbol variation time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process. Migrate.

(Step S105-4-2)
In step S105-4-2, the main CPU 101 sends a symbol to the command transmission area in order to transmit a symbol stop command to the effect control board 200 to stop the sub-symbols being variably displayed on the image display device 26. Set a stop command. Then, when the symbol stop command is set, the process moves to step S105-4-3.

(Step S105-4-3)
In step S105-4-3, the main CPU 101 sets a value "0" in the special symbol status flag storage area of the main RAM 103, indicating that the game is stopped. Thereby, it can be recognized that the special symbol is stopped. Then, in the special symbol state flag storage area, when the value "0" indicating the stopped state is set, the process moves to step S105-4-4.

(Step S105-4-4)
In step S105-4-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether the determination result in step S105-2-9 in FIG. 19 is a hit. If it is a win, the process moves to step S105-4-5, and if it is not a win, the process moves to step S105-4-12.

(Step S105-4-5)
In step S105-4-5, the main CPU 101 sets a value "2" indicating a winning game in the special symbol status flag storage area of the main RAM 103. This makes it possible to recognize that it is a winning game. Then, when a value "2" indicating a winning game is set in the special symbol status flag storage area, the process moves to step S105-4-6.

(Step S105-4-6)
In step S105-4-6, the main CPU 101 clears the gaming state. For example, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, it will remain in the normal gaming state, if the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, it will be the normal gaming state, and if the current gaming state is the probability-variable gaming state, it will be the normal gaming state. Enter the gaming state. As a result, during the winning game, the state of the normal symbol becomes "state A (see Figure 5)", and during the winning game, the game ball enters the second starting hole 22, and the game ball enters the big winning hole 24. To prevent a player from incurring a loss due to not hitting a ball. When the gaming state is cleared, the process moves to step S105-4-7.

(Step S105-4-7)
In step S105-4-7, the main CPU 101 clears each game number counter. That is, when a winning game is won, each game number counter shown in FIG. 9 is cleared (the counter value becomes 0) before the winning game starts. Then, when each game number counter is cleared, the process moves to step S105-4-8.

(Step S105-4-8)
In step S105-4-8, the main CPU 101 turns off the executed flag in the storage area of the main RAM 103. Note that the executed flag is a flag indicating that the process of transitioning to the time-saving gaming state has been performed in FIG. 21, which will be described later. Then, when the executed flag is turned OFF in the storage area of the main RAM 103, the process moves to step S105-4-9.

(Step S105-4-9)
In step S105-4-9, the main CPU 101 causes the game to shift to a winning opening to notify that a winning game has started. For example, in the winning state storage area of the main RAM 103, the state of winning games is stored, and if it is a winning opening, "0" is set, and if the big winning opening 24 is open, "1" is set. "2" is set if it is an interval between rounds, and "3" is set if it is an ending. When the winning opening is reached, the process moves to step S105-4-10.

(Step S105-4-10)
In step S105-4-10, the main CPU 101 sets a winning opening command in the command transmission area in order to transmit a winning opening command to the performance control board 200 for executing a performance corresponding to the opening of the winning game. . Then, when the winning opening command is set, the process moves to step S105-4-11.

(Step S105-4-11)
In step S105-4-11, the main CPU 101 sets the time corresponding to the opening of the winning game (for example, "10S") in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. After setting the time corresponding to the winning opening, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-12)
In step S105-4-12, the main CPU 101 performs processing for each gaming state shown in FIG. Note that this process will be explained in detail later using FIG. 21. When the gaming state-specific processing is completed, the processing moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(About processing by game status)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S105-4-12 of special symbol fluctuation processing) showing the processing by game state performed in the main control board 100.

(Step S105-4-12-1)
In step S105-4-12-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state. Specifically, it is determined whether "1" indicating the time-saving gaming state is stored in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. If the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state, the process moves to step S105-4-12-2, and if the current gaming state is not a time-saving gaming state, step S105-4-12-6 Shift processing to .

(Step S105-4-12-2)
In step S105-4-12-2, the main CPU 101 updates the time saving game state game number counter provided in the main RAM 103. Specifically, the time saving game state game number counter is set to "-1". After updating the time-saving game state game number counter, the process moves to step S105-4-12-3.

(Step S105-4-12-3)
In step S105-4-12-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether the updated counter value is 0 as a result of updating the time saving game state game number counter in step S105-4-12-2. If the updated counter value is 0, the process moves to step S105-4-12-4, and if the updated counter value is not 0, step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process Shift processing to .

(Step S105-4-12-4)
In step S105-4-12-4, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103, "0" indicating the normal gaming state is stored. Then, when the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S105-4-12-5.

(Step S105-4-12-5)
In step S105-4-12-5, the main CPU 101 sends a gaming state command (normal) to the production control board 200 in order to send the gaming state command (normal) indicating the normal gaming state. Set to area. Then, when a gaming state command indicating the normal gaming state is set, the process moves to step S106 of main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-4-12-6)
In step S105-4-12-6, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Specifically, it is determined whether "0" indicating the normal gaming state is stored in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. If the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S105-4-12-7, and if the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S105-4-12-16. Shift processing to .

(Step S105-4-12-7)
In step S105-4-12-7, the main CPU 101 updates the normal game state game number counter provided in the main RAM 103. Specifically, the normal game state game number counter is incremented by "+1". Then, once the normal game state game number counter is updated, the process moves to step S105-4-12-8.
In addition, this update is basically updated for both the symbol variation game based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 21 and the symbol variation game based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 22. It is possible.

(Step S105-4-12-8)
In step S105-4-12-8, the main CPU 101 determines whether the updated counter value is "1000" as a result of updating the normal game state game number counter in step S105-4-12-7. If the updated counter value is "1000", the process moves to step S105-4-12-9, and if the updated counter value is not "1000", the main control board timer interrupt The process moves to step S106.

(Step S105-4-12-9)
In step S105-4-12-9, the main CPU 101 determines whether the executed flag is ON. Specifically, with reference to the executed flag storage area of the main RAM 103, if the executed flag storage area is "0", it is determined to be OFF, and if it is "1", it is determined to be ON. If the executed flag is ON, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process, and if the executed flag is not ON, the process moves to step S105-4-12-10. do.

(Step S105-4-12-10)
In step S105-4-12-10, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to a time-saving gaming state. Specifically, in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103, "1" indicating the time saving gaming state is stored. Then, when the gaming state is set to the time-saving gaming state, the process moves to step S105-4-12-11.

That is, in this embodiment, when the normal gaming state game number counter reaches "1000" in the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state shifts to the time saving gaming state. Note that the normal game state game counter is cleared, for example, in step S105-4-7 in FIG. If this occurs (a disadvantageous situation for the player), the system shifts to a time-saving gaming state as a relief. This makes it possible to reduce the number of players who continue playing the game without limit, using "1000" games as a guideline.

Note that the transition to the time-saving gaming state in this process may be hereinafter referred to as "trigger 2" or "time-saving gaming state activated (transitioned) by trigger 2".

In addition, in the normal game state, after the normal game state game counter reaches "1000" and the time saving game state is entered, the symbol variation game is played "1000" times in a row again without hitting a winning game. In the event that the game is played (conveniently 2000 times), the transition to the time-saving gaming state is not performed at that time (the same applies thereafter). In other words, it is positioned as a one-time relief measure in a situation that is disadvantageous to the player. In order to implement such a one-time relief measure, the above-mentioned executed flag is provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal game state game number counter that will transition to the time-saving game state is set to "1000" as an example, but it is not limited to this and can be set to any value. For example, it may be "300" or "500". Further, the number of times is not limited to a large number, but may be a small number of times, such as "50", "10", or "1". However, instead of providing multiple types of values, only a single predetermined value is provided. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to understand even for players who are not familiar with gaming.

In addition, the value of the normal game state game counter that will transition to the time-saving game state is, for example, a value derived from the hit determination probability shown in FIG. 5(A) ("1/319" in FIG. 5(A)). It may be. For example, if the hit determination probability is "1/319", the value of the game number counter in the normal game state that will transition to the time-saving game state is set to "950" (approximately three times the probability denominator), and the hit determination probability is If it is "1/199", the value of the normal game state game number counter that will shift to the time-saving game state may be configured to be "600" (approximately three times the probability denominator).

In addition, as described above, when setting values in multiple stages are provided, the value of the normal gaming state game number counter that will shift to the time-saving gaming state may be common to all the setting values. For example, even when the setting value is 1 or when the setting value is 6, the value of the normal gaming state game number counter that will shift to the time saving gaming state may be set to "1000". This prevents you from blindly continuing to play without knowing which setting value is set, and allows you to set a clear guideline, such as ``1000'' games, no matter what setting value is set. can.

On the other hand, when multiple levels of set values are provided as described above, the value of the normal game state game number counter that will transition to the time-saving game state may be different for each set value. For example, when the setting value is 1, it may be set to "1000", and when the setting value is 6, it may be set to "600". As a result, the set value can be determined from the number of games that have transitioned to the time-saving gaming state, and by drawing attention to the number of games that will cause the transition to the time-saving gaming state, this will lead to an increase in game interest.

(Step S105-4-12-11)
In step S105-4-12-11, the main CPU 101 sets the time saving game state game number counter provided in the main RAM 103 to "100". In other words, in the normal gaming state, if the symbol variation game is played ``1000'' times in a row without hitting a winning game (a disadvantageous situation for the player), a time-saving gaming state of ``100'' is granted as a remedy. will be done. Then, when the time saving game state game number counter is set to "100", the process moves to step S105-4-12-12.

(Step S105-4-12-12)
In step S105-4-12-12, the main CPU 101 turns on the executed flag in the storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when the executed flag is turned ON, the process moves to step S105-4-12-13.

(Step S105-4-12-13)
In step S105-4-12-13, the main CPU 101 sets the executed command in the command transmission area in order to make the effect control board 200 recognize that the executed flag is ON. In addition, when the effect control board 200 receives the executed command, it can execute the notification effect corresponding to the executed command. Details regarding the notification performance will be described later. After setting the executed command, the process moves to step S105-4-12-14.

(Step S105-4-12-14)
In step S105-4-12-14, the main CPU 101 transmits a gaming state command (time saving) to the production control board 200, which indicates the time saving gaming state. Set to area. Then, when a game state command indicating the time-saving game state is set, the process moves to step S105-4-12-15.

(Step S105-4-12-15)
In step S105-4-12-15, the main CPU 101 clears the normal gaming state game number counter in the main RAM 103 (setting the counter value to 0). Then, when the normal game state game number counter is cleared (the counter value is set to 0), the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

Note that the executed flag does not necessarily need to be provided. For example, in step S105-4-12-8, only if the updated counter value is "1000" (for example, in the situation where the updated counter value is "2000" times), step S105-4-12-8 is denied. If the process moves to step S105-4-12-10 (determination), the executed flag is unnecessary. In this case, the configuration may be such that the normal game state game number counter is not cleared in step S105-4-12-15.

(Step S105-4-12-16)
In step S105-4-12-16, the main CPU 101 updates the probability variable gaming state game number counter provided in the main RAM 103. Specifically, the variable probability game state game number counter is incremented by "+1". Then, when the variable probability game state game number counter is updated, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(About winning game processing)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S105-5 of special symbol related processing) showing the winning game processing performed in the main control board 100.

(Step S105-5-1)
In step S105-5-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether a winning opening is in progress. That is, it is determined whether "0" indicating a winning opening is set in the winning state storage area of the main RAM 103. In addition, when the big prize opening is opened in step S105-5-3, which will be described later, the value of the winning state storage area changes from "0" to "1". If the winning opening is in progress, the process moves to step S105-5-2, and if the winning opening is not in progress, the process moves to step S105-5-4.

(Step S105-5-2)
In step S105-5-2, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time (for example, "10S") corresponding to the winning opening set in step S105-4-11 of FIG. 20 described above has elapsed. If the time corresponding to the winning opening has elapsed, the process moves to step S105-5-3, and if the time corresponding to the winning opening has not elapsed, step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing Shift processing to .

(Step S105-5-3)
In step S105-5-3, the main CPU 101 drives the big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 24b to open the big winning hole 24. Further, in the time management counter of the main RAM 103, an open time of 29.5S is set. As a result, the first round of the winning game starts. In this process, the value of the winning state storage area is changed from "0" to "1". Then, when the big prize opening 24 is opened, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-4)
In step S105-5-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether the big prize opening is being opened. In the winning state storage area of the main RAM 103, it is determined whether "1" indicating that the big winning hole is open is set. If the big winning hole is being opened, the process moves to step S105-5-5, and if the big winning hole is not being opened, the process moves to step S105-5-7.

(Step S105-5-5)
In step S105-5-5, the main CPU 101 determines whether 29.5 seconds have elapsed with the big winning hole 24 remaining open without any 10 balls being detected by the big winning hole detection SW 24a, or if the big winning hole has been detected. It is determined by the SW 24a whether the entry of 10 balls has been detected or whether any one of the conditions for closing the big winning hole is satisfied. If the big winning opening closing condition is satisfied, the process moves to step S105-5-6, and if the big winning opening closing condition is not satisfied, the process goes to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process. Migrate.

(Step S105-5-6)
In step S105-5-6, the main CPU 101 causes the game to shift to an inter-round interval that constitutes the period from when the big prize opening 24 closes until it opens next time. In this process, the value of the winning state storage area is changed from "1" to "2". Then, when the process moves to the inter-round interval, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-7)
In step S105-5-7, the main CPU 101 determines whether the interval between rounds is in progress. That is, it is determined whether "2" indicating the interval between rounds is set in the winning state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, if it is during the interval between rounds, the process moves to step S105-5-8, and if it is not during the interval between rounds, the process moves to step S105-5-13.

(Step S105-5-8)
In step S105-5-8, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is the end of the final round. For example, in step S105-5-11, which will be described later, if the number of rounds remaining is "0" as a result of updating (incrementing or decrementing) the number of rounds, it is determined in this process that it is the end of the final round. If it is the end of the final round, the process moves to step S105-5-9, and if it is not the end of the final round, the process moves to step S105-5-11.

(Step S105-5-9)
In step S105-5-9, the main CPU 101 causes the game to shift to an ending that notifies that the winning game has ended. In this process, the value of the winning state storage area is set from "2" to "3". Further, the time corresponding to the ending of the winning game (for example, 10S) is set in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. When the process moves to the ending, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-10)
In step S105-5-10, the main CPU 101 sets an ending command in the command transmission area in order to transmit an ending command to the performance control board 200 for executing a performance corresponding to the ending of the winning game. After setting the ending command, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-11)
In step S105-5-11, the main CPU 101 updates the value of the round number counter in the main RAM 103. Note that the updating method may be increment or decrement. For example, if a 5-round win is awarded, the round number counter in the main RAM 103 may be set to "5" and decremented by 1 each time one round is completed, or the round number counter in the main RAM 103 may be Instead of setting "5" to "5", it may be incremented by 1 each time one round is completed. After updating the number of rounds, the process moves to step S105-5-12.

(Step S105-5-12)
In step S105-5-12, the main CPU 101 drives the big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 24b to open the big winning hole 24. Further, in the time management counter of the main RAM 103, an open time of 29.5S is set. As a result, the second and subsequent rounds of the winning game start. In this process, the value of the winning state storage area is changed from "0" to "1". Then, when the big prize opening 24 is opened, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-13)
In step S105-5-13, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time (for example, 10S) corresponding to the ending set in step S105-5-9 described above has elapsed. If the time corresponding to the ending has elapsed, the process moves to step S105-5-14, and if the time corresponding to the ending has not elapsed, step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process Shift processing to .

(Step S105-5-14)
In step S105-5-14, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol is one of "special symbol A", "special symbol B", and "special symbol E". That is, it is determined whether the special symbol determined based on the hit is one of "special symbol A", "special symbol B", and "special symbol E". If the special symbol is one of "special symbol A,""special symbol B," or "special symbol E," the process moves to step S105-5-15, and the special symbol is "special symbol A." , "special symbol B", or "special symbol E", the process moves to step S105-5-18.

(Step S105-5-15)
In step S105-5-15, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to a variable probability gaming state. Therefore, in this process, "2" is set in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when "2" is set in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process moves to step S105-5-16.

(Step S105-5-16)
In step S105-5-16, the main CPU 101 sends the gaming state command (probable variation) to the command transmission area in order to transmit the gaming state command (probable variation) indicating that the probability variation gaming state is in the production control board 200. set. Then, when a gaming state command indicating a variable probability gaming state is set, the process moves to step S105-5-17.

(Step S105-5-17)
In step S105-5-17, the main CPU 101 sets a value "0" in the special symbol status flag storage area of the main RAM 103, indicating that the game is stopped. Then, in the special symbol state flag storage area, when the value "0" indicating the stopped state is set, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-18)
In step S105-5-18, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to a time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in this process, "1" is set in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when "1" is set in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process moves to step S105-5-19.

Note that the transition to the time-saving gaming state in this process may be referred to as "opportunity 1" or "time-saving gaming state activated (transitioned) by opportunity 1" below.

(Step S105-5-19)
In step S105-5-19, the main CPU 101 sets a time saving game state game number counter provided in the main RAM 103 to "100". As a result, "100" time-saving gaming states will start from the next variation. Then, when "100" is set in the time saving game state game number counter provided in the main RAM 103, the process moves to step S105-5-20.

In addition, although "100" is set to the time saving game state game number counter in both "opportunity 1" and "opportunity 2", it is not limited to this. "Trigger 1" may be set to a larger value than "Trigger 2", and "Trigger 1" may be set to a smaller value than "Trigger 2".

In addition, for both "opportunity 1" and "opportunity 2", there may be a plurality of types of values set in the time saving game state game number counter. Further, one of "motivation 1" and "motivation 2" may have a plurality of types, but the other may have only one type.

(Step S105-5-20)
In step S105-5-20, the main CPU 101 sets a gaming state command (time saving) indicating the time saving gaming state to the production control board 200 in the command transmission area. Then, when a gaming state command (time saving) indicating the time saving gaming state is set, the process moves to step S105-5-21.

(Step S105-5-21)
In step S105-5-21, the main CPU 101 sets a value "0" in the special symbol status flag storage area of the main RAM 103, indicating that the game is stopped. Then, in the special symbol state flag storage area, when the value "0" indicating the stopped state is set, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(About abnormality determination processing)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S108 of main control board timer interrupt processing) showing the abnormality determination process performed in the main control board 100.

(Step S108-1)
In step S108-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether magnetic sensor input has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether an input has been made from the magnetic sensor 27h. If an input is made from the magnetic sensor 27h, the process moves to step S108-2, and if no input is made from the magnetic sensor 27h, the process moves to step S108-4.

(Step S108-2)
In step S108-2, the main CPU 101 determines whether the amount of magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor 27h exceeds a specified value. If the amount of magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor 27h exceeds the specified value, the process moves to step S108-3, and if the amount of magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor 27h does not exceed the specified value, the process proceeds to step S108-3. , the process moves to step S108-4.

(Step S108-3)
In step S108-3, the main CPU 101 sets a magnetic anomaly designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit a magnetic anomaly designation command for reporting a magnetic anomaly to the production control board 200. After setting the magnetic anomaly designation command, the process moves to step S108-4.

(Step S108-4)
In step S108-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether a radio wave sensor input has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether an input has been made from the radio wave sensor 27i. If an input is made from the radio wave sensor 27i, the process moves to step S108-5, and if no input is made from the radio wave sensor 27i, the process moves to step S109.

(Step S108-5)
In step S108-5, the main CPU 101 determines whether the amount of radio waves detected by the radio wave sensor 27i exceeds a specified value. If the amount of radio waves detected by the radio wave sensor 27i exceeds the specified value, the process moves to step S108-6, and if the amount of radio waves detected by the radio wave sensor 27i does not exceed the specified value, the process proceeds to step S108-6. , the process moves to step S109.

(Step S108-6)
In step S108-6, the main CPU 101 sets a radio wave abnormality designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit a radio wave abnormality designation command for notifying the radio wave abnormality to the production control board 200. After setting the radio wave abnormality designation command, the process moves to step S109.

(Regarding control processing performed by sub CPU 201)
The control processing performed by the sub CPU 201 will be explained using FIGS. 24 to 29. Note that the control programs shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 24 to 29 are stored in the sub ROM 202, and the sub CPU 201 reads the control programs from the sub ROM 202 and performs control processing according to the read control programs.

(Step S200)
In step S200, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a power outage state (power outage state). As a result, if the power is being cut off (power outage state), the process of step S200 is repeatedly executed, and if the power is not being cut off (power outage state), the process moves to step S201. Note that when the power is interrupted (power outage state), the process can be executed using a backup power source (not shown).

(Step S201)
In step S201, the sub CPU 201 performs initial setting processing to initialize the values of internally provided registers and the like. When the initial setting process is finished, the process moves to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the sub CPU 201 performs CTC settings. In other words, the CTC (counter timer circuit), which has the function of creating pulse output with a constant period and the function of time measurement, is set, so that the effect control board timer interrupt processing described below is performed periodically every 4 ms. , set the time constant register of CTC. After setting the CTC, the process moves to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the sub CPU 201 prohibits the interruption of the effect control board timer interrupt process which is periodically executed by interrupting the effect control board main process. Then, when interrupts are prohibited, the process moves to step S204.

(Step S204)
In step S204, the sub CPU 201 updates the random number for effect. When the process of updating the random number for effect is completed, the process moves to step S205.

(Step S205)
In step S205, the sub CPU 201 permits the interruption of the effect control board timer interrupt process which is executed by periodically interrupting the effect control board main process. If the interrupt is permitted, the process moves to step S203 again, and from then on, steps S203 to S205 are looped.

(About production control board timer interrupt processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the production control board timer interrupt process performed in the production control board 200. This process is a process that is executed by interrupting the above-mentioned production control board main process periodically (for example, every 4 ms).

(Step S300)
In step S300, the sub CPU 201 saves the contents of the register to the stack area. After the contents of the register are saved to the stack area, the process moves to step S301.

(Step S301)
In step S301, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the timer managed by the production control board 200. After updating the timer, the process moves to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub CPU 201 performs input processing of the operating device shown in FIG. Note that this process will be explained in detail later using FIG. 26. Then, when the input processing of the operating device is completed, the processing moves to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub CPU 201 performs main command reception processing shown in FIGS. 27 and 28. Note that this process will be explained in detail later using FIGS. 27 and 28. When the main command receiving process is finished, the process moves to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of transmitting a sub command. The subcommand is a command that is set in the main command reception process shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, which will be described later. In this process, the subcommand is sent to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. . Then, the image/sound control section 200b and the light emission drive control section 200c that have received the subcommand control the display, sound, light emission, and drive effects corresponding to the subcommand. After transmitting the subcommand, the process moves to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub CPU 201 restores the contents saved to the stack area in step S300 to the register. Then, when the content saved in the stack area is restored to the register, the production control board timer interrupt process is ended.

(About operation device input processing)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S302 of the production control board timer interrupt process) showing the operation device input process performed in the production control board 200.

(Step S302-1)
In step S302-1, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the cross key detection SW (up or down) input has been performed. Note that the cross key detection SW 16a shown in FIG. 4 has SWs corresponding to the top, bottom, left, and right sides of the cross key button 16, and for example, when the top of the cross key button 16 is operated, It can be determined that the cross key detection SW (upper) has been input. If the cross key detection SW (up or down) is input, the process moves to step S302-2, and if the cross key detection SW (up or down) is not input, step S302- The process moves to step 5.

(Step S302-2)
In step S302-2, the sub CPU 201 determines whether an upward cross key detection SW input has been made. If the upper direction cross key detection SW input is performed, the process moves to step S302-3, and if the upward direction cross key detection SW input is not performed, the process moves to step S302-4. Transition.

(Step S302-3)
In step S302-3, the sub CPU 201 sends the light amount value change (increase) subcommand to the subcommand transmission area in order to send the light amount value change (increase) subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Set. Thereby, the brightness of the image display device 26 and the light emitting device 9 can be increased. Then, when the light amount value change (increase) subcommand is set, the process moves to step S303 of the production control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S302-4)
In step S302-4, the sub CPU 201 sends the light amount value change (reduction) subcommand to the subcommand transmission area in order to send the light amount value change (reduction) subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Set. Thereby, the brightness of the image display device 26 and the light emitting device 9 can be lowered. Then, when the light amount value change (decrease) subcommand is set, the process moves to step S303 of the production control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S302-5)
In step S302-5, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the cross key detection SW (left or right) input has been performed. If the cross key detection SW (left or right) is input, the process moves to step S302-6, and if the cross key detection SW (left or right) is not input, the process moves to step S302-6. The process moves to step 9.

(Step S302-6)
In step S302-6, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the right direction cross key detection SW input has been performed. If the right direction cross key detection SW input is performed, the process moves to step S302-7, and if the right direction cross key detection SW input is not performed, the process moves to step S302-8. Transition.

(Step S302-7)
In step S302-7, the sub CPU 201 sets the volume value change (increase) subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the volume value change (increase) subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b. Thereby, the volume value of BGM (background music), sound effects, etc. output from the speaker 10 can be increased. Then, when the volume value change (increase) subcommand is set, the process moves to step S303 of the production control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S302-8)
In step S302-8, the sub CPU 201 sets the volume value change (decrease) subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the volume value change (decrease) subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b. Thereby, the volume value of BGM, sound effects, etc. output from the speaker 10 can be lowered. Then, when the volume value change (decrease) subcommand is set, the process moves to step S303 of the production control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S302-9)
In step S302-9, the sub CPU 201 performs processing corresponding to other operating devices. For example, if there is an input from the production button detection SW 14a, a production button operation sub-command is sent to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c, and if there is an input from the production lever detection SW 15a, the production lever operation sub-command is sent. It is transmitted to the image/sound control section 200b and the light emission drive control section 200c. Then, when the processing corresponding to the other operating devices is completed, the processing moves to step S303 of the production control board timer interrupt processing.

(About main command reception processing)
FIG. 27 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S301 of the production control board timer interrupt process) showing 1/2 of the main command reception process performed in the production control board 200.

(Step S301-1)
In step S301-1, the sub CPU 201 determines whether a power supply related information command has been received. The power-related information commands include the above-mentioned power-on command and power-recovery command. If any of these commands is received, the process moves to step S301-2, and if any of these commands is not received, the process moves to step S301-4.

(Step S301-2)
In step S301-2, the sub CPU 201 performs a process when receiving a power supply related information command. For example, if a power-on command is received, processing related to power-on is performed, and if a power restoration command is received, processing related to power restoration is performed. When the process is finished, the process moves to step S301-3.

(Step S301-3)
In step S301-3, the sub CPU 201 sets the power supply related subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the power supply related subcommand to the image/sound control section 200b and the light emission drive control section 200c. When the process is finished, the process moves to step S302 of the production control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-4)
In step S301-4, the sub CPU 201 determines whether an error related information command has been received. Examples of the error-related information command include the above-mentioned magnetic abnormality designation command and radio wave abnormality designation command. If any of these commands is received, the process moves to step S301-5, and if any of these commands is not received, the process moves to step S301-7.

(Step S301-5)
In step S301-5, the sub CPU 201 performs a process when receiving an error related information command. For example, if a magnetic abnormality designation command is received, a process related to a magnetic abnormality error is performed, and if a radio wave abnormality designation command is received, a process related to a radio wave abnormality error is performed. When the process is finished, the process moves to step S301-6.

(Step S301-6)
In step S301-6, the sub CPU 201 sets the error related subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the error related subcommand to the image/sound control section 200b and the light emission drive control section 200c. When the process is finished, the process moves to step S302 of the production control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-7)
In step S301-7, the sub CPU 201 determines whether a starting port related information command has been received. The starting opening related information commands include the above-mentioned first starting opening winning command, second starting opening winning command, first starting opening subtraction command, second starting opening subtraction command, and reserved storage area designation command. If any of these commands is received, the process moves to step S301-8, and if any of these commands is not received, the process moves to step S301-11.

(Step S301-8)
In step S301-8, the sub CPU 201 performs icon change effect determination processing. Specifically, when receiving the first starting opening winning command or the second starting opening winning command, the sub CPU 201 refers to the information on the determination result of the winning determination process included in the command, and selects the variable icon. and the display mode of the hold icon (the color of the relevant variable icon and hold icon described in the “hold look-ahead effect” described later). When the process is finished, the process moves to step S301-9.

(Step S301-9)
In step S301-9, the sub CPU 201 performs a starting port light emitting device change effect determination process. The light emitting color of the starting port light emitting device is linked to the color of the hold icon determined in step S301-8. For example, when the ball enters the starting port, the color of the hold icon is changed in step S301-8. If it is determined that the light is blue, the starting port light emitting device 21b also emits light in blue. When the process is finished, the process moves to step S301-10.
Note that hereinafter, the performance performed in conjunction with the color of the hold icon in the starting port light emitting device 21b may be referred to as a "starting port light emitting device change effect."

(Step S301-10)
In step S301-10, the sub CPU 201 sets the starting port related subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the starting port related subcommand to the image/sound control section 200b and the light emission drive control section 200c. When the process is finished, the process moves to step S302 of the production control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-11)
In step S301-11, the sub CPU 201 determines whether a gaming state related information command has been received. The gaming state related information commands include a gaming state command (normal), a gaming state command (time saving), and a gaming state command (variable). If any of these commands is received, the process moves to step S301-12, and if any of these commands is not received, the process moves to step S301-14.

(Step S301-12)
In step S301-12, the sub CPU 201 performs a process when receiving a gaming state related information command. For example, when a gaming state command (normal) is received, processing related to the normal gaming state is performed, when a gaming state command (time saving) is received, processing related to the time saving gaming state is performed, and when a gaming state command (probable variable) is received, processing related to the fixed gaming state is performed. Performs processing related to. When the process is finished, the process moves to step S301-13.

(Step S301-13)
In step S301-13, the sub CPU 201 sets the gaming state related subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the gaming state related subcommand to the image/sound control section 200b and the light emission drive control section 200c. When the process is finished, the process moves to step S302 of the production control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-14)
In step S301-14, the sub CPU 201 determines whether a gate passage command has been received. If the gate passing command is received, the process moves to step S301-15, and if the gate passing command is not received, the process moves to step S301-16.

(Step S301-15)
In step S301-15, the sub CPU 201 sets the gate passage subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the gate passage subcommand to the image/sound control section 200b and the light emission drive control section 200c. When the process is finished, the process moves to step S302 of the production control board timer interrupt process.

(About main command reception processing)
FIG. 28 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S301 of the production control board timer interrupt process) showing the main command reception process 2/2 performed in the production control board 200.

(Step S301-16)
In step S301-16, the sub CPU 201 determines whether a symbol designation command has been received. If the symbol designation command is received, the process moves to step S301-17, and if the symbol designation command is not received, the process moves to step S301-19.

(Step S301-17)
In step S301-17, the sub CPU 201 performs a process when receiving a symbol designation command. For example, when a symbol designation command designating special symbol A is received, the combination of decorative symbols ``777'' is determined so that the combination of symbols ``777'' is determined and displayed as a decorative symbol. Furthermore, even if the combination of the decorative pattern "444" is determined so that when a design designation command specifying the special symbol A is received, the combination of "444" is determined and displayed as the decorative pattern. good. In this case, after the winning game ends, the game may be configured to shift to a time-saving game state, so that although it appears to be a time-saving game state, the actual game state is a probability-variable game state. With this configuration, even a time-saving gaming state may be advantageous in terms of appearance, so it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. When the process is finished, the process moves to step S301-18.

In addition, in step S301-17, when a symbol designation command specifying a special symbol (win) is received, the executed flag in the sub-RAM 203 is referred to, and if the executed flag is ON, the executed flag is Turn it off. Similarly, when a power-on command or a setting value changing command (command sent when the main RAM 103 is cleared) is received, the executed flag of the sub RAM 203 is referred to and the executed flag is set to ON. If so, the executed flag is turned OFF.

(Step S301-18)
In step S301-18, the sub CPU 201 sets the sub symbol related sub command in the sub command transmission area in order to transmit the sub symbol related sub command to the image/sound control section 200b and the light emission drive control section 200c. When the process is finished, the process moves to step S302 of the production control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-19)
In step S301-19, the sub CPU 201 determines whether a special symbol variation pattern designation command has been received. If the special symbol variation pattern designation command is received, the process moves to step S301-20, and if the special symbol variation pattern designation command is not received, the process moves to step S301-25.

(Step S301-20)
In step S301-20, the sub CPU 201 performs a variable effect pattern determination process. Specifically, from a variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 202, a variable effect pattern corresponding to the designated special symbol change pattern is determined. In addition, in the variable effect pattern determination table, one or more variable effect patterns are associated with one special symbol variable pattern. For example, if it is "normal variation" (7S) of "variation pattern 1", one corresponding variation effect pattern (7S) is prepared, and if it is "super reach" (40S) of "variation pattern 3", For example, a plurality of corresponding variable effect patterns (40S) are prepared. When "variable pattern 3" is received, any one variable performance pattern is determined from a plurality of prepared variable performance patterns. It should be noted that since the plurality of variable effect patterns prepared have different effect contents, it is possible to perform a plurality of effects with respect to one variable pattern. When the process is finished, the process moves to step S301-21.

(Step S301-21)
In step S301-21, the sub CPU 201 performs icon change effect update processing. The icon change effect update process is to update the color of the icon determined in step S301-8 based on a change scenario (not shown). For example, if the change scenario is from blue to yellow, it is determined in the process that the color changes to yellow. In other words, the icon may change color each time a game of 1 variation is played. When the process is finished, the process moves to step S301-22.

(Step S301-22)
In step S301-22, the sub CPU 201 performs a starting port light emitting device change effect update process. Note that this process is performed in conjunction with the color updated in step S301-21. For example, if the color is updated to yellow in step S301-21, the starting port light emitting device 21b also changes from blue to yellow. Changes to When the process is finished, the process moves to step S301-23.

(Step S301-23)
In step S301-23, the sub CPU 201 performs jackpot preview effect determination processing. Specifically, a jackpot preview effect to be executed in the symbol variation game is determined from a jackpot preview effect determination table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 202. Here, the jackpot preview performance is a performance that can be executed in a symbol variation game, and one or more jackpot preview performances can be executed in one symbol variation game. In addition, there are jackpot preview performances that are difficult to determine when it is determined to be a hit in the special symbol hit determination process, but are easy to determine when it is determined to be a loss (jackpot preview performance A), and those that are easy to determine when the special symbol hit determination process is determined to be a loss. It is easy to determine when it is determined to be a hit, and difficult to determine when it is determined to be a loss (Jackpot Preview Performance B), and it is possible to determine only when it is determined to be a hit in the special symbol hit determination process. It is equipped with things that will not be determined if it is determined to be a loss (Jackpot Preview Performance C, so-called Premier Preview). Further, in a winning symbol variation game, multiple previews are likely to be executed, and in a losing symbol variation game (particularly a normal variation loss), multiple previews tend to be difficult to execute. When the process is finished, the process moves to step S301-24.

(Step S301-24)
In step S301-24, the sub CPU 201 sends a variation pattern related sub command (for example, information determined in steps S301-20 to S301-23) to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, set the variation pattern related subcommand in the subcommand transmission area. When the process is finished, the process moves to step S302 of the production control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-25)
In step S301-25, the sub CPU 201 determines whether an executed command has been received. If an executed command has been received, the process moves to step S301-26, and if an executed command has not been received, the process moves to step S301-27.

(Step S301-26)
In step S301-26, the sub CPU 201 turns on the executed flag in the sub RAM 203. The executed flag in the sub-RAM 203 is referred to in the specific effect determination process (see FIG. 29), which will be described later. Then, when the executed flag is turned ON in the sub RAM 203, the process moves to step S302 of the production control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-27)
In step S301-27, the sub CPU 201 determines whether a game number counter command has been received. If the number of games counter command is received, the process moves to step S301-28, and if the number of games counter command is not received, the process moves to step S301-30.

(Step S301-28)
In step S301-28, the sub CPU 201 performs a specific effect determination process shown in FIG. 29. Note that this process will be described in detail later using FIG. 29. When the specific effect determination process is completed, the process moves to step S301-29.

(Step S301-29)
In step S301-29, the sub CPU 201 sets the specific effect related subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the specific effect related subcommand to the image/sound control section 200b and the light emission drive control section 200c. When the process is finished, the process moves to step S302 of the production control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-30)
In step S301-30, the sub CPU 201 performs processing corresponding to other received commands. For example, when a setting value changing command, a setting value information command, a setting value checking command, and a setting value checking end command are received, processes corresponding to these received commands are performed. When the process is finished, the process moves to step S302 of the production control board timer interrupt process.

(About specific production decision processing)
FIG. 29 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S301-28 of the main command reception process) showing the specific performance determination process performed in the performance control board 200.

(Step S301-28-1)
In step S301-28-1, the sub CPU 201 refers to the executed flag in the sub RAM 203. Then, referring to the executed flag in the sub RAM 203, the process moves to step S301-28-2.

(Step S301-28-2)
In step S301-28-2, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the executed flag is ON. Specifically, in step S301-28-1, as a result of referring to the executed flag in the sub-RAM 203, it is determined whether the executed flag is ON. If the executed flag is ON, the process moves to step S301-28-3, and if the executed flag is not ON, the process moves to step S301-28-4.

(Step S301-28-3)
In step S301-28-3, the sub CPU 201 refers to the effect table A and determines a specific effect. Note that the presentation table A and the specific presentation will be described in detail later using FIG. 30. Then, after referring to the effect table A and determining a specific effect, the process moves to step S301-29.

(Step S301-28-4)
In step S301-28-4, the sub CPU 201 refers to the effect table B and determines a specific effect. Note that the effect table B will also be explained in detail later using FIG. 30. Then, after referring to the effect table B and determining a specific effect, the process moves to step S301-29.

(About the production table and specific production)
Next, the presentation table and specific presentation will be explained using FIG. 30. Note that the effect table A and the effect table B shown in FIG. 30 are stored in the sub-ROM 202.

First of all, a specific production is a production that suggests (notifies) that there is a possibility of transitioning (to the time-saving gaming state) regarding the time-saving gaming state (trigger 2) to which the transition is made in the gaming state-specific processing of FIG. 21 described above. That's true. As mentioned above, trigger 2 is that after the normal game state game number counter reaches "1000" and the time saving game state is entered, the normal game state game number counter becomes "2000" without winning a winning game. However, there will be no transition to the time-saving gaming state.
A specific performance is a performance that suggests (announces) that trigger 2 has not yet occurred in a situation where it has not yet occurred (a situation where the normal game state game number counter mentioned above has not reached "1000"). It is. Therefore, in a situation where trigger 2 has occurred (a situation where the normal game state game number counter mentioned above exceeds "1000"), it is suggested that trigger 2 has already occurred because the specific performance is not performed. (notification).
In addition, even if opportunity 2 has already occurred (a situation in which the number of games in the normal gaming state mentioned above exceeds 1000), by executing some kind of effect, opportunity 2 has already occurred (the number of games in the normal gaming state mentioned above). It may be suggested (notified) that the counter exceeds "1000".

An example of the specific effect is a countdown effect shown in FIG. 30. The countdown performance, as shown in performance table B, is a performance that suggests (informs) the number of games until opportunity 2 occurs. For the countdown effect, "no effect" is selected on the effect table A even if the game number counter is "700", "800", or "900", The countdown performance itself is not executed. Note that, as shown in FIG. 29, the effect table A is a table that is referred to when the executed flag is ON, so the countdown effect will not be performed in a situation where trigger 2 has already occurred. . On the other hand, in production table B, when the number of games counter is "700", "300 remaining until XX RUSH!" is selected as the production content, and when the number of games counter is "800", the production content is selected as When "200 remaining until XXX RUSH!" is selected and the game number counter is "900", "100 remaining until XXX RUSH!" is selected as the performance content. Note that, as shown in FIG. 29, the effect table B is a table that is referred to when the executed flag is not ON, so the countdown effect will be performed in a situation where trigger 2 has not occurred. . It should be noted that "○○RUSH" is the name for the performance of the time-saving game state.

In this way, in a situation where trigger 2 has not occurred, the number of games until trigger 2 occurs is suggested (announced) with a countdown effect, and in a situation where trigger 2 has already occurred, the countdown effect itself is not executed. I made it. As a result, people play games without knowing whether trigger 2 has not occurred or trigger 2 has already occurred, and they play excessively even though trigger 2 has already occurred. You can prevent this from happening.

Note that the countdown effect is not limited to the content shown in FIG. 30, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the countdown effect may be executed in every game (every single game), or the countdown effect may be executed every "100" games. If this is done in every game, the player can immediately grasp the situation in which opportunity 2 has occurred, thereby preventing him or her from playing the game excessively. In addition, if this is performed every "100" games, it is possible to prevent the performance of the games from decreasing significantly.

Further, the specific performance is not limited to the countdown performance, but may be a game number display performance shown in FIG. 30. The number-of-games display effect refers to displaying a number-of-games image corresponding to the value of the number-of-games counter on the image display device 26, and trigger 2 occurs due to differences in the display color, size, font, etc. of the number-of-games image. This is a production that suggests (informs) whether the situation is such that it has not occurred, or whether Trigger 2 has already occurred.
Specifically, in the effect table A that is referred to when the trigger 2 has already occurred, the game number image is displayed in a normal color (for example, yellow). On the other hand, in the effect table B that is referred to in a situation where trigger 2 has not occurred, the game number image is displayed in red. This allows the player to understand whether trigger 2 has not occurred or trigger 2 has already occurred, and it is possible to prevent excessive gaming (play moderately). ).

Note that the countdown effect and number of games display effect shown in FIG. 30 are executed in a situation where trigger 2 has not occurred, and are not executed in a situation where trigger 2 has already occurred, but they are not executed in a situation where trigger 2 has not occurred. In this case, it may be easy to execute (in some cases it may not be executed), and in a situation where trigger 2 has already occurred, it may be difficult to execute (in some cases, it may not be executed).

Here, with reference to FIG. 68, specific display modes of the countdown effect and the game number display effect will be discussed.

FIG. 68(a-1) shows the display mode when referring to the effect table A in the countdown effect, and FIG. 68(a-2) shows the display mode when referring to the effect table B in the countdown effect. It shows.
"400" in the figure is the number of games image gc corresponding to the value of the number of games counter, and in the normal gaming state, the symbol variation game was played consecutively "400" times without hitting a winning game. It is shown that.

Then, in FIG. 68(a-2), in the "400" symbol variation game, a countdown effect image CD such as "600 left until ○○ RUSH!" is displayed, and the number of games until trigger 2 occurs is You can now see that there are 600 more times. On the other hand, in FIG. 68(a-1), in the "400th" symbol variation game, the countdown effect image CD such as "600 left until XXX RUSH!" is not displayed, and because the display is not performed, It is now possible to know that trigger 2 has already occurred. A player who visually recognizes such a display mode can easily decide whether or not to continue playing the game, and can play the game appropriately.

FIG. 68(b-1) shows the display mode when referring to the effect table A in the number of games display effect, and FIG. 68(b-2) shows the display mode when referring to the effect table B in the number of games display effect. This shows the display mode.
In the number of games display effect, the display mode of the number of games image gc changes depending on whether trigger 2 has occurred or trigger 2 has not occurred. For example, when trigger 2 has occurred, When referring to production table A, as shown in FIG. 68(b-1), the display mode (display color, size, font, etc.) of the game number image gc in the "399" symbol variation game and , the display mode (display color, size, font, etc.) of the game number image gc in the "400" symbol variation game is the same display mode (display color, size, font, etc. does not change). Become. On the other hand, when referring to production table B in which trigger 2 has not occurred, as shown in FIG. (display color, size, font, etc.) and the display mode (display color, size, font, etc.) of the game number image gc in the "400" symbol variation game are different (display color, size, font, etc.). , font, etc. will change).

In this way, if there is a change in the display mode of the number of games image gc, it can be understood that trigger 2 has not occurred, and if there is no change in the display mode of the number of games image gc, then trigger 2 can be determined. It is possible to understand that the situation has already occurred. A player who visually recognizes such a display mode can easily decide whether or not to continue playing the game, and can play the game appropriately.

In addition, in the case where the game number display performance is performed every game or every 100 times, the following situation is also assumed.
For example, if trigger 2 has not occurred and the normal gaming state game counter is "500" at the end of business on the first day at the gaming parlor, if the main RAM 103 is not initialized, At the start of business on the first day, the value of the counter may be inherited. However, in this case, it is preferable that the game number image gc displayed on the image display device 26 starts displaying from "0".
Of course, if the main RAM 103 is initialized, the value of the counter becomes "0", and the game number image gc displayed on the image display device 26 also becomes "0".
In other words, whether the main RAM 103 has been initialized or not can be detected from the game number image gc.
In this way, it is possible to prevent players from attempting to play games only at the start of business hours.
In addition, if the main RAM 103 has not been initialized, for example, from the start of business, when "500" symbol variation games have been played consecutively without hitting a winning game (the number of games image gc Since the display is "500"), the shift to the time-saving gaming state is performed based on trigger 2, so it is possible to provide surprise to the player.
In other words, it is not necessary to assume that the transition to the time-saving gaming state based on trigger 2 is performed only when the display of the number of games image gc becomes "1000".

Next, examples of various performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described below.

(Pre-reading performance)
The pre-reading effect is a preliminary judgment process (FIGS. 15 and 16) which is performed at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 21 or the second starting port 22, prior to the special symbol hit determining process in the special symbol fluctuation start process. This is an effect that is executed based on the determination result of the preliminary determination process. If the look-ahead effect is not installed, for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 21, after acquiring and storing the judgment information (random value), the special pattern hit judgment is performed in the process at the start of special pattern variation. Since the processing is performed, even if the judgment information (random value) is stored in the "fourth storage area", it cannot be determined whether it is a win or not until the judgment information (random value) is transferred to the "variable storage area". Not done. Therefore, even if the judgment information (random value) of a "win" has been acquired, the expectation of a win will be lost before the judgment information (random value) is transferred to the "relevant variable storage area". It is not possible to perform effects to enhance the performance. However, if a look-ahead effect is installed, for example, "pre-judgment processing (determination processing when winning a prize)" is performed, and after determining whether it is a "win" or "loss", the "variable storage area" stores the determination information (random number value). ) can be executed continuously over multiple fluctuations (including the fluctuations moved to the relevant fluctuation storage area) until the relevant fluctuation storage area is moved. You will also be able to increase your anticipation of winning from the previous stage.

A specific example of the above-mentioned look-ahead effect is a "suspended look-ahead effect." "Pending look-ahead effect" mainly refers to the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 26o, the first held ball image display area 26g at the first starting port to the fourth held ball image display area 26j at the first starting port. This is an effect using the hold icons to be displayed, and the hold icons to be displayed in the second starting port first held ball image display area 26k to the second starting port fourth held ball image display area 26n. For example, if a game ball enters the first starting port 21 when the judgment information (random value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third storage area", the judgment information (random value) is stored in the "fourth storage area". After storing the numerical value), advance judgment processing is performed. If it is determined based on the determination result of the preliminary determination process that the suspension look-ahead effect is to be performed, a default normal color (white) suspension icon ( A prefetch pending icon that is different from the normal icon) is displayed. The pre-read pending icon can be displayed in multiple types and stages, such as "blue", "yellow", "green", "red", and "rainbow", and if the judgment result of the pre-judgment process is a "win" In this case, any of "blue", "yellow", "green", "red", or "rainbow" can be displayed, and if the judgment result of the preliminary judgment process is "lost", "blue", Either "yellow", "green", or "red" can be displayed. Then, it is possible to select "Rainbow" only in the case of "Win", and in the case of "Win", it is easier to select "Red", and in the case of "Lose", "Blue" is selected. This makes it easier and increases the expectation of winning the "red". The relationship between the expectations for winning is as follows: Rainbow>Red>Green>Yellow>Blue>Normal in descending order of expectation for winning. In the following, such a presentation may be referred to as an "icon change presentation."

Further, as a specific example of another effect of the above-mentioned look-ahead effect, there is a "flash effect when winning a prize". "Winning flash effect" means that when a game ball enters the starting hole, the speaker lamp 10a provided in the lower speaker 10 emits light, and the symbol change game related to the ball enters the starting hole until the symbol variation game starts, or This is an effect that increases expectations for winning by continuously emitting light until the symbol variation game related to the ball entry is being executed or until the end of the symbol variation game related to the ball entry. For example, if a game ball enters the first starting port 21 while the judgment information (random value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third storage area", the judgment information (random value) is stored in the "fourth storage area". After storing the numerical value), advance judgment processing is performed. If it is determined based on the determination result of the preliminary determination process that a flash effect will be performed at the time of winning, a scenario in which the speaker lamp 10a is made to emit light (a scenario in which the emitted light color is determined) is selected, and the selected scenario is The speaker lamp 10a is caused to emit light based on this. Note that the scenarios may include scenarios that do not change from the color emitted at the time of winning, or may be composed only of scenarios that do not change from the color emitted at the time of winning.
The emitting color of the speaker lamp 10a is, for example, red>green>blue in descending order of the expectation of a win.Similar to the above-mentioned pending look-ahead effect, the color of the light emitted by the speaker lamp 10a is determined by the expectation of a win for each symbol variation game. It is also possible to change to a higher color. It is also possible to output winning sounds corresponding to each color.

Furthermore, a specific example of another effect of the above-mentioned look-ahead effect is a "zone effect." The "zone effect" is a effect mainly using the image display device 26. For example, if a game ball enters the first starting port 21 when the judgment information (random value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third storage area", the judgment information (random value) is stored in the "fourth storage area". After storing the numerical value), advance judgment processing is performed. Then, if it is determined that a zone effect is to be performed based on the determination result of the preliminary determination process, for example, in the next symbol variation game, the image display device 26 will display a message saying, ``If the zone entry symbols are aligned, you will enter the ○○ zone! ”, etc., and then align the zone entry symbols to enter the “○○ zone”, and the judgment information (random value) stored in the “4th storage area” mentioned above will be “The said fluctuation Execute the ``○○ zone'' effect until the change is moved to the ``memory area''. While this "○○ zone" effect is being executed, a caption such as "○○ zone in progress" is displayed on the image display device 26. In the preliminary judgment process, the "zone effect" is more likely to be executed when it is determined to be a "win", and difficult to be executed when it is determined to be a "loss", so if it is executed, it will be a hit. It is possible to create high expectations for the game being awarded.

Further, a specific example of another performance of the above-mentioned look-ahead performance is a "chance consecutive notice". The "chance consecutive notice" is an effect mainly using the left decorative pattern image 26a, the middle decorative pattern image 26b, and the right decorative pattern image 26c displayed on the image display device 26. For example, if a game ball enters the first starting port 21 when the judgment information (random value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third storage area", the judgment information (random value) is stored in the "fourth storage area". After storing the numerical value), advance judgment processing is performed. Then, if it is determined based on the determination result of the preliminary determination process that a continuous chance effect is to be performed, for example, the symbol fluctuation game corresponding to the determination information (random value) stored in the "first storage area" The final display of the symbol variation game corresponds to the determined display and the determination information (random value) stored in the "second storage area" and the determination information (random value) stored in the "third storage area" The combination of decorative pattern images of the same color is stopped in the final display of the pattern variation game. For example, in the decorative pattern image, "333" and "777" are composed of red, "111" and "555" are composed of green, and "222" and "444" are composed of red. , "666" and "888" are composed of blue colors, and there are combinations of only red colors such as "337" and "773", combinations of only green colors such as "115" and "551", and combinations of only green colors such as "246" and "773". ” and “628” are displayed as confirmed over multiple variations, creating a sense of anticipation that a win will be awarded in the subsequent symbol variation game. In addition, in the case of a win, it is easier to select a combination with only red colors, and in the case of a loss, it is easier to select a combination with only blue colors, and the expectation of winning when a combination of only red colors is confirmed is displayed. The degree is increasing.

(Pseudo consecutive notice)
The pseudo-continuation notice is an effect that mainly uses the left decorative pattern image 26a, the middle decorative pattern image 26b, the right decorative pattern image 26c displayed on the image display device 26, and the pseudo-continuation exclusive design. In this game, the temporary stop display of decorative symbols is repeated to make it appear as if changes are being made multiple times. For example, as shown in FIG. 8, the pseudo-run can be executed 2, 3, or 4 times, and the higher the number of times, the higher the expectation of winning (in this embodiment, it is possible to execute 4 times). Guaranteed to win). As specific performance contents, for example, "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern image 26a, "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern image 26c, and "pseudo" is displayed as the middle decorative pattern image 26b. Temporarily stop and display all the decorative pattern images (for example, ``NEXT''), then display all the decorative pattern images in a variable manner (at this point, 2 pseudo-combinations), and again display ``5'' as the left decorative pattern image 26a. ” is temporarily stopped and displayed, “6” is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern image 26c, and a “Pseudo consecutive exclusive design (for example, “NEXT”)” is temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern image 26b. The effect is to display all the decorative pattern images in a variable manner again (at this point, 3 pseudo-sequences. After that, the same goes for 4 pseudo-sequences). For example, in the second temporary stop display, the left If "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the decorative pattern image 26a, and "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern image 26c, it will be a pseudo series twice, and in the second temporary stop display, the left decorative pattern image When "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed as 26a, and "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern image 26c, there will be three pseudo-runs (hereinafter, the same applies to four pseudo-runs). In addition, once reaching reach, a so-called "pseudo-run after reach," in which a "pseudo-run exclusive symbol (for example, "NEXT")" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the medium decorative pattern image 26b, or for example, the first temporary At the start of the fluctuation after the stop display, a notice is given (design stop notice) that a "pseudo consecutive symbol (for example, "NEXT")" will be temporarily stopped displayed on the medium decorative symbol image 26b, and at that point the pseudo It is also possible to perform a performance that is guaranteed to occur three times or more in a row.

(About the relationship between the winning sound, changing sound, and starting port light emitting device (color) for each icon)
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the relationship between the winning sound, change sound, and starting port light emitting device (color) for each icon. In the figure, the time of determination corresponds to the time of the above-mentioned "icon change effect determination process", and the time of update corresponds to the time of the above-mentioned "icon change effect update process". The winning sound and the changing sound are the same when the ball enters the first starting port 21 and when the ball enters the second starting port 22.

When displaying the default "normal icon", the speaker 10 outputs the sound "pilon♪" as the winning sound when the ball enters the starting hole.
Note that in the change scenario, for example, there is no change from a blue icon to a normal icon, so the column for update is marked with "-".
Further, when displaying the "normal icon", the light emitting color of the starting port light emitting device 21b is white.

When the "blue icon" is displayed, the sound "Poron♪" is output from the speaker 10 as the winning sound when the ball enters the starting hole.
Furthermore, when changing from a normal icon to a blue icon, a sound of "Poron♪" is output from the speaker 10 as a change sound at the time of updating.
Further, when displaying the "blue icon", the light emitting color of the starting port light emitting device 21b is blue.

When the "yellow icon" is displayed, a "keen♪" sound is output from the speaker 10 as a winning sound when the ball enters the starting hole.
Further, when changing from a normal icon to a yellow icon, or when changing from a blue icon to a yellow icon, the speaker 10 outputs a sound of "keen♪" as a change sound at the time of updating.
Further, when displaying the "yellow icon", the light emitting color of the starting port light emitting device 21b is yellow.

When the "green icon" is displayed, the sound "Kan♪" is output from the speaker 10 as the winning sound when the ball enters the starting hole.
Also, when the icon changes from a normal icon to a green icon, from a blue icon to a green icon, or from a yellow icon to a green icon, a "Kan♪" sound is played on the speaker as a change sound at the time of update. Output from 10.
Further, when displaying the "green icon", the light emitting color of the starting port light emitting device 21b is green.

When the "red icon" is displayed, the sound "Jakein♪" is output from the speaker 10 as the winning sound when the ball enters the starting hole.
Also, if the icon changes from a normal icon to a red icon, if it changes from a blue icon to a red icon, if it changes from a yellow icon to a red icon, or if it changes from a green icon to a red icon, the changes at the time of update. As the sound, the sound "Jakeen♪" is output from the speaker 10.
Further, when displaying the "red icon", the light emitting color of the starting port light emitting device 21b is red.

When displaying the "rainbow icon", the speaker 10 outputs the sound "Kuuuin♪" as the winning sound when the ball enters the starting hole.
In addition, when a normal icon changes to a rainbow icon, when a blue icon changes to a rainbow icon, when a yellow icon changes to a rainbow icon, when a green icon changes to a rainbow icon, When changing from a red icon to a rainbow icon, the speaker 10 outputs a sound of "Queen♪" as a change sound at the time of update.
Furthermore, when displaying the "rainbow icon", the light emitted by the starting port light emitting device 21b is rainbow colored.

Note that in this embodiment, the icons (the variable icon, the pending icon) are not displayed while the super reach is being executed, since the super reach effect is performed using substantially the entire display area.
In this way, even if the icon is hidden during the execution of Super Reach (for example, if the red icon is displayed, even if it is hidden), the starting port light emitting device 21b corresponds to the hidden icon. Since the icon emits light in a visible color (red), it is possible to recognize from the starting port light emitting device 21b what color the icon has changed to.

Furthermore, since the corresponding winning sound and changing sound are determined for each icon, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the icon has changed (what color it has changed to, etc.).

(Regarding the control processing performed by the image/sound CPU 204)
Next, the control processing performed by the image/sound CPU 204 will be explained using FIGS. 32 to 35. 32 to 34 show the image/sound control section main processing performed by the image/sound CPU 204, and FIG. 35 shows the image/sound control section main processing executed by interrupting the image/sound control section main processing periodically (every 33 ms). - Sound control unit timer interrupt processing.

(Step S400-1)
In step S400-1, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether a volume value/light amount value related subcommand has been received. That is, it is determined whether a volume value/light amount value related subcommand has been received from the production control unit 200a. Note that various subcommands are received in the image/sound control section timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. If a subcommand related to the volume value/light intensity value is received, the process moves to step S400-2, and if a subcommand related to the volume value/light intensity value is not received, the process moves to step S400-3. do.

(Step S400-2)
In step S400-2, the image/sound CPU 204 performs the volume value/light amount value related subcommand reception process shown in FIG. 33. Note that this process will be explained in detail later using FIG. 33. Then, when the volume value/light amount value related subcommand reception process is completed, the process moves to step S400-3.

(Step S400-3)
In step S400-3, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether a power-related subcommand has been received. If a power-related subcommand has been received, the process moves to step S400-4, and if a power-related subcommand has not been received, the process moves to step S400-5.

(Step S400-4)
In step S400-4, if the image/sound CPU 204 receives a power-related subcommand related to the power-on command, it performs image/sound setting processing related to power-on, and receives a power-related subcommand related to the power restoration command. If so, perform image/sound setting processing related to power restoration. Note that an example of the display and sound notification mode executed when the image/sound setting process related to power restoration is performed will be described in detail later using FIG. 40 and the like. When the image/sound setting process at power-on or power restoration is completed, the process moves to step S400-5.

(Step S400-5)
In step S400-5, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether a gaming state related subcommand has been received. If a gaming state related subcommand has been received, the process moves to step S400-6, and if a gaming state related subcommand has not been received, the process moves to step S400-8.

(Step S400-6)
In step S400-6, the image/sound CPU 204 updates, for example, a predetermined area (gaming status management area) of the RAM (not shown) to the gaming status corresponding to the received gaming status related subcommand. Specifically, if the received gaming state-related subcommand indicates a normal gaming state, the value in a predetermined area of the RAM is set to "0", and the received gaming state-related subcommand indicates a time-saving gaming state. If so, the value in the predetermined area of the RAM is set to "1", and if the received gaming state related sub-command indicates a variable gaming state, the value in the predetermined area of the RAM is set to "2". After updating the gaming state, the process moves to step S400-7.

(Step S400-7)
In step S400-7, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound setting processing corresponding to the updated gaming state. For example, if the normal gaming state is updated in step S400-6, the display and sound (BGM, etc.) corresponding to the normal gaming state will be output in the process of step S400-7. When the image/sound setting process corresponding to the updated gaming state is completed, the process moves to step S400-8.

(Step S400-8)
In step S400-8, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether a starting port-related subcommand has been received. If the starting port related subcommand is received, the process moves to step S400-9, and if the starting port related subcommand is not received, the process moves to step S400-10.

(Step S400-9)
In step S400-9, the image/sound CPU 204 performs the process shown in FIG. 34 upon reception of the starting port-related subcommand. Note that this process will be explained in detail later using FIG. 34. Then, when the starting port-related subcommand reception process is completed, the process moves to step S400-10.

(Step S400-10)
In step S400-10, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether a gate pass subcommand has been received. If the gate passing subcommand is received, the process moves to step S400-11, and if the gate passing subcommand is not received, the process moves to step S400-13.

(Step S400-11)
In step S400-11, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state. Specifically, it is determined whether the value is "0" with reference to the value in the predetermined area of the RAM described in step S400-6. If the value is "0", the process moves to step S400-12, and if the value is not "0", the process moves to step S400-13.

(Step S400-12)
In step S400-12, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound setting processing corresponding to left-handed hitting. That is, even though the game is in the normal gaming state, it is determined that the player is playing right-handed, and a setting process is performed to notify the user to play left-handed. Note that an example of the display and sound notification mode executed by performing the image/sound setting process corresponding to left-handed hitting will be described in detail later using FIG. 39 and the like. When the image/sound setting process corresponding to left-handed hitting is completed, the process moves to step S400-13.

(Step S400-13)
In step S400-13, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether an error-related subcommand has been received. If an error-related subcommand has been received, the process moves to step S400-14, and if an error-related subcommand has not been received, the process moves to step S400-15.

(Step S400-14)
In step S400-14, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound setting processing corresponding to the error content. Note that an example of the display and sound notification mode executed when the image/sound setting process corresponding to the error content is performed will be described in detail later using FIG. 51 and the like. When the image/sound setting process corresponding to the error content is completed, the process moves to step S400-15.

(Step S400-15)
In step S400-15, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound setting processing corresponding to other subcommands. When the image/sound setting process corresponding to the other subcommands is completed, the process moves to step S400-16.

(Step S400-16)
In step S400-16, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether the frame switching flag is ON in a flag management area (not shown) provided in the image/sound control unit 200b. The frame switching flag is turned ON in the image/sound control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 35, so it is turned ON every 33 ms. That is, on the image display device 26, one frame of image is displayed every 33 ms. Note that a dedicated RAM may be provided as the management area for managing the frame switching flag, or the VRAM 207 may be used. If the frame switching flag is ON, the process moves to step S400-17, and if the frame switching flag is not ON, the process moves to step S400-1.

(Step S400-17)
In step S400-17, the image/sound CPU 204 performs processing to turn off the frame switching flag. Then, when the frame switching flag is turned OFF, the process moves to step S400-18.

(Step S400-18)
In step S400-18, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image generation processing. Specifically, image information per frame is generated based on the contents set in each image/sound setting process. As a result, an image in one frame is generated. Note that the concept of image generation will be discussed later in FIG. 38. When the image generation process is completed, the process moves to step S400-19.

(Step S400-19)
In step S400-19, the image/sound CPU 204 performs sound generation processing. Specifically, sound information per frame is generated based on the contents set in each image/sound setting process. This results in the generation of sound in one frame. When the sound generation process is finished, the process moves to step S400-20.

(Step S400-20)
In step S400-20, the image/sound CPU 204 performs a process of outputting the generated image and sound in one frame. As a result, the image in one generated frame is displayed on the image display device 26, and the sound in one generated frame is output from the speaker 10. When the output process is finished, the process moves to step S400-1.

(About processing when receiving subcommands related to volume value and light intensity value)
FIG. 33 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S400-2 of the image/sound control section main processing) showing the process performed by the image/sound CPU 204 when receiving a subcommand related to the volume value/light amount value.

(Step S400-2-1)
In step S400-2-1, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether a level gauge image is being displayed. As described above, the level gauge image is an image that indicates the degree of adjustment of the amount of light and sound volume, and will be referred to later in FIG. 42 and the like. If the level gauge image is being displayed, the process moves to step S400-2-2, and if the level gauge image is not being displayed, the process moves to step S400-2-4.

Note that the level gauge image indicating the degree of adjustment of the light amount and the level gauge image indicating the degree of adjustment of the volume are started to be displayed by performing the process of step S400-2-4, which will be described later. Thereafter, the display continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) even if no adjustment operations are made to adjust the amount of light or volume. On the other hand, when the light amount or volume is adjusted, the process of step S400-2-3, which will be described later, is performed to switch to a level gauge image corresponding to the degree of adjustment (see FIG. 42).

(Step S400-2-2)
In step S400-2-2, the image/sound CPU 204 performs update processing according to the content of the received volume value/light amount value related subcommand. For example, if a light intensity value change (increase) subcommand is received, the light intensity value is increased by one step, and if a light intensity value change (decrease) subcommand is received, the light intensity value is decreased by one step, and the updated value is is stored in a predetermined area (area for managing volume values and light intensity values) of a RAM (not shown). Also, if a volume value change (increase) subcommand is received, the volume value is increased by one level, and if a volume value change (decrease) subcommand is received, the volume value is decreased by one level, and the updated value is is stored in a predetermined area (area for managing volume values and light intensity values) of a RAM (not shown). When the update process is finished, the process moves to step S400-2-3.

(Step S400-2-3)
In step S400-2-3, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound setting processing corresponding to the updated values. For example, if the current volume value is 3 and a volume value change (decrease) subcommand is received, a level gauge image corresponding to volume value 2 and an adjustment sound corresponding to volume value 2 are set (see Figure 42). ). When the image/sound setting process corresponding to the updated value is completed, the process moves to step S400-3 of the image/sound control section main process.

(Step S400-2-4)
In step S400-2-4, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound setting processing corresponding to the current value. For example, if the current volume value is 3, a level gauge image corresponding to the volume value 3 and an adjustment sound corresponding to the volume value 3 are set. When the image/sound setting process corresponding to the updated value is completed, the process moves to step S400-3 of the image/sound control section main process.

In the above process of FIG. 33, if the level gauge image is not displayed even if a volume value/light value related subcommand is received, the current value is first updated in the process of step S400-2-4. Display the corresponding level gauge image (for example, this corresponds to the first operation).
On the other hand, if the level gauge image is displayed, the value is updated in step S400-2-2, and the level gauge image corresponding to the updated value is displayed in step S400-2-3 (for example, from the first operation This corresponds to the second consecutive operation).
That is, the first operation displays a level gauge image corresponding to the current value, and the second consecutive operation allows the values (light amount value, volume value) to be changed.
With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the light quantity value and the volume value from being changed against one's will due to the player accidentally touching the cross key button 16 during the game.
Note that, of course, the light amount value and the volume value may be changed in the first operation.

(About processing when receiving starting port-related subcommands)
FIG. 34 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S400-9 of the image/sound control section main processing) showing the process performed by the image/sound CPU 204 upon reception of the starting port-related subcommand.

(Step S400-9-1)
In step S400-9-1, the image/sound CPU 204 performs processing to update a pending number counter (not shown) provided in the image/sound control unit 200b. That is, the image/sound control section 200b can also recognize the storage status of the determination information storage area (reservation storage area) of the main RAM 103 based on the starting gate related subcommands transmitted from the production control section 200a. That is, in the pending number counter provided in the image/sound control unit 200b, "0" indicates that only the variable storage area is stored, "1" indicates that up to the first storage area is stored, and "1" is stored up to the second storage area. It is possible to recognize "2" that is stored up to the third storage area, "3" that is stored up to the third storage area, and "4" that is stored up to the fourth storage area. Note that the pending number counter may be provided with a dedicated RAM or may use the VRAM 207. After updating the pending number counter, the process moves to step S400-9-2.

(Step S400-9-2)
In step S400-9-2, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound (winning sound) setting processing corresponding to the updated pending number counter value. For example, if the holding number counter value of the first starting opening 21 is 3 and a starting opening related sub-command (without pending pre-reading effect) related to the first starting opening winning command is received, in the process, the processing described in FIG. Set so that the normal icon is displayed, and set so that the winning sound "Piron♪" is output. When the image/sound setting process corresponding to the updated pending number counter value is completed, the process moves to step S400-9-3.

(Step S400-9-3)
In step S400-9-3, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether the gaming state is not the normal gaming state and whether a starting opening related subcommand related to the first starting opening winning command has been received. Specifically, the image/sound CPU 204 refers to the predetermined area (gaming state management area) of the RAM (not shown) described in step S400-6, and determines whether a value other than "0" is stored. . If a value other than "0" is stored, it is further determined whether a starting opening related sub-command related to the first starting opening winning command has been received. If both conditions are satisfied, the process moves to step S400-9-4, and if none of the conditions are satisfied, the process moves to step S400-10 of the image/sound control unit main process.

(Step S400-9-4)
In step S400-9-4, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound setting processing corresponding to right-handed hitting. In other words, it is determined that left-handed batting is being performed despite the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state, and a setting process is performed to issue a notification to encourage left-handed batting. Note that an example of the display and sound notification mode executed by performing the image/sound setting process corresponding to right-handed hitting will be described in detail later using FIG. 41 and the like. When the image/sound setting process corresponding to right-handed hitting is completed, the process moves to step S400-10 of the image/sound control section main process.

(About image/sound control unit timer interrupt processing)
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the image/sound control section timer interrupt processing performed in the image/sound CPU 204. This process is executed by interrupting the image/sound control unit main process described above periodically (for example, every 33 ms).

(Step S500)
In step S500, the image/sound CPU 204 performs processing to receive various subcommands. That is, a process of receiving various subcommands from the production control unit 200a is performed. Then, upon receiving various subcommands, the process moves to step S501.

(Step S501)
In step S501, the image/sound CPU 204 performs processing to update a frame counter and the like. After updating the frame counter and the like, the process moves to step S502.

(Step S502)
In step S502, the image/sound CPU 204 turns on the frame switching flag. Then, when the frame switching flag is turned ON, the image/sound control unit timer interrupt processing is ended.

(About the control process performed by the light emission drive CPU 208)
Next, the control processing performed by the light emission drive CPU 208 will be explained using FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36 shows the light emission drive control unit main processing performed by the light emission drive CPU 208, and FIG. 37 shows the light emission drive control unit timer interrupt which is executed by periodically interrupting the light emission drive control unit main processing (every 33 ms). It is processing.

(Step S600-1)
In step S600-1, the light emission drive CPU 208 determines whether various subcommands have been received. That is, it is determined whether any subcommand has been received from the production control section 200a. Note that various subcommands are received in the light emission drive control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. If various subcommands have been received, the process moves to step S600-2, and if various subcommands have not been received, the process moves to step S600-5.

(Step S600-2)
In step S600-2, the light emission drive CPU 208 performs light emission/drive setting processing. Specifically, a light emission pattern of the light emitting device 9 and the like and a drive pattern of the movable body 28 are set corresponding to the received subcommand. Note that when the light emission pattern of the light emitting device 9 etc. corresponding to the subcommand is set, the light emission is controlled according to the light emission pattern set in step S600-7 described later, and when the drive pattern of the movable body 28 corresponding to the subcommand is set. , the drive is controlled according to a drive pattern set in step S600-8, which will be described later. When the light emission/drive setting process is finished, the process moves to step S600-3.

(Step S600-3)
In step S600-3, the light emission drive CPU 208 determines whether a starting port related subcommand has been received. If the starting port related subcommand is received, the process moves to step S600-4, and if the starting port related subcommand is not received, the process moves to step S600-5.

(Step S600-4)
In step S600-4, the light emission drive CPU 208 performs processing to update a pending number counter (not shown) provided in the light emission drive control section 200c. That is, the light emission drive control section 200c can also recognize the storage status of the determination information storage area (reservation storage area) of the main RAM 103 by the starting opening related subcommand transmitted from the production control section 200a. That is, in the pending number counter provided in the light emission drive control unit 200c, "0" indicates that only the variable storage area is stored, "1" indicates that up to the first storage area is stored, and "1" is stored up to the second storage area. It is possible to recognize "2" that is stored up to the third storage area, "3" that is stored up to the third storage area, and "4" that is stored up to the fourth storage area. Note that the reserved number counter may be provided with a dedicated RAM or may use the light emission drive RAM 210. After updating the pending number counter, the process moves to step S600-5.

(Step S600-5)
In step S600-5, the light emission drive CPU 208 determines whether the frame switching flag is ON in a flag management area (not shown) provided in the light emission drive control section 200c. The frame switching flag is turned ON in the light emission drive control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 37, so it is turned ON every 33 ms. As a result, for example, the display on the sub-hold display will be updated every 33 ms. Note that a dedicated RAM may be provided as the management area for managing the frame switching flag, or the light emission drive RAM 210 may be used. If the frame switching flag is ON, the process moves to step S600-6, and if the frame switching flag is not ON, the process moves to step S600-1.

(Step S600-6)
In step S600-6, the light emission drive CPU 208 performs processing to turn off the frame switching flag. Then, when the frame switching flag is turned OFF, the process moves to step S600-7.

(Step S600-7)
In step S600-7, the light emission drive CPU 208 performs light emission control processing. Specifically, the light emitting device 9 and the like are caused to emit light based on the light emitting pattern set in step S600-2. When the light emission control process ends, the process moves to step S600-8.

(Step S600-8)
In step S600-8, the light emission drive CPU 208 performs drive control processing. Specifically, if the drive pattern for the movable body 28 is set in step S600-2, the drive control for the movable body 28 is performed. When the drive control process is finished, the process moves to step S600-1.

(About light emission drive control unit timer interrupt processing)
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the light emission drive control unit timer interrupt processing performed in the light emission drive CPU 208. This process is executed by interrupting the above-mentioned light emission drive control section main process periodically (for example, every 33 ms).

(Step S700)
In step S700, the light emission drive CPU 208 performs processing to receive various subcommands. That is, a process of receiving various subcommands from the production control unit 200a is performed. Then, upon receiving various subcommands, the process moves to step S701.

(Step S701)
In step S701, the light emission drive CPU 208 performs processing to update a frame counter and the like. After updating the frame counter and the like, the process moves to step S702.

(Step S702)
In step S702, the light emission drive CPU 208 turns on the frame switching flag. Then, when the frame switching flag is turned ON, the light emission drive control unit timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 38 is a conceptual diagram supplementing the image generation process of step S400-18 in FIG. 32.
In image generation processing, a plurality of layers are combined to generate one display frame.
Note that the layers shown in FIG. 38 are only an example, and the number of layers, display contents, etc. are not limited thereto.

Layer 1 is a layer at the forefront of the screen, and is a layer for displaying (drawing) information regarding power supply and information regarding errors.
Information regarding the power source and information regarding errors are displayed, for example, by displaying the entire display area in black, and then displaying in white text, ``Recovering screen display'', or ``Radio wave error'' in white text.
Therefore, since the entire display area is displayed in black, when information related to power supply or information related to errors is displayed in the layer concerned, the display of layers (layers 2 to 7) located further back on the screen than the layer concerned is The content becomes invisible (even if some display is displayed on each layer).
On the other hand, if information regarding power supply or information regarding errors is not displayed in the layer concerned, the display contents of layers (layers 2 to 7) located further back on the screen than the layer concerned become visible.
Note that in the image generation process, for example, layers 1 to 7 are combined to generate one display frame, regardless of whether information related to power supply or information related to errors is displayed in layer 1.
For example, the VRAM 207 is provided with drawing areas (drawing area 1 - drawing area 7) corresponding to layers 1 - 7, respectively, and the drawing areas (drawing area 1 - drawing area 7) are provided with drawing areas (drawing area 1 - drawing area 7) that correspond to layers 1 - 7, respectively. 7 is now stored. Then, one display frame is generated by combining the stored layers 1 to 7.

Note that the information regarding errors displayed on layer 1 corresponds to severe errors among errors, such as magnetic errors detected by the above-mentioned magnetic sensor 27h and radio wave errors detected by the radio wave sensor 27i.
On the other hand, for minor errors, for example, they are displayed in a layer located further back on the screen than Layer 1, and even if information regarding minor errors is displayed, a layer located further back on the screen than that layer is displayed. The displayed content becomes visible. In other words, information regarding minor errors and other information are allowed to be displayed at the same time.
A minor error is, for example, a "ball removal error (notification to remove the ball)" that is notified when a game ball remains in the lower tray 5b and the game ball is not ejected from the lower tray 5b. ” etc.
In this way, for severe errors, the display contents of other layers are made invisible, and for minor errors, the display contents of other layers are made visible, allowing the administrator to quickly grasp the severity of the error. be able to.

Layer 2 is a layer located further back on the screen than Layer 1, and is a layer for displaying (drawing) information regarding reservation.
As shown in FIG. 38, the information regarding reservation includes the number reservation displayed in the first starting gate pending number image 26e, the second starting gate pending number image 26f, and the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 26o. , 1st starting port 1st held ball image display area 26g to 1st starting port 4th held ball image display area 26j, 2nd starting port 1st held ball image display area 26k to 2nd starting port 4th held ball image display For example, there is a hold icon displayed in the area 26n.
Note that even if information regarding the hold is displayed (drawn) on layer 2, the display contents of layers (layers 3 to 7) located further back on the screen than the layer 2 are visible.

Note that in the case of the above-mentioned "waiting for customer", the variable icon and pending icon are not displayed (drawn) on layer 2.
On the other hand, even when "waiting for customers", the information that the number pending displayed in the first starting gate pending number image 26e and the second starting gate pending number image 26f is "0" is displayed (drawn) on layer 2. It has become so. This makes it possible to understand that the executable symbol variation game is "0".

Further, when the above-mentioned "demonstration performance is in progress", none of the variable icon, pending icon, and number pending are displayed (drawn) on layer 2. This makes it possible to draw attention to the model name and manufacturer name displayed during the demonstration performance.
Note that "Demonstration in progress" may also be displayed in the same manner as "Waiting for customer".

Layer 3 is a layer located further back on the screen than layer 2, and is a layer for displaying (drawing) information regarding production settings.
As shown in FIG. 38, the information regarding the effect settings includes a speaker icon image 26p showing the speaker icon, a level gauge image showing the degree of volume adjustment (in the example of FIG. 38, the volume value level 3 is shown), and a speaker icon image 26p showing the speaker icon. , a lamp icon image showing a lamp icon, and a level gauge image showing the degree of adjustment of the light amount (all not shown).
Note that if the volume and light intensity are not adjusted, layer 3 will be combined with other layers without being displayed.
Further, even if information regarding the effect settings is displayed (drawn) on layer 3, the display contents of layers (layers 4 to 7) located further back on the screen than the layer 3 are visible.

Layer 4 is a layer located further back on the screen than layer 3, and is a layer for displaying (drawing) information regarding a preview performance (the above-mentioned jackpot preview performance).
As shown in FIG. 38, the information regarding the preview effect includes, for example, a lightning image 26q imitating a lightning bolt (a notice that appears when the super reach develops) and images corresponding to other preview effects.
Note that if no preview effect is performed, layer 4 will be combined with other layers without being displayed.
Furthermore, even if information regarding the preview performance is displayed (drawn) on layer 4, the display contents of layers (layers 5 to 7) located further back on the screen than the layer concerned are visible.

Layer 5 is a layer located further back on the screen than layer 4, and is a layer for displaying (drawing) information regarding symbols.
As shown in FIG. 38, the information regarding the symbols includes a left decorative symbol image 26a, a middle decorative symbol image 26b, a right decorative symbol image 26c, and a fourth symbol image 26d.
Note that even if information regarding the pattern is displayed (drawn) on layer 5, the display contents of layers (layers 6 to 7) located further back on the screen than the layer 5 are visible.

Layer 6 is a layer located further back on the screen than layer 5, and is a layer for displaying (drawing) information regarding the state.
As shown in FIG. 38, the information regarding the state includes a left-handed hitting image 26r that encourages left-handed hitting, and a right-handed hitting image 26s that urges right-handed hitting.
The scene where the right-handed game image 26s is displayed is during the time-saving game state and during the probability-variable game state.
The left-handed hitting image 26r is displayed when the time-saving game state shifts to the normal gaming state, or when the player plays right-handed in the normal gaming state and causes the game ball to pass through the gate member 20.
Note that when left-handed hitting is performed in the normal gaming state, layer 6 will be combined with other layers without being displayed.
Furthermore, even if information regarding the state is displayed (drawn) on layer 6, the display content of a layer (layer 7) located further back on the screen than the layer is visible.

Layer 7 is a layer located further back on the screen than layer 6, and is a layer for displaying (drawing) information regarding the background.
As shown in FIG. 38, the information regarding the background includes, for example, a background image showing a normal gaming state, a background image showing a time-saving gaming state (not shown), a background image showing a variable probability gaming state (not shown), and a winning state (not shown). An example of this is a background image that shows .
In the image generation process, the above-mentioned layers 1 to 7 are combined to form one frame, and the display screens shown in FIG. 39 and subsequent figures are displayed.

(Diagram explaining the first example of notification mode)
Next, a first example of the notification mode will be described using FIG. 39.

FIG. 39 assumes a case where a game ball passes through the gate member 20 during execution of a symbol variation game in a normal gaming state (that is, a right-handed ball is hit in a normal gaming state).
Specifically, upon receiving the gate pass subcommand at timing T1, the image/sound CPU 204 draws left-handed hitting information (left-handed hitting image 26r) in layer 6. Further, a voice prompting the player to hit left-handed is outputted from the speaker 10.
As a result, the speaker 10 outputs a voice saying "Please hit left-handed," and the image display device 26 displays left-handed hitting information (left-handed hitting image 26r).
Note that in FIG. 39, layers 1 to 7 are always combined and displayed before timing T1 and after timing T1.
In this way, when a right-handed hit is made in the normal gaming state, a notification is given to encourage the left-handed hit.

(Diagram explaining the second example of notification mode)
Next, a second example of the notification mode will be described using FIG. 40.

FIG. 40 shows a case where a game ball passes through the gate member 20 during power restoration in the normal gaming state (when a power restoration command is received) (that is, a right hit is performed during power restoration in the normal gaming state). ) is assumed.
Specifically, until timing T1, the power is turned off and the image display device 26 is also turned off (not displayed) as indicated by diagonal lines.
Then, when the power is turned on at timing T1, the main CPU 101 starts a return process, and the image display device 26 displays "Screen display returning".
At this time, in layer 1, the screen display recovery information is drawn, and in layer 6, it is not drawn.
Then, layers 1 to 7 are combined, and the above-mentioned "screen display returning" is displayed.

Then, at timing T2, the image/sound CPU 204 receives the gate passage subcommand. In this case, as described with reference to FIG. 38, left-handed hitting information (left-handed hitting image 26r) is drawn in layer 6, and a sound urging left-handed hitting is output from the speaker 10. However, since the screen display recovery information is still being drawn in layer 1, although left-handed information (left-handed image 26r) is drawn, when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, layer 1 is Due to the display contents, it is not visible, and the speaker 10 only makes an audio notification saying "Please hit left."

Then, at timing T3, when the return condition is satisfied, the screen display during return is ended, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the sub-symbols etc. are displayed in a visible manner. The establishment of the return condition here may mean that a predetermined time has elapsed, or it may be the case that a predetermined command (for example, a symbol stop command, a demo command, etc.) is received.
Further, when the image display device 26 returns to normal operation, left-handed hitting information (left-handed hitting image 26r) is displayed in a visible manner.
At this time, layer 1 is undrawn and nothing is displayed (drawn), so that when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, the display contents of layer 2 and subsequent layers are visible. Therefore, left-handed hitting information (left-handed hitting image 26r) can be visually recognized.

In this way, when a game ball passes through the gate member 20 while the power is being restored in the normal gaming state, the image display device 26 only displays the screen while it is being restored, and only the speaker 10 provides a notification to prompt left-handed batting. I decided to do it with
As a result, for example, the administrator can visually check the image display device 26 to understand that the screen display is being restored when the power is restored, and the player can hear a notification from the speaker 10 urging him to play left-handed. This allows the player to understand the game to be played (left-handed hitting) even if the left-handed hitting information (left-handed hitting image 26r) is not displayed.
Furthermore, as shown at timing T2, even if the screen display is being restored and the left-handed hitting information (left-handed hitting image 26r) is not visible, the left-handed hitting information (left-handed hitting image 26r) is drawn in layer 6. I did it like that. Then, layers 1 to 7 are combined and displayed.
As a result, regardless of whether the power is restored or not, processing such as combining and displaying layers 1 to 7 can be uniformly performed. For example, it is possible to eliminate the need for specific processing during power restoration, such as not drawing left-handed information (left-handed image 26r) in layer 6 because the power is being restored even though a gate passing subcommand has been received. , when a gate pass subcommand is received, left-handed hitting information (left-handed hitting image 26r) can be drawn in layer 6.

Note that the volume value of "please hit left" output from the speaker 10 at timing T2 may or may not depend on the currently set volume value.
If it does not depend on the currently set volume value, output may be made at the maximum volume value.
When depending on the currently set volume value, the player can listen to a notification urging him to play left-handed at the desired volume value, allowing him to play the game comfortably.
For example, when outputting at the maximum volume value without depending on the currently set volume value, the player is assured that the player will play left-handed even if left-handed hitting information (left-handed hitting image 26r) is not displayed. can be recognized.

In addition, in FIG. 40, at timing T2, it is assumed that only audio is notified by the speaker 10, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light emitting device 9 may also be used to suggest left-handed hitting. Specifically, at timing T2, the light emitting device 9 may be flashed at high speed to suggest that the ball will be hit to the left, or only the left side of the light emitting device 9 may be made to emit light to suggest that the ball will be hit to the left. Good too.

Note that although FIG. 40 has been described using an example of when power is restored (when a power restoration command is received), the same thing can be applied when power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

In addition, in FIG. 40, the description is made on the assumption that a right-handed game is performed during the power restoration in the normal gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, on the right side of the gaming area 7 and above the gate member 20 An event in which a game ball is stuck (for example, a game ball is stuck between a center accessory and a game nail) occurs, and the power supply is accidentally restored during normal gaming mode. An irregular case may be assumed in which the game ball stops stopping and passes through the gate member 20.

Note that in this embodiment, the right-handed hitting indicator 29c is provided, but the left-handed hitting indicator is not provided, so in the case of FIG. 40 (timing T2), the player is visually in a state of left-handed hitting. There is no way to confirm this.
Therefore, the above-mentioned left-handed hitting indicator may be provided and the left-handed hitting indicator may be turned on at timing T2.
As a result, even if the left-handed hitting information (left-handed hitting image 26r) is not visible on the image display device 26, it is possible to visually confirm that the player is in a state where left-handed hitting is performed using a separate left-handed hitting display.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 40, if the game ball hits the normal symbol in the normal symbol hit determination process performed by passing the game ball through the gate member 20 and the game ball enters the second starting port 22, the icon ( The symbol variation game is executed by entering the game ball into the second starting port 22 without displaying the variation icon (the variation icon, the hold icon). As a result, the symbol variation game is executed even though the icon is not displayed, which can give the player a sense of discomfort and indirectly indicate that the player is not playing the optimal game. can be suggested.
Further, in the example of FIG. 40, the normal symbol hit determination process is performed by passing the game ball to the gate member 20, but the invention is not limited to this, and the normal symbol hit determination process itself may not be performed. Alternatively, a normal symbol hit determination process may be performed, but a normal symbol loss may be determined at "256/256".

(A diagram explaining the second example (another example) of the notification mode)
Next, a second example (another example) of the notification mode will be described using FIG. 41. In addition, in FIG. 41, explanation of the parts common to FIG. 40 will be omitted, and the different parts will be mainly explained.

FIG. 41 shows another example of FIG. 40. In other words, FIG. 41 shows a case where a starting port related subcommand (particularly a subcommand indicating that a game ball has entered the first starting port 21) is received during power restoration in a time saving gaming state (a variable probability gaming state is also possible). (In other words, the case where left-handed hitting is performed in the time-saving gaming state) is assumed.
Specifically, until timing T1, the power is OFF, the image display device 26 is also OFF (non-display) as shown by diagonal lines, and the right-handed lamp (right-handed indicator 29c) The light is also off as indicated by the diagonal line.
Then, when the power is turned on at timing T1, the main CPU 101 starts a return process, and the image display device 26 displays "Returning to screen display" and the right-hand hit lamp (right-hand hit indicator 29c) lights up.
At this time, in layer 1, the screen display recovery information is drawn, and in layer 6, it is not drawn.
Then, layers 1 to 7 are combined, and the above-mentioned "screen display returning" is displayed.

Then, at timing T2, the image/sound CPU 204 receives the starting port-related subcommand. In this case, right-handed hitting information (right-handed hitting image 26s) is drawn in layer 6, and the speaker 10 outputs a sound urging the player to hit right. However, since the screen display recovery information is still being drawn in layer 1, although right-handed information (right-handed image 26s) is drawn, when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, layer 1 is Depending on the display content, it is not visible, and the speaker 10 outputs a voice saying "Please hit right" and a right-handed hitting lamp (right-handed hitting indicator 29c) is turned on to notify the player.

Then, at timing T3, when the return condition is satisfied, the display during screen display return is ended, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which sub-symbols etc. are displayed in a visible manner. The establishment of the return condition here may mean that a predetermined time has elapsed, or it may be the case that a predetermined command (for example, a symbol stop command, a demo command, etc.) is received.
Further, when the image display device 26 returns to normal operation, the right-handed hitting information (the right-handed hitting image 26s) is visibly displayed.
At this time, layer 1 is undrawn and nothing is displayed (drawn), so that when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, the display contents of layer 2 and subsequent layers are visible. Therefore, right-handed hitting information (right-handed hitting image 26s) can be visually recognized.
In this way, when a starting port related sub-command (especially a sub-command indicating that a game ball has entered the first starting port 21) is received while the power is restored while the gaming state is in the time-saving gaming state (or fixed-variable gaming state). However, the same effect as that described with reference to FIG. 40 can be obtained.

In addition, while the power is restored, the movable body 28 performs the initial operation as described above, making it difficult to see the display contents of the image display device 26, but the right-handed lamp (right-handed indicator 29c) does not perform the initial operation. Since it is not affected by this, it is possible to understand the game to be played (playing left-handed) by checking the right-handed hitting lamp (right-handed hitting indicator 29c).

Note that the volume value of "Please hit right" output from the speaker 10 at timing T2 may or may not depend on the currently set volume value.
If it does not depend on the currently set volume value, output may be made at the maximum volume value.
When depending on the currently set volume value, the player can listen to a notification urging him to play right at the desired volume value, allowing him to play the game comfortably.
For example, if you want to output at the maximum volume value without depending on the currently set volume value, you can ensure that the player will play right-handed even if right-handed hitting information (right-handed hitting image 26s) is not displayed. can be recognized.

In addition, in FIG. 41, at timing T2, it is assumed that only audio is notified by the speaker 10, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light emitting device 9 may also be used to suggest right-handed batting. Specifically, at timing T2, the light-emitting device 9 may blink at high speed to suggest that the ball will be hit to the right, or only the right side of the light-emitting device 9 may be made to emit light to suggest that the ball will be hit to the right. Good too.

Note that although FIG. 41 has been described using an example of when the power is restored (when a power restoration command is received), the same thing can be applied when the power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

In addition, in FIG. 41, the case is described assuming that a left-handed game is performed during the power restoration in the time-saving gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. An event in which a game ball is stuck above (for example, a game ball stuck between a center accessory and a game nail) occurs, and the power is accidentally restored in a time-saving gaming state. An irregular case may be assumed in which the game ball stops staying inside and passes through the first starting port 21.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 41, when the game ball enters the first starting port 21, the game ball enters the first starting port 21 without displaying the icon (the fluctuation icon, the hold icon). Execute a symbol variation game depending on the situation. As a result, the symbol variation game is executed even though the icon is not displayed, which can give the player a sense of discomfort and indirectly indicate that the player is not playing the optimal game. can be suggested.
Further, in the example of FIG. 41, the special symbol hit determination process is performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 21, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol hit determination process itself is not performed. Alternatively, a special symbol hit determination process may be performed, but a loss may be determined by "319/319".

(Diagram explaining the third example of notification mode)
Next, a third example of the notification mode will be described using FIG. 42.

FIG. 42 assumes that the player adjusts the volume while waiting for a customer in the normal gaming state.
Specifically, when the image/sound CPU 204 receives a volume value/light value related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 42, a subcommand related to the volume value) at timing T1, the image/sound CPU 204 displays the speaker icon image 26p and the speaker icon image 26p in layer 3. Volume value information (level gauge image corresponding to volume value 3) corresponding to the current volume value is drawn.
Further, the speaker 10 outputs "mi♪" which is an adjustment sound corresponding to the volume value 3.
Note that in FIG. 42, the volume value up to timing T1 is 3, and the operation at timing T1 indicates the initial operation of the cross key button 16. In other words, the volume value remains 3 even after timing T1.

Then, at timing T2, when a volume value/light value related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 42, a volume value change (decrease) subcommand) is received, the speaker icon image 26p and the current volume value are displayed in layer 3. The volume value information (level gauge image corresponding to volume value 2) is drawn.
Further, the speaker 10 outputs "Re♪" which is an adjustment sound corresponding to the volume value 2.
Note that since timing T2 is the second operation of the cross key button 16 following the initial operation at timing T1, the volume value becomes 2, and the volume value is decreased by one level.
This is the case when the player adjusts the volume while waiting for a customer in the normal gaming state.

(Diagram explaining the fourth example of notification mode)
Next, a fourth example of the notification mode will be described using FIG. 43.

FIG. 43 assumes that the player adjusts the volume (or adjusts the amount of light) while the power is being restored (when a power restoration command is received).
Specifically, until timing T1, the power is turned off and the image display device 26 is also turned off (not displayed) as indicated by diagonal lines. Note that the volume value at this time is 3.
Then, when the power is turned on at timing T1, the main CPU 101 starts a return process, and the image display device 26 displays "Screen display returning".
At this time, in layer 1, the screen display recovery information is drawn, and in layer 3, it is not drawn.
Then, layers 1 to 7 are combined, and the above-mentioned "screen display returning" is displayed.

Then, at timing T2, the image/sound CPU 204 receives a volume value/light amount value related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 43, a subcommand related to the volume value). In this case, in layer 3, a speaker icon image 26p and volume value information corresponding to the current volume value (level gauge image corresponding to volume value 3) are drawn.
Further, the speaker 10 outputs "Mi♪" which is an adjustment sound corresponding to the volume value 3.
However, since the screen display recovery information is still being drawn in layer 1, although the volume value information (level gauge image corresponding to volume value 3) is drawn, the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26. Sometimes, it is not visible due to the display contents of layer 1, and only the adjustment sound "mi♪" is announced by the speaker 10.
Note that in FIG. 43, the volume value up to timing T1 is 3, and the operation at timing T1 indicates the initial operation of the cross key button 16. In other words, the volume value remains 3 even after timing T1.

Then, at timing T3, when a volume value/light value related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 43, a volume value change (decrease) subcommand) is received, the speaker icon image 26p and the current volume value are displayed in layer 3. The volume value information (level gauge image corresponding to volume value 2) is drawn.
Further, the speaker 10 outputs "Re♪" which is an adjustment sound corresponding to the volume value 2.
However, since the screen display recovery information is still being drawn in layer 1, although the volume value information (level gauge image corresponding to volume value 2) is drawn, the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26. Sometimes, it is not visible due to the display contents of layer 1, and only the adjustment sound "re♪" is announced by the speaker 10.
Note that since timing T3 is the second operation of the cross key button 16 following the initial operation at timing T1, the volume value is changed to a volume value of 2, and the volume value is decreased by one level. That is, although the level gauge image corresponding to the volume value 2 is not visible, the process of changing the volume value from the volume value 3 to the volume value 2 is being performed. This can prevent the player from having to operate the cross key button 16 again after the return condition is satisfied.

Then, at timing T4, when the return condition is satisfied, the screen display during return is ended, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the sub-symbols etc. are displayed in a visible manner. The establishment of the return condition here may mean that a predetermined time has elapsed, or it may be the case that a predetermined command (for example, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a demo command, etc.) is received.
Further, when the image display device 26 returns to normal operation, the volume value information (the level gauge image corresponding to the volume value 2) is visibly displayed. Note that since the adjustment sound "R♪" from the speaker 10 is a single sound, it is not output at timing T4.
At this time, layer 1 is undrawn and nothing is displayed (drawn), so that when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, the display contents of layer 2 and subsequent layers are visible. Therefore, the volume value information (level gauge image corresponding to volume value 2) is visible.

In this manner, when the volume is adjusted while the power is restored, the image display device 26 performs only the screen display recovery, and the speaker 10 only provides notification regarding the volume adjustment.
As a result, for example, by visually checking the image display device 26, the administrator can understand that the screen display is being restored when the power is restored, and by listening to the adjustment sound from the speaker 10, the player can obtain volume value information. Even if is not displayed, you can understand that the volume is being adjusted.
Furthermore, even if the screen display is being restored while the power is being restored, if the volume is adjusted, the volume value will be changed, so there is no need to have the player operate the cross key button 16 again after the restoration conditions are met. can be prevented from occurring.
Further, as shown at timing T2 and timing T3, even when the screen display is being restored and the volume value information is not visible, the volume value information corresponding to the current volume value is drawn. Then, layers 1 to 7 are combined and displayed.
Thereby, regardless of whether the power is restored or not, processing such as combining and displaying layers 1 to 7 can be uniformly performed. For example, when a volume value/light value subcommand is received, but the power is being restored, it is possible to eliminate the need for specific processing during power restoration, such as not drawing volume value information in layer 3. When a value/light amount value subcommand is received, volume value information can be drawn in layer 3.

Note that although FIG. 43 has been described using an example of when the power is restored (when a power restoration command is received), the same thing can be applied when the power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

In the example of FIG. 43, if the volume is adjusted while the "screen display returning" message is being displayed, an adjustment sound corresponding to the current volume value or the adjusted volume value is output. However, for example, if an operation to decrease the volume value (operation of the left direction button of the four-way controller button 16) is performed when the current volume value is the minimum volume value level 1, the adjustment sound "Do♪" is performed. may be output, or may be silent without outputting the adjustment sound "Do♪". Similarly, if an operation to increase the volume value (operation of the right direction button of the four-way controller button 16) is performed when the current volume value is the maximum volume value level 5, the adjustment sound "So♪" is performed. It may be output, or it may be silent without outputting the adjustment sound "so♪".
As a result, when outputting the adjustment sound, the same sound (C ♪ and G ♪) will be output continuously, so even if the level gauge image corresponding to the current volume value is invisible, It can be made to recognize that the volume value cannot be adjusted any further.
Also, when the adjustment sound is not output, for example, if the left direction button of the four-way controller button 16 is operated continuously, the adjustment sound is suddenly not output and becomes silent, making it impossible to adjust the volume value any further. can be made aware of this.

(Diagram explaining the fifth example of notification mode)
Next, a fifth example of the notification mode will be described using FIG. 44.

FIG. 44 assumes a case where a game ball enters the first starting port 21 during execution of a symbol variation game in the normal gaming state.
Specifically, when the image/sound CPU 204 receives a starting port-related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 44, a subcommand related to the ball entering the first starting port 21) at timing T1, the image/sound CPU 204 transmits numeric reservation information and Draw icon information. In addition, a winning sound “pilon♪” indicating that a game ball has entered the first starting port 21 and a normal holding icon is displayed in the first holding ball image display area 26g of the first starting port is output from the speaker 10. be done.
Note that in FIG. 44, layers 1 to 7 are always combined and displayed before timing T1 and after timing T1.
In this way, notification is made when a game ball enters the first starting port 21 during execution of the symbol variation game in the normal gaming state.

(Diagram explaining the sixth example of notification mode)
Next, a sixth example of the notification mode will be described using FIG. 45.

FIG. 45 assumes that a game ball enters the first starting port 21 during power restoration in the normal gaming state (when a power restoration command is received).
Specifically, until timing T1, the power is turned off and the image display device 26 is also turned off (not displayed) as indicated by diagonal lines.
Then, when the power is turned on at timing T1, the main CPU 101 starts a return process, and the image display device 26 displays "Screen display returning".
At this time, in the layer 1, the screen display recovery information is drawn, and in the layer 2, only the fact that the numeric hold information related to the numeric hold is 0 is drawn.
Then, layers 1 to 7 are combined, and the above-mentioned "screen display returning" is displayed.
Note that although numeric reservation information is drawn in layer 2, it is not visible due to the display content of layer 1 when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26.

Then, at timing T2, the image/sound CPU 204 receives a starting port-related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 45, a subcommand related to entry of the ball into the first starting port 21). In this case, in layer 2, the numeric pending information "0" related to numeric pending and the variable icon to be displayed in the variable icon display area 26o are drawn.
In addition, a winning sound "pilon♪" indicating that a game ball enters the first starting port 21 and the normal variable icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 26o is output from the speaker 10.
However, since the screen display recovery information is still being drawn in layer 1, although the numeric pending information "0" related to numeric pending and the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 26o are drawn, the layers are combined. When the winning sound is displayed on the image display device 26, it is not visible due to the display contents of layer 1, and only the winning sound "Piron♪" is announced by the speaker 10.

Then, at timing T3, when the return condition is satisfied, the screen display during return is ended, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the sub-symbols etc. are displayed in a visible manner. The establishment of the return condition here may mean that a predetermined time has elapsed, or it may be the case that a predetermined command (for example, a symbol stop command, a demo command, etc.) is received.
Further, when the image display device 26 returns to normal operation, the digits on hold and the fluctuation icon are visibly displayed, and the BGM that is output during the fluctuation display is output.
At this time, layer 1 is undrawn and nothing is displayed (drawn), so that when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, the display contents of layer 2 and subsequent layers are visible. Therefore, the numeric hold and the fluctuation icon are visible.

In this way, if a game ball enters the first starting port 21 while the power is being restored (when a power restoration command is received), the image display device 26 only performs the screen display recovery, and does not display any information related to the ball entering. The notification was made only by the speaker 10.
As a result, for example, by visually checking the image display device 26, the administrator can understand that the screen display is being restored when the power is restored, and by listening to the winning sound from the speaker 10, the player can receive information about pending numbers. Even if the icon information is not displayed, it can be understood that the game ball has entered the starting port.
Furthermore, as shown at timing T2, even when the screen display is being restored and the numeric pending information and icon information are not visible, the numeric pending information and icon information are drawn. Then, layers 1 to 7 are combined and displayed.
Thereby, regardless of whether the power is restored or not, processing such as combining and displaying layers 1 to 7 can be uniformly performed. For example, when a subcommand related to the starting port is received, but the power is being restored, it is possible to eliminate the need for specific processing during the power restoration, such as not drawing numeric hold information or icon information in Layer 2. When a subcommand related to the starting port is received, processing can be performed such as drawing numeric reservation information and icon information in layer 2.

Note that although FIG. 45 has been described using an example of when the power is restored (when a power restoration command is received), the same thing can be applied when the power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

In addition, if a game ball enters the first starting port 21 during power restoration in the normal gaming state (when a power restoration command is received), but the game ball has already been stored up to the above-mentioned "fourth storage area", , the winning sound is not announced by the speaker 10. This allows the player to recognize that the ball is entering the first starting port 21 in a situation where up to the "fourth storage area" is stored.

(A diagram explaining the sixth example (another example) of the notification mode)
Next, a sixth example (another example) of the notification mode will be described using FIG. 46. In addition, in FIG. 46, the explanation of the parts common to FIG. 45 will be omitted, and the different parts will be mainly explained.

FIG. 46 differs from FIG. 45 in that a main hold display and a sub hold display are added to the display mode.
Specifically, until timing T2, the hold number counter is 3, and the main hold display and the sub hold display are displayed as "◎○".
Then, at timing T2, when a starting port-related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 46, a subcommand related to the ball entering the first starting port 21) is received, the hold number counter becomes 4, and the main hold display and The sub-hold indicator displays "◎◎".
Thereafter, when the return condition is satisfied at timing T3, the display during screen display return is terminated, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which sub-symbols and the like are displayed in a visible manner. The establishment of the return condition here may mean that a predetermined time has elapsed, or it may be the case that a predetermined command (for example, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command, a symbol stop command, a demo command, etc.) is received.
That is, at timing T2, the number pending information and the icon information are not visible, but the winning sound notification from the speaker 10 can be heard, and the winning notification is made by updating the display of the main pending display and the sub pending display. is visible.
As a result, even if the numeric pending information and icon information are not visible, winnings can be visually recognized (confirmed) separately on the main pending display and the sub pending display.
Furthermore, while the power is being restored, the movable body 28 performs the initial operation as described above, making it difficult to see the display contents of the image display device 26. Since it is not affected, winnings can be visually confirmed (confirmed) by checking the main pending display and the sub pending display.

Note that although FIG. 46 has been described using an example of when the power is restored (when a power restoration command is received), the same thing can be applied when the power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

(Diagram explaining the seventh example of notification mode)
Next, a seventh example of the notification mode will be described using FIG. 47.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the display mode of the icon in the above-described pending prefetch performance and the light emission mode of the starting port light emitting device 21b that is linked to the display mode of the icon.
Specifically, the image/sound CPU 204 receives a starting port related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 47, a subcommand related to entering the ball into the first starting port 21) at timing T1, and the starting port related subcommand is If it indicates a pending look-ahead effect (blue), numeric pending information and icon information (blue) are drawn in layer 2 with reference to the change scenario.
Then, by displaying layers 1 to 7 in a composite manner, a "△" indicating a blue holding icon is displayed in the first starting port fourth holding ball image display area 26j.
In addition, the speaker 10 outputs a winning sound "Poron♪" which notifies that the blue pending icon has been displayed when the ball enters the first starting port 21.
Further, the light emitting drive CPU 208 receives a starting port related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 47, a subcommand related to entry of the ball into the first starting port 21) at timing T1, and the starting port related subcommand is a pending prefetch effect ( If the light is blue), the starting port light emitting device 21b is caused to emit light in blue.
In this way, when the ball enters the first starting port 21, a blue pending icon is displayed, and in conjunction with this, it is notified that the starting port light emitting device 21b has emitted blue light.

Then, when the image/sound CPU 204 receives the subcommand related to the variation pattern at timing T2, the image/sound CPU 204 refers to the change scenario (in FIG. 47, the scenario changes from blue to yellow) and sets the number in layer 2. Draw pending information and icon information (yellow).
Then, by displaying layers 1 to 7 in a composite manner, a "☆" indicating a yellow holding icon is displayed in the first starting port third holding ball image display area 26i.
Further, the speaker 10 outputs a changing sound "Keen♪" to notify that the icon has been updated to a yellow hold icon.
Further, when the light emission drive CPU 208 receives the variation pattern related subcommand at timing T2, the light emission drive CPU 208 causes the starting port light emitting device 21b to emit light in yellow.
In this way, when the next symbol variation game is executed, a yellow pending icon is displayed, and in conjunction with this, it is notified that the starting opening light emitting device 21b has emitted yellow light.

(A diagram explaining the eighth example of notification mode)
Next, an eighth example of the notification mode will be described using FIG. 48.
Note that FIG. 48 shows an example in which the pending prefetch effect described in FIG. 47 is started from the ball entering when the power is restored. Therefore, explanations of parts that are common to those in FIG. 47 will be omitted, and parts that are different will be mainly explained.

Specifically, until timing T2, the starting port light emitting device 21b is off, and at timing T2, the starting port related subcommand (in the example of FIG. If the starting gate-related subcommand indicates a pending look-ahead effect (blue), draw numerical pending information and icon information (blue) in layer 2 with reference to the change scenario. . However, in layer 1, since screen display recovery information is being drawn continuously from timing T1, although numeric pending information and icon information (blue) are drawn, when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, However, it is not visible due to the display contents of layer 1.
Further, at timing T2, the speaker 10 outputs a winning sound "Poron♪" which notifies that a blue pending icon is displayed (actually invisible) due to the ball entering the first starting port 21.
Further, at timing T2, the starting port light emitting device 21b emits blue light.

Then, when the return condition is satisfied at timing T3, the display during screen display return is terminated, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which sub-symbols and the like are displayed in a visible manner. The establishment of the return condition here may mean that a predetermined time has elapsed, or it may be the case that a predetermined command (for example, a symbol stop command, a demo command, etc.) is received.
At this time, since layer 1 is not drawn, the variable icon of "Δ" indicating blue is displayed in the variable icon display area 26o so as to be visible.
In this way, when a game ball enters the first starting port 21 and a pending look-ahead effect is started during power restoration (when a power restoration command is received), the image display device 26 performs only the screen display recovery. , the notification regarding the pending prefetch performance is made by the speaker 10 and the starting port light emitting device 21b.
As a result, for example, by visually checking the image display device 26, the administrator can understand that the screen display is being restored when the power is restored, and the player can hear the winning sound from the speaker 10 and By visually recognizing the light emitting mode of the light emitting device 21b, it is possible to understand that the hold look ahead performance has started even if the numeric hold information and icon information are not displayed.
Furthermore, as shown at timing T2, even when the screen display is being restored and the numeric pending information and icon information are not visible, the numeric pending information and icon information are drawn. Then, layers 1 to 7 are combined and displayed.
As a result, regardless of whether the power is restored or not, processing such as combining and displaying layers 1 to 7 can be uniformly performed. For example, if a subcommand related to the starting port has been received, but the power is being restored, it is possible to eliminate the need for specific processing during power restoration, such as not drawing numeric hold information or icon information in Layer 2. When a starting gate related subcommand is received, processing can be performed such as drawing numerical reservation information and icon information in layer 2.

Furthermore, while the power is restored, the movable body 28 performs the initial operation as described above, making it difficult to see the display contents of the image display device 26, but the starting port light emitting device 21b is not affected by the initial operation. By checking the starting port light emitting device 21b, it is possible to visually recognize (confirm) that the pending prefetch effect has started.

Note that although FIG. 48 has been described using an example of when the power is restored (when a power restoration command is received), the same thing can be applied when the power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

(A diagram explaining the ninth example of notification mode)
Next, a ninth example of the notification mode will be described using FIG. 49.

FIG. 49 shows a case where a starting port-related subcommand (in particular, a subcommand indicating that a game ball has entered the first starting port 21) is received during power restoration in the time saving gaming state (a variable probability gaming state is also possible) (i.e. , a case where a left-handed hit is performed in a time-saving gaming state), and is a diagram illustrating the characteristics of the light emitting mode of the starting opening light emitting device 21b in that case.

Specifically, until timing T1, the power is turned off and the image display device 26 is also turned off (not displayed) as indicated by diagonal lines.
Then, when the power is turned on at timing T1, the main CPU 101 starts a return process, and the image display device 26 displays "Screen display returning".
At this time, in the layer 1, the screen display recovery information is drawn, and in the layer 2, only the fact that the numeric hold information related to the numeric hold is 0 is drawn.
Then, layers 1 to 7 are combined, and the above-mentioned "screen display returning" is displayed.
Note that although numeric reservation information is drawn in layer 2, it is not visible due to the display content of layer 1 when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26.
Further, the starting port light emitting device 21b and the speaker lamp 10a are off, and the right-hand drive lamp (right-hand drive indicator 29c), which is not shown, is lit.

Then, at timing T2, the image/sound CPU 204 receives a subcommand related to the starting port (in the example of FIG. 49, a subcommand related to entering the ball into the first starting port 21), and in layer 2, the numeric pending information is drawn, and right-handed hitting information (right-handed hitting image 26s) is drawn in layer 6 (not shown). However, in layer 1, since screen display recovery information is being drawn continuously from timing T1, although numeric hold information and right-hand hitting information are drawn, when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, the layer It is not visible due to the display contents of 1.

Further, at timing T2, the starting port light emitting device 21b and the speaker lamp 10a are turned off. Note that the term "lights out" here indicates that even though the game ball has entered the first starting port 21, the starting port light emitting device 21b and the speaker lamp 10a remain off.
For example, with the starting port light emitting device 21b, if a game ball enters the first starting port 21, it can emit light in any of the colors shown in FIG. When a game ball enters the mouth 21, no light is emitted in any of the colors shown in FIG. 31.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, even if it is "white", which is a simple winning notification without a pending look-ahead effect, it will not emit light, and the special symbol hit determination process that is performed due to the ball being entered will not emit light. Even if the result is a hit, it will not cause a "rainbow" to emit light.
In addition, with the speaker lamp 10a, if a game ball enters the first starting port 21 and the winning flash effect is executed, it can emit light in any of the colors shown in the winning flash effect, but it will save time. If a game ball enters the first starting port 21 during power restoration in a gaming state, no color is emitted. Note that not emitting light in any color may mean not performing the winning flash performance lottery itself, or may mean not emitting light in any color as a result of performing the winning flash performance lottery.
With this configuration, for example, if a game ball enters the first starting port 21 in the normal gaming state, the starting port light emitting device 21b will emit light in one of the colors shown in FIG. If a game ball enters the first starting port 21 while the power is restored in the time-saving gaming state, it will not emit light in any color (it will not even emit white light), which may give the player a sense of discomfort and prevent the player from playing the game. It is possible to indirectly notify that the player is not playing the optimal game (that the first starting port 21 is not the starting port that should allow the ball to enter).
In addition, the speaker lamp 10a may emit light even though the player is not playing the optimal game (the first starting port 21 is not the starting port where the ball should enter), and the first starting port 21 may cause the player to play the game. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that letting the ball enter is the optimal game.

The example shown in FIG. 49 is a case where a game ball enters the first starting port 21 during power restoration in the time-saving gaming state, but if a game ball enters the first starting port 21 during power restoration in the normal gaming state. When the ball enters, as described in FIG. 48, it is possible to cause the starting port light emitting device 21b to emit light, and it is also possible to cause the speaker lamp 10a to emit light.

Then, when the return condition is satisfied at timing T3, the display during screen display return is terminated, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which sub-symbols and the like are displayed in a visible manner. The establishment of the return condition here may mean that a predetermined time has elapsed, or it may be the case that a predetermined command (for example, a symbol stop command, a demo command, etc.) is received.
Further, when the image display device 26 returns to normal operation, the number hold is visibly displayed, and the BGM that is output during the variable display is output.
At this time, layer 1 is undrawn and nothing is displayed (drawn), so that when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, the display contents of layer 2 and subsequent layers are visible. Therefore, the number reservation is visible.
As shown in FIG. 49, if an event occurs such as a game ball being entered into the first starting port 21 while the power is being restored in the time-saving gaming state, the icon corresponding to the entering ball (the corresponding Fluctuation icon, pending icon) are not displayed. That is, the icon information is not drawn in layer 2 at timing T2, and the fluctuation icon is not displayed on the image display device 26 at timing T3, and the symbol fluctuation game is not displayed although the fluctuation icon is not displayed. Events such as being executed are occurring.

Note that although FIG. 49 has been described using an example of when the power is restored (when a power restoration command is received), the same thing can be applied when the power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

(A diagram explaining the ninth example (another example) of the notification mode)
Next, a ninth example (another example) of the notification mode will be described using FIG. 50. In addition, in FIG. 50, description of parts common to FIG. 49 will be omitted, and parts different from FIG. 49 will be mainly described.

FIG. 50 assumes a case where a game ball is entered into the second starting port 22 during power restoration in the normal gaming state. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, even in the normal gaming state, there is a case where a winning occurs and the opening/closing member of the second starting port 22 is opened, so the opening/closing member of the second starting port 22 opens. It is possible to let the ball enter the ball.
On the other hand, in the case where the game ball enters the second starting port 22 in the normal gaming state when configured so as not to hit the normal pattern in the normal gaming state as described above, for example, the case where the game ball enters the second starting port 22 in the time-saving gaming state is In the process of the opening/closing member of the second starting port 22 performing the closing operation, the game ball that is about to enter the second starting port 22 is caught, and the game ball is transferred to the normal gaming state in that state, and the ball is caught in the normal gaming state that has been transferred. It is assumed that the problem is resolved and the game ball that was about to enter the second starting port 22 enters the second starting port 22.

Specifically, at timing T2, the image/sound CPU 204 receives a starting port-related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 50, a subcommand related to entering the ball into the second starting port 22), and in layer 2, Number reservation information is drawn, and left-handed hitting information (left-handed hitting image 26r) is drawn in layer 6 (not shown). However, in layer 1, since screen display recovery information is being drawn continuously from timing T1, although numeric hold information and left-handed hitting information are drawn, when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, the layer It is not visible due to the display contents of 1.

Further, at timing T2, the starting port light emitting device 21b and the speaker lamp 10a are turned off. That is, even if a game ball is entered into the second starting port 22 during power restoration in the normal gaming state, the starting port light emitting device 21b and the speaker lamp 10a will not emit light.
For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process performed due to the ball entering is a hit, the starting port light emitting device 21b will not emit a "rainbow" light.
In this way, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 22 during power restoration in the normal gaming state, the optimal game for the player is not being played (the second starting port 22 does not allow the ball to enter the ball). It is possible to indirectly notify that the starting port is not the correct one.

Then, when the return condition is satisfied at timing T3, the display during screen display return is terminated, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which sub-symbols and the like are displayed in a visible manner. The establishment of the return condition here may mean that a predetermined time has elapsed, or it may be the case that a predetermined command (for example, a symbol stop command, a demo command, etc.) is received.

Note that although FIG. 50 has been described using an example of when the power is restored (when a power restoration command is received), the same thing can be applied when the power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

(A diagram explaining the tenth example of notification mode)
Next, a tenth example of the notification mode will be described using FIG. 51.

FIG. 51 assumes that an error occurs during power restoration.
Specifically, until timing T1, the power is turned off and the image display device 26 is also turned off (not displayed) as indicated by diagonal lines.
Then, when the power is turned on at timing T1, the main CPU 101 starts a return process, and the image display device 26 displays "Screen display returning".
At this time, in layer 1, information on returning to screen display is drawn.
Then, layers 1 to 7 are combined, and the above-mentioned "screen display returning" is displayed.

Then, at timing T2, the image/sound CPU 204 receives an error-related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 51, a subcommand related to a radio wave error). In this case, in layer 1, screen display recovery information and error information related to radio wave errors are drawn.
Layers 1 to 7 are then synthesized, and the image display device 26 displays a message that the screen display is being restored and a radio wave error 26u that notifies that a radio wave error has occurred.
Additionally, the speaker 10 outputs a warning sound and a sound notifying a radio wave error.

Then, when the return condition is satisfied at timing T3, the display during screen display return is terminated, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which sub-symbols and the like are displayed in a visible manner. The establishment of the return condition here may mean that a predetermined time has elapsed, or it may be the case that a predetermined command (for example, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a demo command, etc.) is received.
In addition, although the display during screen display recovery ends when the return condition is met, it is assumed that the radio wave error has not been resolved yet, so error information related to the radio wave error is still being drawn in layer 1. A radio wave error 26u is displayed on the image display device 26. Additionally, the speaker 10 outputs a warning sound and a sound notifying a radio wave error.
In this way, if an error occurs during power restoration, information regarding the error is displayed along with the display during screen display recovery. At the same time, the speaker 10 outputs a warning sound and a sound notifying a radio wave error. This allows the administrator to quickly understand that an error has occurred during power restoration.

Note that although FIG. 51 has been described using an example of when power is restored (when a power restoration command is received), the same thing can be applied when power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

Further, in FIG. 51, the case where a radio wave error has occurred has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar notification may be made for other errors.

(A diagram explaining the eleventh example of notification mode)
Next, an eleventh example of the notification mode will be described using FIG. 52.

Fig. 52 assumes a case where a power outage occurs during a winning game and then the power is restored. In particular, it shows the characteristics related to the notification mode when an over-win occurs in the big winning opening 24 while the power is restored. There is.
Specifically, until timing T1, the power is on and a winning game is being played. At this time, layer 1 is undrawn, right-handed hitting information (right-handed hitting image 26s) is drawn in layer 6, and jackpot information (for example, total prize ball number image 26v acquired in a winning game) is drawn in layer 7. It is drawn. Then, by displaying layers 1 to 7 in a composite manner, an image during a winning game is displayed.

Then, at timing T1, the power is turned off (a power outage occurs), and the image display device 26 is also turned off (not displayed) as shown by diagonal lines.
Thereafter, when the power is turned on at timing T2, the main CPU 101 starts a return process, and the image display device 26 displays the message "Screen display is returning. Please continue playing."
At this time, in layer 1, screen display recovery information is drawn, in layer 6, right-handed hitting information (right-handed hitting image 26s) is drawn, and in layer 7, jackpot information is drawn. However, since the screen display recovery information is drawn in layer 1, although right-handed information (right-handed image 26s) and jackpot information are drawn, when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, the layer It is not visible due to the display contents of 1.
Moreover, after the interrupt is permitted between timing T2 and timing T3, the big prize opening 24 is opened.

Then, at timing T3, the image/sound CPU 204 receives a subcommand related to the big winning hole (in the example of FIG. 52, a subcommand related to the ball entering detection signal in the big winning hole). In addition, the said big prize opening related subcommand corresponds to the above-mentioned over-winning.
At this time, the speaker 10 outputs the sound "Piro Leen♪", notifying that an over-win has occurred at the big winning opening 24.
Note that the number of prize balls obtained by the over-winning is added to the total prize ball number image 26v and drawn in layer 7. For example, when the total award pitch number image 26v up to timing T2 is "488", the total award pitch number image 26v of "500" is drawn in layer 7. However, since the screen display recovery information is drawn in layer 1, when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, the display contents of layer 1 make it invisible.
Then, when the return condition is satisfied at timing T4, the screen display during return is terminated, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the image during the winning game is visibly displayed. The establishment of the return condition here may mean that a predetermined period of time has elapsed, or a predetermined command (for example, a grand prize opening opening command (not shown) sent when opening a grand prize opening, a command when a grand prize opening is closed, etc.) This may also be the case in which a transmitted big prize opening closing command, etc.) is received.
By returning the image display device 26 to a state in which the image during the winning game is visibly displayed, the image during the winning game (for example, the total prize ball number image 26v after addition) is visibly displayed again. That will happen.

In this way, if an over-win occurs in the grand prize opening 24 while the power is restored for a winning game, the image display device 26 displays information that the screen display is being restored, and the over-win is announced only through the speaker 10. I decided to do it.
As a result, for example, by visually checking the image display device 26, the administrator can understand that the screen display is being restored when the power is restored, and the player can confirm that the number of prize balls obtained by over-winning is the total number of prize balls. Although the addition to the image 26v cannot be visually recognized, the occurrence of an over-win can be recognized by separately listening to the sound output from the speaker 10 to notify that an over-win has occurred.

In addition, as shown at timing T3, even if the screen display is returning and the jackpot information (especially the total prize ball number image 26v) is not visible, the prize balls obtained by over-winning in layer 7 The number is added to the total prize ball number image 26v and drawn. Then, layers 1 to 7 are combined and displayed.
As a result, regardless of whether the power is restored or not, processing such as combining and displaying layers 1 to 7 can be uniformly performed. For example, a subcommand related to the detection signal of balls entering the jackpot hole has been received, but since the power is being restored, jackpot information (especially the total prize ball number image 26v) is not drawn in layer 7. Processing can be made unnecessary, and it is possible to uniformly perform processing such as drawing jackpot information (in particular, the total prize ball number image 26v) in layer 7 when a subcommand related to the jackpot ball entry detection signal is received. can.

Note that although FIG. 52 has been described using an example of when the power is restored (when a power restoration command is received), the same thing can be applied when the power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

Note that over-winning may be announced by causing not only the speaker 10 but also the light emitting device 9 to emit light. For example, when an over winning occurs, the light may be emitted in a different color from the previous light emitting color.

(A diagram explaining the twelfth example of the notification mode)
Next, a twelfth example of the notification mode will be described using FIG. 53.

Figure 53 assumes a case where a power outage occurs during a winning game and then the power is restored. In particular, it shows the characteristics related to the notification mode when a ball enters the normal winning hole 23 while the power is restored. ing.
Specifically, until timing T1, the power is on and a winning game is being played. At this time, layer 1 is undrawn, layer 4 is undrawn, right-hand hitting information (right-hand hitting image 26s) is drawn on layer 6, and jackpot information (for example, the total amount obtained in the winning game) is drawn on layer 7. A prize ball number image 26v, etc.) is drawn. Then, by displaying layers 1 to 7 in a composite manner, an image during a winning game is displayed.

Then, at timing T1, the power is turned off (a power outage occurs), and the image display device 26 is also turned off (not displayed) as shown by diagonal lines.
Thereafter, when the power is turned on at timing T2, the main CPU 101 starts a return process, and the image display device 26 displays the message "Screen display is returning. Please continue playing."
At this time, the screen display recovery information is drawn in layer 1, the layer 4 is not drawn, the right-hand hitting information (right-hand hitting image 26s) is drawn in layer 6, and the jackpot information is drawn in layer 7. has been done. However, since the screen display recovery information is drawn in layer 1, although right-handed information (right-handed image 26s) and jackpot information are drawn, when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, the layer It is not visible due to the display contents of 1.

Then, at timing T3, the image/sound CPU 204 receives a subcommand related to the normal winning hole (in the example of FIG. 53, a subcommand related to the ball entering detection signal in the normal winning hole). At this time, the speaker 10 outputs the sound "Chalin♪", notifying that a game ball has entered the normal winning hole 23.
Note that the number of prize balls obtained by entering the normal winning hole is added to the total prize ball number image 26v and drawn in layer 7. In addition, in layer 4, winning notification information (ball entry notification image 26w) to the normal winning opening is drawn. However, since the screen display recovery information is drawn in layer 1, when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, the display contents of layer 1 make it invisible.

Then, when the return condition is satisfied at timing T4, the screen display during return is terminated, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the image during the winning game is visibly displayed. The establishment of the return condition here may mean that a predetermined period of time has elapsed, or a predetermined command (for example, a grand prize opening opening command (not shown) that is sent when opening a grand prize opening, a command that is sent when a grand prize opening is closed, This may also be the case when a received big prize opening closing command, etc. that is sent is received.
By returning the image display device 26 to the state in which the image during the winning game is visibly displayed, the image during the winning game (for example, the total prize ball number image 26v after addition) is displayed again. Become.
Moreover, at timing T4, the sub-command related to the normal winning hole ball entry detection signal is received again, and winning notification information (ball entering notification image 26w) to the normal winning hole is drawn in layer 4. As a result, a ball entry notification image 26w that notifies that one game ball has entered the normal winning hole 23 such as "+1" is displayed on the image display device 26 so as to be visible. At the same time, the speaker 10 outputs the sound "Chalin♪" to notify that a game ball has entered the normal winning hole 23.

In this way, if a ball enters the normal winning hole 23 while the power is restored for a winning game, the image display device 26 displays information that the screen display is being restored, and notifies the ball entering the normal winning hole 23. is performed using only the speaker 10.
As a result, for example, by visually checking the image display device 26, the administrator can understand that the screen display is being restored when the power is restored, and the player can normally see the ball entering notification image 26w when the ball enters the winning hole 23. Although it cannot be visually recognized, the ball entering the normal winning hole 23 can be recognized by separately listening to the sound output from the speaker 10 notifying that the ball has entered.

Furthermore, as shown at timing T3, even when the screen display is being restored and the jackpot information (particularly the ball entry notification image 26w) is not visible, it is rendered in layer 4. Then, layers 1 to 7 are combined and displayed.
Thereby, regardless of whether the power is restored or not, processing such as combining and displaying layers 1 to 7 can be uniformly performed. For example, a sub-command related to the ball entering the normal winning hole detection signal has been received, but since the power is being restored, jackpot information (especially the ball entering notification image 26w) is not drawn in layer 4, which is a unique process during power restoration. can be made unnecessary, and it is possible to uniformly draw the jackpot information (in particular, the ball entering notification image 26w) in layer 4 upon receiving the subcommand related to the normal winning opening ball entering detection signal.

(Regarding opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in normal gaming state and fixed variable gaming state)
Next, opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the normal gaming state and opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the variable probability gaming state will be explained using FIG. Note that FIG. 54 is a simple time chart illustrating opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the normal gaming state, and opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the variable probability gaming state.

First, it is assumed that Opportunity 1 in the normal game state is that the player wins the winning game (special symbol C) at timing (a) (he did not win and the symbol related to the winning was confirmed and displayed). In this case, a winning game is executed at timing (b). Then, when the winning game ends at timing (b), the state shifts to the time-saving game state from timing (b).
That is, it shows that the process of step S105-5-18 described above has shifted to the time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state that is activated (transitioned) by trigger 1 is started from timing (b).

Next, trigger 2 in the normal gaming state is that the normal gaming state game number counter becomes "0" at timing (a) (at the time when the main RAM is cleared, when the time-saving gaming state ends or when the time-saving gaming state starts) It is assumed that
From there, it is assumed that the symbol variation game has been played ``1000'' times without winning a winning game. That is, at timing (b), the normal gaming state game number counter becomes "1000", and from timing (b), the game shifts to the time saving gaming state.
That is, it shows that the process of step S105-4-12-10 described above has shifted to the time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state that is activated (transitioned) by trigger 2 is started from timing (b).

As described above, in the normal gaming state, both the time-saving gaming state activated (transitioned) by opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state activated (transitioned) by trigger 2 are executable.

Next, it is assumed that the opportunity 1 in the variable probability game state is that the player wins the winning game (special symbol F) at timing (a) (he did not win and the symbol related to the winning was confirmed and displayed). In this case, the winning game is executed at timing (b). Then, when the winning game ends at timing (b), the state shifts to the time-saving game state from timing (b).
That is, it shows that the process of step S105-5-18 described above has shifted to the time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state that is activated (transitioned) by trigger 1 is started from timing (b).

Next, it is assumed that the trigger 2 in the probability variable gaming state is that the probability variable gaming state game number counter becomes "0" at timing (a) (at the time when the winning state ends).
From there, it is assumed that the symbol variation game has been played ``1000'' times without winning a winning game. That is, although the probability variable gaming state game number counter becomes "1000" at timing (b), the probability varying gaming state continues without any change in the gaming state after timing (b). Further, the states of the normal symbols shown in FIG. 5 are also "state B" from timing (a) to timing (b) and after timing (b).

That is, in the probability variable gaming state, even if the probability variable gaming state game number counter reaches "1000", the game does not shift to the time-saving gaming state unlike when the normal gaming state game number counter reaches "1000". As a result, it is possible to prevent the most advantageous probability-variable gaming state from ending and shifting to a time-saving gaming state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the probability-variable gaming state after failing to obtain the "1000" winning game. It is possible to prevent players from feeling like they have lost.

From the above, in the variable probability gaming state, the time-saving gaming state that is activated (transitioned) by trigger 1 is executable, and the time-saving gaming state that is activated (transitioned) by trigger 2 is not executable.

In this way, in the normal gaming state, both the time-saving gaming state that is activated (transitioned) by trigger 1 and the time-saving gaming state that is activated (transitioned) by trigger 2 are executable, while in the variable probability gaming state, the trigger The time-saving gaming state that is activated (transitioned) by trigger 1 is executable, but the time-saving gaming state that is activated (transitioned) by trigger 2 is not executable, so the normal gaming state has a better opportunity to transition to the time-saving gaming state. There will be more. This can prevent the normal gaming state from becoming significantly disadvantageous compared to the variable probability gaming state. This eliminates the unfavorable impression of the normal gaming state, thereby preventing a decline in gaming interest.

In addition, in the variable probability gaming state, it may be possible to execute a time-saving gaming state that is activated (transitioned) by trigger 2. For example, when the probability variable game state game number counter reaches "1000", "state B" may be executed "100" times (rewriting from infinite state B to finite state B). In this case, the gaming state itself may be shifted from the variable probability gaming state to the time saving gaming state, or may remain in the variable probability gaming state.
With this configuration, it is possible to give a sense of urgency that state B will end if a winning game is not obtained, and it is possible to prevent the variable probability game state from becoming a monotonous game.

Further, the variable probability game state game number counter is not necessarily required. In other words, in the variable probability gaming state, there is no need to count the number of games played. In other words, since it is not counted, even if the symbol variation game is played ``1000'' times without winning a winning game, the time-saving game state based on opportunity 2 may not operate. Thereby, the number of game counters provided in the main RAM 103 can be reduced.

(Regarding opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in normal gaming state)
Next, opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the normal gaming state will be explained using FIG. 55. In addition, FIG. 55 is a simple time chart explaining trigger 1 and trigger 2 in the normal gaming state (particularly the period from when the symbol is displayed as confirmed until moving to the time-saving gaming state). Note that the description of parts that overlap with those in FIG. 54 may be omitted as appropriate.

First, the trigger 1 assumes that the special symbol C has been confirmed and displayed at timing (a). In this case, a winning game is executed at timing (b). Then, when the winning game ends at timing (b), the game shifts to the opening in the time-saving game state (time-saving OP). In this time-saving OP, the image display device 26 displays, for example, "○○ RUSH entry! (100 times)".

Then, when the time-saving OP ends at timing (c), the time-saving game state shifts from timing (c).
That is, it shows that the process of step S105-5-18 described above has shifted to the time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state that is activated (transitioned) by trigger 1 is started from timing (c).

Next, in case of opportunity 2, it is assumed that the symbol variation game has been played ``1000'' times without hitting a winning game until timing (a). It is assumed that the "1000" symbol variation game is a loss and the special symbol D is displayed as confirmed.

Then, when the special symbol D is confirmed and displayed at timing (a), the game shifts to the opening (time saving OP) in the time saving game state. Note that the opening time, opening performance, etc. in the time-saving OP may be the same as opportunity 1, or may be different from opportunity 1. For example, in the case of Opportunity 2, a dedicated opening time, opening presentation, etc. may be set.

Then, when the time-saving OP ends at timing (b), the time-saving game state shifts from timing (b).
That is, it shows that the process of step S105-4-12-10 described above has shifted to the time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state that is activated (transitioned) by trigger 2 is started from timing (b).

Comparing Opportunity 1 and Opportunity 2, the period from timing (a) when the symbol is confirmed and displayed to the opening in the time-saving gaming state, and the period from timing (a) when the symbol is confirmed and displaying to the time-saving gaming state. The period until Trigger 1 is longer due to the winning game involved, and Opportunity 2 is shorter because the winning game is not involved. In this way, by making the period from when the symbol is confirmed to be displayed to the time-saving OP and the period from the time to the time-saving gaming state different between trigger 1 and trigger 2, a gaming machine rich in variety can be created. can be provided.
Particularly in trigger 2, it is suitable for players who have limited playing time by immediately transitioning to the time-saving OP and then transitioning to the time-saving gaming state.

(Regarding opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in normal gaming state)
Next, opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the normal gaming state will be explained using FIG. 56. Note that FIG. 56 is a simple time chart illustrating opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the normal gaming state (particularly when the conditions for establishing opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 are both satisfied in the same symbol variation game). Note that the description of parts that overlap with those in FIG. 54 may be omitted as appropriate.

It should be noted that the "condition for establishing Opportunity 1" is intended to result in no winning in the winning game (for example, special symbol C). That is, trigger 1 is to shift to the time-saving gaming state in the process of step S105-5-18 described above, and in order to perform the process of step S105-5-18, it is essential to win the winning game. That's why. Therefore, "winning in the winning game", which is essential for the process of step S105-5-18 to be performed, is set as the "condition for establishing Opportunity 1."

Timing (a) assumes that the normal game state game number counter becomes "0" (the time when the main RAM is cleared, the time-saving game state ends, or the time-saving game state starts). It is assumed that from then on, the symbol variation game was played ``1000'' times without winning a winning game. That is, at timing (b), the normal game state game number counter is "1000".

It is assumed that the symbol variation game played at this timing (b) does not hit the winning game (does not hit the special symbol C). In other words, although the normal game state game number counter becomes "1000" and the establishment of opportunity 2 is satisfied, since the symbol variation game does not hit the winning game (does not hit the special symbol C), trigger 1 is separately set. This situation also satisfies the conditions for establishing .

In such a case, if the winning game is started at timing (b) and the winning game is ended at timing (c), the time saving game state is started from timing (c). It should be noted that this time-saving gaming state is the one that is shifted to in the process of step S105-5-18 described above, that is, the one that is activated at the trigger 1.

Therefore, although the normal game state game number counter becomes "1000" and the establishment of opportunity 2 is satisfied, the player did not hit a winning game in the symbol variation game (did not hit the special symbol C), so this situation occurs. If this is the case, the player will take opportunity 1 (prioritize) and thereafter shift to the time-saving gaming state.

In particular, in the case of Opportunity 1, it is more advantageous for the player than shifting to the time-saving gaming state in Opportunity 2 because it shifts to the time-saving gaming state through the winning game (a prize ball is obtained in the winning game). Therefore, by transitioning to the time-saving gaming state while ensuring the player's profits, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling like he has lost out. In this way, by providing multiple opportunities to shift to the time-saving gaming state, it is possible to improve the game's interest, and if any of the opportunities overlap, it is possible to shift to the time-saving gaming state while ensuring the player's profit. This can give players a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, in timing (b), it is assumed that the trigger 1 is a win on the special symbol C, but as long as the special symbol is related to a win, both the special symbol A and the special symbol B can be treated in the same way as in Fig. 56. . However, since both special symbols A and B are special symbols that shift to a variable probability gaming state after the winning game ends, in this case, the "time-saving gaming state" can be interpreted by replacing it with "state B" shown in FIG. good. That is, at timing (b), if the condition for establishing opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 are both satisfied in the same symbol variation game, opportunity 1 is given priority (priority is given), and then the state is shifted to "state B". Just interpret it.

(Regarding opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in normal gaming state)
Next, opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the normal gaming state will be explained using FIG. 57. In addition, FIG. 57 is a simple time chart explaining opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the normal gaming state (particularly the symbol variation game played immediately before shifting to the time-saving gaming state).
In addition, the symbol variation game that is played immediately before shifting to the time-saving gaming state corresponds to the symbol variation game that led to the winning game if the trigger is 1, and if it is the trigger 2, the number of games in the normal game state is "1000". This corresponds to the symbol variation game that became .
Note that the description of parts that overlap with those in FIG. 54 may be omitted as appropriate.

First, in the case of opportunity 1, variation patterns 6 to 11 in FIG. 8 can be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game. In other words, in the case of Opportunity 1, a reach is guaranteed to occur in the immediately preceding symbol variation game.

Further, as the jackpot preview performance, the above-mentioned jackpot preview performance A, jackpot preview performance B, and jackpot preview performance C can be selected. That is, in the case of Opportunity 1, jackpot preview performance A, jackpot preview performance B, and jackpot preview performance C can be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, and so-called premium preview performance can also be selected.
Note that between the jackpot preview performance A and the jackpot preview performance B, there is a tendency for the jackpot preview performance B to be easily selected.

Then, when the symbol variation game ends at timing (b) and the symbol is confirmed and displayed (win), a winning game is started, and when the winning game ends at timing (c), the state shifts to a time-saving game state.

Next, in the case of opportunity 2, variation patterns 1 to 5 in FIG. 8 can be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game. That is, in the case of Opportunity 2, a reach may occur in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, or a reach may not occur. For example, in a symbol variation game where the normal game state game number counter is "1000", if the judgment information is stored only in the fluctuation storage area, a reach is likely to occur, and the normal game state game number counter is ``1000''. In a symbol variation game where the number is "1000", if the determination information is stored up to the fourth storage area, it is difficult for a reach to occur.

Further, as the jackpot preview performance, the above-mentioned jackpot preview performance A and jackpot preview performance B can be selected. That is, in the case of Opportunity 2, jackpot preview performance A and jackpot preview performance B can be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, and so-called premium preview performance cannot be selected.
Note that between the jackpot preview performance A and the jackpot preview performance B, there is a tendency for the player to easily select the jackpot preview performance A.

Then, at timing (b), when the symbol variation game ends and the symbols are displayed as confirmed (lost), the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state.

Comparing Opportunity 1 and Opportunity 2, in the case of Opportunity 1, a reach always occurs in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, but in the case of Opportunity 2, a reach may or may not occur.
Furthermore, in the case of opportunity 1, the premium preview can be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, but in the case of opportunity 2, the premium notice cannot be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game.
In addition, in the case of Opportunity 1, it is easy to select jackpot preview performance B, which has a high expectation of winning for a winning game in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, but in the case of Opportunity 2, the expectation of winning for a winning game in the immediately preceding symbol variation game is high. It is easy to select jackpot preview presentation A with a low value.
Based on this tendency, it is possible to infer from the contents of the symbol variation game (the presence or absence of a reach, the contents of the jackpot preview performance) which trigger will cause the transition to the time-saving gaming state. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the content of the immediately preceding symbol variation game, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Note that the content of the symbol variation game is not limited to that shown in FIG. 57. For example, in the case of Trigger 1, multiple types of jackpot preview effects are likely to occur in combination, and in the case of Trigger 2, multiple types of jackpot preview effects may be combined and difficult to occur. Similar effects can also be obtained in this manner.

Furthermore, in the case of Opportunity 2, in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, a reach may not occur in some cases, but in the case of Opportunity 2, a reach may always occur. In this case, a special symbol variation pattern table exclusively for the "1000" symbol variation game may be stored in the main ROM 102.
With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the probability of a winning game from disappearing due to the occurrence of a reach, and from sensing that the game will quickly shift to the time-saving game state due to Opportunity 2. In other words, until the symbol is confirmed and displayed, it is possible to expect the transition to the time-saving gaming state due to opportunity 1.

In addition, in FIG. 57, although the explanation has been given for opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the normal gaming state, the same structure may be applied to opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the variable probability gaming state.

(Notification mode in a game where the normal game state game number counter reaches a predetermined counter)
Next, as a supplement to FIG. 56, an example of a notification mode in a game in which the normal game state game number counter becomes a predetermined counter (for example, "1000") will be described using FIG. 58.
FIG. 58 shows a notification mode on the image display device 26 when there are no restrictions on selectable variation patterns (non-reach variations can also be selected). Note that some image display devices 26 include only the minimum necessary information and omit the description as appropriate.

First, when a variable pattern (for example, variable patterns 3, 5, 7, and 9) that performs a reach is selected, a reach effect is performed in which the player's character image and the enemy character image compete against each other. For example, the image display device 26 displays an image such as "Battle Start!" indicating that these character images will compete against each other.

Then, if the judgment result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (for example, special symbol C), an image in which the player's character image has won against the enemy character image is displayed, and the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process is a win (for example, special symbol C). If the game is a loss, an image in which the player's character image is defeated by the enemy character image is displayed. For example, in the case of a win, an image such as "WIN!" or a sub-symbol "444" is displayed on the image display device 26, and in the case of a loss, an image such as "LOSE..." is displayed on the image display device 26. , and the sub-pattern "434" are displayed.
In addition, if the judgment result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit and the above-mentioned reversal effect is performed (reversal hit), an image such as "LOSE..." or a sub-symbol "434" will be displayed once. After that, an image such as "WIN!" and a sub-symbol "444" are displayed.

Then, in the case of a win, a winning game is then started, and an image such as "Start winning game!" is displayed on the image display device 26. Then, when the winning game ends, the game shifts to a time-saving game state.
In addition, in the case of a loss, after the losing symbol is confirmed and displayed, the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state. Then, on the image display device 26, an image such as "○○ RUSH enters! 100 times" is displayed, which is the opening effect of the time-saving game state.

On the other hand, when a variation pattern that does not involve reach (for example, variation pattern 1) is selected, for example, at the start of the symbol variation game, an image suggesting a transition to a time-saving gaming state is displayed. For example, on the image display device 26, an image such as "○○ RUSH is entering this game!" is displayed.

Then, the losing symbol (for example, 526) is displayed as confirmed, and when the defective symbol is displayed as confirmed, the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state. Then, on the image display device 26, an image such as "○○ RUSH enters! 100 times" is displayed, which is the opening effect of the time-saving game state.

With such a notification mode, if the reach is executed, it is possible to have expectations for the transition to the time-saving gaming state due to trigger 1 until the symbol is confirmed and displayed, and if the reach is not executed, the symbol will be displayed. As soon as the variable game starts, the user can be made aware of the transition to the time-saving gaming state due to Opportunity 2. In particular, if the reach is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player from being careless by having the player grasp the transition to the time-saving gaming state due to opportunity 2 as soon as the symbol variation game starts. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game in the middle of the symbol variation game and not being able to obtain the benefit of shifting to the time-saving gaming state.

(Notification mode in a game where the normal game state game number counter reaches a predetermined counter)
Next, as a supplement to FIG. 56, an example of a notification mode in a game in which the normal game state game number counter reaches a predetermined counter (for example, "1000") will be described using FIG. 59.
FIG. 59 shows a notification mode on the image display device 26 when there are restrictions on selectable variation patterns (reach is always selected), and is a different example from FIG. 58.

When the reach is performed, as mentioned above, an image saying "Battle has begun!" is displayed. Then, if the judgment result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (for example, special symbol C), an image in which the player's character image has won against the enemy character image is displayed, and the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process is a win (for example, special symbol C). If the game is a loss, an image in which the player's character image is defeated by the enemy character image is displayed. For example, in the case of a win, an image such as "WIN!" or a sub-symbol "444" is displayed on the image display device 26, and in the case of a loss, an image such as "LOSE..." is displayed on the image display device 26. , and the sub-pattern "434" are displayed.
In addition, if the judgment result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit and the above-mentioned reversal effect is performed (reversal hit), an image such as "LOSE..." or a sub-symbol "434" will be displayed once. After that, an image such as "WIN!" and a sub-symbol "444" are displayed.

Then, in the case of a win, the winning game is then started, and an image such as "Starting the winning game!" is displayed on the image display device 26. Then, when the winning game ends, the game shifts to a time-saving game state.
In addition, in the case of a loss, after the losing symbol is confirmed and displayed, the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state. Then, on the image display device 26, an image such as "○○ RUSH enters! 100 times" is displayed, which is the opening effect of the time-saving game state.

With such a notification mode, it is possible to have expectations for the transition to the time-saving gaming state based on opportunity 1 until the symbols are displayed in a final manner. Thereby, the transition to the time-saving gaming state due to opportunity 2 is not determined too soon, and the player's interest in playing the game can be maintained.

(Regarding the time-saving gaming state that was transitioned to at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state that was transitioned to at opportunity 2)
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the time-saving gaming state to which the game is transferred at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state to which it is transitioned to at opportunity 2 will be explained. In addition, FIG. 60 is a simple time chart explaining the time-saving gaming state that transitioned to opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state that transitioned to opportunity 2 (particularly the display mode in the time-saving gaming state). Note that the description of parts that overlap with those in FIG. 54 may be omitted as appropriate.

First, opportunity 1 assumes that the player wins the winning game (special symbol C) at timing (a) (he did not win, and the symbol related to the winning was confirmed and displayed). In this case, a winning game is executed at timing (b). Here, in a winning game, game result information can be displayed during a round or at the winning game ending. The game result information corresponds to a winning game number image 26x showing the number of winning games and a total prize ball number image 26v showing the number of prize balls obtained in the winning games. Then, when the winning game ends at timing (b), the state shifts to the time-saving game state from timing (b).

In the time-saving gaming state, game result information can be displayed continuously, and in addition, a possible number of games image 26y showing the number of possible games in the time-saving gaming state is displayed.
Timing (c) indicates the timing at which the symbol variation game has been played "100" times in the time-saving gaming state. That is, the time-saving game state ends at timing (c) and shifts to the time-saving game state ending (time-saving ED). At this time, on the image display device 26, the possible number of games image 26y is displayed as "0 times remaining", and an image (time saving end) indicating that the time saving gaming state has ended is displayed. Note that game result information can continue to be displayed even in the time saving ED.

Note that the game result information may display game results for a predetermined period. The predetermined period corresponds to one winning game (period of winning game → time-saving game state), for example, when the special symbol C is won in the normal game state and the time-saving game state is entered. Also, for example, if you hit special symbol C in the normal gaming state and shift to the time-saving gaming state, and then in that time-saving gaming state, hit special symbol F again and shift to the time-saving gaming state, you will win twice. The game (winning game → time-saving game state → winning game → period of time-saving game state) corresponds to this period.

Next, trigger 2 assumes that the normal gaming state game number counter becomes "0" at timing (a) (at the time when the main RAM is cleared, when the time-saving gaming state ends or when the time-saving gaming state starts). There is. It is assumed that from then on, the symbol variation game was played ``1000'' times without winning a winning game. That is, at timing (b), the normal game state game number counter is "1000".

Then, from timing (b), the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state. In this time-saving gaming state, the image display device 26 can display the possible number of games image 26y, but cannot display the game result information. That is, unlike opportunity 1, opportunity 2 does not shift to the time-saving game state through a winning game, so in the case of opportunity 2, game result information is not displayed.

Timing (c) indicates the timing at which the symbol variation game has been played "100" times in the time-saving gaming state. That is, the time-saving game state ends at timing (c) and shifts to the time-saving game state ending (time-saving ED). At this time, on the image display device 26, the possible number of games image 26y is displayed as "0 times remaining", and an image (time saving end) indicating that the time saving gaming state has ended is displayed. Note that game result information continues to be unable to be displayed even in the time saving ED.

Note that the "100" symbol variation game (loss) in the time-saving gaming state corresponds to the fulfillment of the end condition of the time-saving gaming state, but the timing for executing the time-saving ED may be any timing. For example, the time saving ED may be executed during the execution of the ``100'' symbol variation game (loss), or the time saving ED may be executed after the confirmation display of the ``100'' symbol variation game (loss). . If it is the former, the game result information will be displayed during the execution of the "100" symbol variation game (loss), and if it is the latter, the final display of the "100" symbol variation game (loss) will be displayed. Game result information will be displayed later. Note that when the time saving ED is executed during the execution of the "100" symbol variation game (loss), the time saving ED is started at the start of the symbol variation game, and when the time saving ED is finished, the symbols are displayed as confirmed.

Furthermore, even if the "100" symbol variation game in the time saving gaming state is a win (step S105-2-9), the time saving ED may be executed during the "100" symbol variation game. . In this case, by executing the time-saving ED, it is sufficient to pretend that the time-saving gaming state has ended and to notify that the game has won in a reverse manner. Thereby, the execution of the time-saving ED does not necessarily notify the end of the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest.

In this way, in the time-saving gaming state and the ending of the time-saving gaming state, if the opportunity is 1, the game result information is displayed, but if the opportunity is 2, the game result information is not displayed. Thereby, it becomes easy to understand which trigger caused the transition to the time-saving gaming state based on whether or not game result information is displayed.
Note that any background image may be used especially in the time-saving game state (as will be mentioned in Fig. 64), but it is more effective if the same background image is used for opportunity 1 and opportunity 2. In other words, although it is not known from the background image when the transition to the time-saving gaming state occurred, it is possible to grasp the trigger when the transition to the time-saving gaming state occurred based on the presence or absence of display of game result information.
As described above, in the time-saving gaming state, suitable display according to the situation is possible.

In addition, in the time saving ED, an image related to "setting suggestion" or an "absorption prevention" image for preventing excessive gaming may be displayed. The image related to "setting suggestion" is an image that suggests which setting value is set when the above-mentioned plurality of setting values are provided. For example, by providing an image that can be selected only when setting value 6 is set, it is possible for the player to definitely understand that an advantageous setting value has been set. There is.
The "addiction prevention" image is one that displays a message image such as "Please play the game machine moderately", and can be displayed in, for example, a winning game ED or a time saving ED.

Then, such an image may be displayed in both the time saving ED of opportunity 1 and the time saving ED of opportunity 2, or one time saving ED may be displayed but the other time saving ED may not be displayed. Further, as for images related to "setting suggestion", for example, the time saving ED of opportunity 2 may make it easier to select a setting suggestion image that definitely notifies a specific setting value. In Opportunity 1, the player is able to obtain a prize ball through the winning game, but in Opportunity 2, since the winning game is not involved, the player is at a disadvantage compared to Opportunity 1 when the time-saving game state ends. I can say that. Therefore, by making it easier to select a setting suggestion image that definitively informs the player of a specific setting value, useful information can be provided to the player, and it is possible to prevent Opportunity 2 from being disadvantageous.

Note that in addition to the image such as "Hit the ball to the right" shown in FIG. 60, an image such as "Aim to the right!" may be displayed. For example, the image "Hit the right" shown in FIG. 60 is an image that is always displayed when it is optimal to "hit the right," but the image "Aim to the right!" This is an image that is displayed sporadically. For example, if it is trigger 1, it will be displayed at timing (a) in FIG. 60 (trigger 1), and will not be displayed at timing (b). Moreover, if it is trigger 2, it will be displayed at timing (b) in FIG. 60 (trigger 2).
As a result, if the trigger is 1, the player has already hit the ball to the right, so it is possible to prevent the player from being bothered. Furthermore, if the opportunity is 2, the player can easily understand the optimal game.

(Regarding the transition to the time-saving gaming state due to trigger 1 and the transition to the time-saving gaming state due to trigger 2)
Next, using FIG. 61, the transition to the time-saving gaming state due to opportunity 1 and the transition to the time-saving gaming state due to opportunity 2 will be explained. In addition, FIG. 61 is a simple time chart explaining the transition to the time-saving gaming state due to opportunity 1 and the transition to the time-saving gaming state due to opportunity 2 (particularly the performance performed before the transition). Note that the description of parts that overlap with those in FIG. 54 may be omitted as appropriate.

First, opportunity 1 assumes that the player wins the winning game (special symbol C) at timing (a) (he did not win, and the symbol related to the winning was confirmed and displayed). In this case, a winning game is executed at timing (b). Here, in the winning game, a promotion effect may be performed to determine whether or not to shift to a variable probability gaming state as the gaming state after the winning game ends. For example, for the promotion effect, the special symbol B is determined and the decorative symbol is a combination of "444", or the special symbol C is determined and the decorative symbol is a combination of "444". It can be executed if In this case, the former results in a successful promotion performance, and the latter results in a failure in the promotion performance.

In the promotion performance, during the winning game, the image display device 26 displays an image such as "Press the button to obtain a probability change!" and an image imitating the performance button 14 to enable the operation of the performance button 14. become

In the example of FIG. 61, it is assumed that the special symbol C has been determined, so as a result of operating the performance button 14, an image indicating that the promotion performance has failed ("× Sorry...・” image) is displayed.

Then, when the winning game ends at timing (b), the game shifts to a time-saving OP, and when the time-saving OP ends at timing (c), it shifts to a time-saving game state.

In this way, in Opportunity 1, before transitioning to the time-saving gaming state (for example, during the winning game after the symbol is confirmed and displayed until transitioning to the time-saving gaming state), the operation means (production button 14) is used. Then, a performance (promotion performance) is performed to determine whether or not to shift to a probability-variable gaming state. In addition, since the promotion performance will result in a transition to the time-saving gaming state if it is a result of failure, it can also be read as a performance indicating whether to transition to the time-saving gaming state (a performance suggesting a transition to the time-saving gaming state). can.

Next, in the trigger 2, it is assumed that the normal game state game number counter becomes "1000" at timing (a) and the special symbol D is confirmed and displayed. Then, a time-saving OP is performed from timing (a) to timing (b), and the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state from timing (b).

In this way, in Opportunity 2, before shifting to the time-saving gaming state (for example, the period from when the symbol is confirmed to displaying until shifting to the time-saving gaming state = time-saving OP), the operation means (production button 14) is used to , no performance is performed as to whether or not to shift to the time-saving gaming state.
In this way, in opportunity 1, before transitioning to the time-saving game state, a performance is performed using the operation means (performance button 14) to determine whether to transition to the time-saving game state, but in trigger 2, the time-saving game Before transitioning to the state, the operation means (performance button 14) is used to perform a performance as to whether or not to transition to the time-saving gaming state.
In particular, in the case of Opportunity 1, if the promotion performance is successful, the game will move to the variable game state, and if the promotion performance is unsuccessful, it will be shifted to the time-saving game state. It is meaningful to notify whether the transition will occur. On the other hand, in the case of opportunity 2, since the transition to the time-saving gaming state is confirmed (there is no other option), the transition to the time-saving gaming state is made without having to operate the performance button 14 etc., thereby reducing the inconvenience to the player. You can prevent this from happening.
As a result of the above, it becomes possible to suitably perform an effect that suggests a transition to a time-saving gaming state depending on the situation.

(Regarding the transition to the time-saving gaming state due to trigger 1 and the transition to the time-saving gaming state due to trigger 2)
Next, another example of the promotion effect described in FIG. 61 will be explained using FIG. 62. Note that the description of parts that overlap with those in FIG. 61 will be omitted as appropriate.

First, the trigger 1 assumes that the sub-symbol (444) corresponding to the special symbol C is temporarily stopped and displayed at timing (a) (the hit is confirmed for the time being). Note that the symbol variation game continues before and after timing (a).

Thereafter, although not shown, the sub-symbols are vertically scrolled and a re-drawing effect is performed between the temporary stop display and the final display. Note that the re-drawing performance is a performance that allows the sub-symbol that has been temporarily stopped and displayed to be changed to another sub-symbol. For example, when the sub-symbol (444) corresponding to special symbol B is temporarily displayed, In the re-drawing effect, it is possible to change to another sub-symbol (333 = sub-symbol that suggests a transition to a fixed-variable gaming state), and the sub-symbol (444) corresponding to special symbol C is temporarily stopped. In this case, it is impossible to change to another sub-symbol (333 = sub-symbol that suggests a transition to a fixed variable gaming state) in the re-drawing effect, and as a result of performing the re-drawing effect, the sub-symbol (444) ) is a display that is confirmed.

In the example of FIG. 62, it is assumed that the sub-symbol (444) corresponding to the special symbol C is temporarily stopped and displayed, so an image saying "Aim for the UP symbol!" and an image imitating the production button 14 are displayed. Even if the sub-symbol is displayed and the re-drawing effect is executed, the sub-symbol that is confirmed to be displayed will be "444".
Then, after passing through the winning game, the state shifts to the time-saving game state.

Note that in opportunity 2, such a re-drawing effect will not be performed. That is, at timing (a), the sub-symbol (526) corresponding to the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, at timing (b), the special symbol D and sub-symbol (526) are displayed as confirmed, and at timing (b), the time-saving OP is displayed. Then, at timing (c), the state shifts to the time-saving gaming state.

In this way, in opportunity 1, a re-drawing effect is performed using the operating means (performance button 14) before the transition to the time-saving gaming state (especially between the temporary stop display and the final display), but in opportunity 2, Before the transition to the time-saving game state (particularly from the temporary stop display to the final display), the re-drawing performance is not performed using the operating means (performance button 14).
Thereby, an effect similar to that described with reference to FIG. 61 can be obtained.

In addition, in the promotion effect shown in FIG. 61 and the re-draw effect shown in FIG. Notification of whether to transition to a gaming state or time-saving gaming state (for example, whether the decorative pattern is a symbol that satisfies the transition to the fixed-variable gaming state or a symbol that satisfies the transition to the time-saving gaming state) Notification performance Applies to.

(Regarding the relationship between the songs that can be output for Trigger 1 and Trigger 2)
Next, using FIG. 63, the relationship between the songs that can be output in trigger 1 and trigger 2 will be explained. In addition, FIG. 63 is a simple time chart illustrating the music that can be outputted when transitioning to the time-saving gaming state at trigger 1 and the music that can be output when transitioning to the time-saving gaming state at trigger 2. Note that the description of parts that overlap with those in FIG. 54 may be omitted as appropriate.

Here, a song is assumed to be, for example, a song (with lyrics, for example) sung by a singer, etc., and it is possible for the player to select one of the songs from a plurality of songs during a winning game or in a probability game state. (cannot be selected in normal gaming mode). This makes it possible to lift the player's mood during a winning game or during a game with variable probability.

First, the trigger 1 assumes that the special symbol C is confirmed and displayed at timing (a). After that, a winning game will be played until timing (b).
In this winning game, music can be selected, and in the example of FIG. 63, it is assumed that music A is selected by the player operating the effect button 14. Then, when the song A is selected, the speaker 10 outputs the song A.

Then, when the winning game ends at timing (b), the game shifts to a time-saving OP, and when the time-saving OP ends at timing (c), it shifts to a time-saving game state. In the time-saving game state, the time-saving BGM is output from the speaker 10.

Here, the time-saving BGM is assumed to be, for example, a melody without lyrics of a song sung by a singer or the like, and in the time-saving game state, a single time-saving BGM is output.

Next, in the trigger 2, it is assumed that the normal game state game number counter becomes "1000" at timing (a) and the special symbol D is confirmed and displayed. Then, a time-saving OP is performed from timing (a) to timing (b), and the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state from timing (b).
Then, in the time-saving game state, the speaker 10 outputs the same time-saving BGM as in opportunity 1.

Comparing Opportunity 1 and Opportunity 2 above, the number of songs that can be output from the time the symbol is confirmed to the time saving game state is greater in Opportunity 1 than in Opportunity 2 due to the winning game. In a relationship. Thereby, added value can be added to the player who has obtained the right to shift to the time-saving gaming state through the winning game. In addition, in the opportunity 1, the music selected in the winning game may be output as is in the time-saving game state, or music selection may be made possible even in the time-saving game state. Thereby, additional value can be added to Opportunity 1.

(Regarding the time-saving gaming state that was transitioned to at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state that was transitioned to at opportunity 2)
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the time-saving gaming state to which the game was transferred at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state to which it was transitioned to at opportunity 2 will be explained. In addition, FIG. 64 is a simple time chart explaining the background image etc. of the time-saving gaming state to which it transitioned in opportunity 1, and the time-saving gaming state to which it transitioned to opportunity 2. Note that the description of parts that overlap with those in FIG. 54 may be omitted as appropriate.

First, the trigger 1 assumes that the special symbol C is confirmed and displayed at timing (a). After that, a winning game will be played until timing (b). Then, when the winning game ends at timing (b), the game shifts to a time-saving OP, and when the time-saving OP ends at timing (c), it shifts to a time-saving game state.

In the time-saving game state, the image display device 26 displays, for example, a background image of a car running on a road. Further, the speaker 10 outputs the time-saving medium BGM1 corresponding to the background image.

Next, in the trigger 2, it is assumed that the normal game state game number counter becomes "1000" at timing (a) and the special symbol D is confirmed and displayed. Then, a time-saving OP is performed from timing (a) to timing (b), and the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state from timing (b).

In the time-saving game state, for example, a background image that looks like a mountain is displayed on the image display device 26. Further, the speaker 10 outputs the time-saving medium BGM 2 corresponding to the background image.

Comparing Opportunity 1 and Opportunity 2, the background image in the time-saving game state and the BGM during time-saving are made to be different between the time-saving game state shifted to at opportunity 1 and the time-saving game state shifted to at opportunity 2. This makes it easy to understand when the time-saving game state was entered, and also prevents the time-saving game state from becoming a rut due to differences in background images and BGM.

In addition, in FIG. 64, the background image in the time-saving gaming state and the BGM during time-saving were made different between the time-saving gaming state that was shifted to at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state that was shifted to at opportunity 2; The background image in the time-saving gaming state and the BGM during the time-saving may be the same between the gaming state and the time-saving gaming state shifted to at opportunity 2. In this way, there is no need to change the background image or BGM depending on the occasion, which can contribute to data reduction.

(About the production mode in the normal gaming state after the end of the time-saving gaming state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the production mode in the normal gaming state after the end of the time-saving gaming state will be explained. Note that up to timing (b), the content is the same as, for example, in FIG. 64, so the explanation will be omitted.

Both the time-saving gaming state shifted to at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state shifted to at opportunity 2, when the time-saving gaming state is ended at timing (b), the state shifts to the normal gaming state. In the normal game state immediately after the end of this time-saving game state, a transition is made to a special mode as an effect mode.

This special mode is designed to shift only in the normal gaming state immediately after the end of the time-saving gaming state. For example, in the normal gaming state after ending the special mode, there are three modes: production mode A, production mode B, production mode. Even if it is possible to switch the production mode between C (all normal modes), it is impossible to switch to the special mode.

That is, the special mode is positioned as a special production mode that can only be transitioned to in the normal gaming state immediately after the end of the time-saving gaming state. In this way, by providing an effect mode that can be entered only in the normal gaming state immediately after the end of the time-saving gaming state, it is possible to display background images, etc. that are unfamiliar to the player, as if the time-saving gaming state continues. This will give you the feeling of being there. This prevents the player from quitting the game at the end of the time-saving game state.

Note that in the special mode, effects that are not executed in the normal mode may be executed. For example, a mini-game using the performance button 14 or the like (for example, a performance in which the performance button 14 is pressed in time with the rhythm), a pseudo continuous performance may be made to occur frequently, or the above-mentioned setting suggestions may occur frequently. You can do it like this.

Note that the special mode ends when a specified number of symbol variation games (for example, 20 times) have been executed, and timing (c) indicates the timing at which the specified number of symbol variation games have been executed. Then, at timing (c), the special mode is ended and the mode is shifted to the normal mode.

In this way, no matter which trigger causes the time-saving game state to be shifted to, after the time-saving game state ends, the mode is always shifted to the special mode. Thereby, for example, it is possible to increase the chances of shifting to the special mode, and further improve the interest in the game. In particular, when suggesting useful information in the special mode (for example, when making the above-mentioned setting suggestion), it is effective to increase the chances of transition in this way.

(Regarding the time-saving gaming state that was transitioned to at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state that was transitioned to at opportunity 2)
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the time-saving gaming state to which the game is transferred at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state to which it is transitioned to at opportunity 2 will be explained. In addition, FIG. 66 is a simple time chart explaining the relationship of the degree of advantage between the time-saving gaming state (in appearance) shifted to opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state shifted to opportunity 2. Note that the description of parts that overlap with those in FIG. 54 may be omitted as appropriate.

First, in trigger 1, it is assumed that special symbol A is definitively displayed at timing (a), and the symbol combination of "444" is definitively displayed as a sub symbol. After that, a winning game will be played until timing (b). Then, when the winning game ends at timing (b), the game shifts to a time-saving OP, and when the time-saving OP ends at timing (c), it shifts to a time-saving game state.

In the time-saving game state, the image display device 26 displays, for example, a background image that looks like a car running on a road (a background image that suggests the time-saving game state). Further, the speaker 10 outputs the time-saving medium BGM1 corresponding to the background image.
In this way, although the appearance of the image display device 26 and the BGM output from the speaker 10 correspond to the time-saving gaming state, the actual gaming state is a variable probability gaming state.

Next, in the trigger 2, it is assumed that the normal game state game number counter becomes "1000" at timing (a) and the special symbol D is confirmed and displayed. Then, a time-saving OP is performed from timing (a) to timing (b), and the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state from timing (b). Then, the same background image and BGM as in trigger 1 are output. In addition, in the case of opportunity 2, the actual gaming state is never a variable probability gaming state, but always becomes a time saving gaming state.

Comparing Opportunity 1 and Opportunity 2, while the background image and BGM during the time-saving gaming state are the same between the time-saving gaming state transitioned to in Opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state transitioning to Opportunity 2, in the case of Opportunity 1, , the possibility that the actual gaming state is a variable gaming state is also included. As a result, between the time-saving gaming state that was shifted to at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state that was shifted to at opportunity 2, the time-saving gaming state that was shifted to at opportunity 1 may be more advantageous. Therefore, while data reduction is achieved by standardizing background image data and BGM data, it is possible to prevent the time-saving gaming state itself from becoming monotonous (feeling that the probability is always low).

(Regarding the time-saving gaming state that was transitioned to at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state that was transitioned to at opportunity 2)
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the time-saving gaming state to which the game is transferred at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state to which it is transitioned to at opportunity 2 will be explained. In addition, FIG. 67 is a simple time chart illustrating performance selection between the time-saving gaming state that is shifted to at opportunity 1 in the variable probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state that is shifted to at opportunity 2. Note that the description of parts that overlap with those in FIG. 54 may be omitted as appropriate.

First, although not specifically mentioned above, the performance executed in the variable probability game state may be selected by the player by operating the performance button 14, etc., for example, if the special symbol A hits the winning game. In this case, in the final round or ending of the winning game, one can be selected from a plurality of performance elements (see the image display device 26 at timing (a) of opportunity 2).

As the performance element, for example, "Character A", "Character B", and "Character C" are displayed as options, and the player can select any one of them. If "Character A" is selected, the production corresponding to "Character A" is executed, and if "Character B" is selected, the production corresponding to "Character B" is executed, and the production corresponding to "Character A" is executed. When "Character C" is selected, a performance corresponding to "Character C" is executed.

In the example of opportunity 1, it is assumed that "character A" has been selected in the variable probability gaming state. In other words, "Character A" is displayed on the image display device 26, and a corresponding effect is being executed.

The timing (a) of opportunity 1 assumes that the special symbol F has been confirmed and displayed. After that, a winning game will be played until timing (b). Then, from timing (c), the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state.

Then, in the time-saving game state, the performance elements selected in the variable probability game state are inherited. That is, in the example of opportunity 1, it is assumed that "Character A" was selected in the variable probability game state, so the performance corresponding to "Character A" is executed even in the time-saving game state. It should be noted that between the variable probability game state and the time-saving game state, what is inherited is only the "character", and the background image and performance contents are different. For example, in a variable game state, an effect is executed in which "Character A" plays against multiple types of characters, but in a time-saving game state, an effect is executed in which "Character A" plays against a single character. be done.

Note that the period (number of games) to be taken over in the time-saving gaming state may be any period (number). For example, it may be possible to carry over the entire period (100 games) of the time-saving game state (it is not possible to change to another character), or it may be possible to carry over only the first game in the time-saving game state, and then proceed to the next game. It may also be possible to change from the character to another character. Furthermore, although the first game starts with the inherited character, it may be possible to change to another character during the symbol variation game. Further, when changing to another character during the symbol variation game, only the selection operation may be accepted and the change to the other character may be made in the next game.
If it is carried over for all periods, it is possible to maintain consistency in the production. Furthermore, if it is possible to change to another character, for example, by changing to another character, it is possible to play the time-saving game state with a new feeling.

Next, at timing (a) of trigger 2, it is assumed that the normal game state game number counter becomes "1000" and the special symbol D is confirmed and displayed. Then, a time-saving OP is performed from timing (a) to timing (b), and the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state from timing (b).

Then, using the time-saving OP time, a plurality of characters and an image imitating the performance button 14 are displayed on the image display device 26, and a performance is performed to prompt the user to select a character by operating the performance button 14. .

In the example of trigger 2, it is assumed that character A is selected by the player, and the performance corresponding to character A is executed in the time-saving game state after timing (b).
In this way, even in the time-saving game state, the performance corresponding to the character selected by the player is executed, so that the game interest in the time-saving game state can be improved. In addition, even in the time-saving game state that transitioned to in trigger 2, a time is provided for the player to select a character, and during the time-saving game state, similar to trigger 1, by executing the production corresponding to the selected character, " A certain sense of satisfaction can be given to a player who did not get a winning game over 1000" symbol variation games.

Note that the characters that can be selected for opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 may be set in any manner. As described above, the selectable characters in the trigger 1 and the trigger 2 may be the same, some of the characters may be the same, or the selectable characters may be completely different.
If the selectable characters are the same, for example, even if trigger 1 is not satisfied, by satisfying trigger 2, the same performance (performance by character) as the time-saving game state transitioned to due to trigger 1 can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction.
If the selectable characters are made different (in part or in whole), there will be effects (characters) that can only be performed at each opportunity, so it is necessary to stimulate the player's desire to play so that all opportunities are satisfied. Can be done.

(About an example of updating the number of games counter in normal game state)
Next, an example of updating the normal game state game number counter (see FIG. 9) will be explained using FIG. 69.

Timing (a) is the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is ended or the timing at which the main RAM 103 is initialized (cleared). Therefore, at timing (a), the normal gaming state game number counter is "0", and the normal gaming state starts from timing (a).

Timing (b) assumes that a game ball enters the first starting port 21 and a symbol variation game corresponding to the entry is executed. In this case, the prize ball is paid out in response to the ball entering the first starting port 21, and the normal game state game number counter is incremented by 1.

Timing (c) assumes that a game ball enters the second starting port 22 and a symbol variation game corresponding to the entered ball is executed. In this case, a prize ball is paid out for the ball that enters the second starting port 22, and the normal game state game number counter is incremented by "1".

In this way, the normal game state game number counter is updated when a ball enters the first starting port 21 in the normal gaming state and a symbol variation game corresponding to the entering ball is executed, and the number of games in the normal gaming state is updated. It is also updated when a ball enters the ball and a symbol variation game corresponding to the ball enters the ball.

With such a configuration, if a game ball accidentally enters the second starting port 22, the special symbol hit determination process based on the ball entering the second starting port 22 (which is more advantageous than the first starting port 21) At the same time, the normal game state game number counter is also updated, making the player feel like he has won and further improving his enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the updated example of FIG. 69, in particular, the first starting port 21 and the second starting port 22 are arranged vertically side by side, and the ball can be hit left-handed (or right-handed) into either starting port. It is more suitable if it is used in a board configuration where this is possible.

(About an example of updating the number of games counter in normal game state)
Next, an example (another example 1) of updating the normal game state game number counter (see FIG. 9) will be described using FIG. 70.

Timing (a) is the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is ended or the timing at which the main RAM 103 is initialized (cleared). Therefore, at timing (a), the normal gaming state game number counter is "0", and the normal gaming state starts from timing (a).

In addition, the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is ended may be read as the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is started.

Timing (b) assumes that a game ball enters the first starting port 21 and a symbol variation game corresponding to the entry is executed. In this case, the prize ball is paid out in response to the ball entering the first starting port 21, and the normal game state game number counter is incremented by 1.

Timing (c) and timing (d) indicate that two game balls entered the second starting port 22 when the second starting port 22 opened once in 0.9 seconds. There is. That is, timing (c) is the first ball entering the ball, and timing (d) is the second ball entering the ball.

In this case, timing (c) can be treated similarly to timing (c) in FIG. 69. However, the second ball entering at timing (d) is treated as invalid. That is, the symbol variation game corresponding to the second ball entering is not executed, the prize ball payout for the ball entering the second starting port 22 is not performed, and the normal game state game number counter is not updated. In addition, as an example, it is assumed that two game balls enter the ball when the second starting port 22 is opened once, but it goes without saying that the third and subsequent balls are similarly treated as invalid.

With this configuration, for example, the act of illegally opening the second starting port 22 and attempting to receive a special symbol hit determination process based on the ball entering the second starting port 22, or the normal game state game. This acts as a deterrent to the act of updating several counters.

In addition, in the updated example of FIG. 70, the first starting port 21 and the second starting port 22 are arranged vertically, and it is possible to enter the ball into either starting port by hitting left (or right). The board configuration is such that the first starting port 21 and the second starting port 22 are spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and the ball is hit left-handed into the first starting port 21 and hit right into the second starting port 22. It is suitable for any board configuration in which this is possible.

(About an example of updating the number of games counter in normal game state)
Next, an example (another example 2) of updating the normal game state game number counter (see FIG. 9) will be described using FIG. 71.

Timing (a) is the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is ended or the timing at which the main RAM 103 is initialized (cleared). Therefore, at timing (a), the normal gaming state game number counter is "0", and the normal gaming state starts from timing (a).

In addition, the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is ended may be read as the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is started.

Timing (b) assumes that a game ball enters the first starting port 21 and a symbol variation game corresponding to the entry is executed. In this case, the prize ball is paid out in response to the ball entering the first starting port 21, and the normal game state game number counter is incremented by 1.

Timing (c) indicates that a game ball has entered the second starting port 22, but in the updated example of FIG. 71, even if it is the first ball that enters, It may be handled in the same way as timing (d).

With this configuration, for example, if the optimal game is not being played, it is possible to not execute the symbol variation game, not pay out prize balls, or not update the normal game state game counter. This notifies the player that he or she is not playing the optimal game, and can encourage the player to play the optimal game.

In addition, in the updated example of FIG. 71, in particular, the first starting port 21 and the second starting port 22 are arranged spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and the first starting port 21 is left-handed, and the second starting port 22 is left-handed. It is more suitable for use in a board configuration that allows the ball to be hit by right-handed hits.

In addition, in the above-mentioned normal gaming state, even if the probability of being determined as a loss in the normal symbol hit determination process is set to "256/256", as shown in FIG. The normal game state game number counter may be updated by ball entry and execution of the symbol variation game.

Next, using FIGS. 72 and 73, the display mode of the time-saving gaming state (particularly the display mode at the end) and the display mode in the scene where the time-saving gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, etc. will be explained. Note that in FIGS. 72 and 73, there are some parts of the image display device 26 that are described only necessary for explanation and omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 72(a) shows a scene in which there are four remaining time-saving game states. That is, the possible number of games image 26y indicating the remaining number of possible games in the time-saving gaming state is displayed as "4 times remaining".
Further, in this scene, it is assumed that the player is hitting the ball to the right and is causing the game ball to enter the second starting port 22. That is, the sub-symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the second special symbol holding display 27d is "blinking together" indicating that the number of pending items is "4", and the variable icon display area 26o, 2nd starting port 1st held ball image display area 26k, 2nd starting port 2nd held ball image display area 26l, 2nd starting port 3rd held ball image display area 26m, 2nd starting port 4th held ball image display area Icons are displayed at 26n, and each icon is positioned at the initial position (0) and executes an action effect. The motion performance will be described later using FIG. 74.

FIG. 72(b) shows a scene where there are three remaining time-saving game states. That is, the possible number of games image 26y indicating the remaining number of possible games in the time-saving gaming state is displayed as "3 times remaining".
Further, in this scene, it is assumed that the player is hitting the ball to the right and is causing the game ball to enter the second starting port 22. That is, the sub-symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the second special symbol holding display 27d is "blinking together" indicating that the number of pending items is "4", and the variable icon display area 26o, 2nd starting port 1st held ball image display area 26k, 2nd starting port 2nd held ball image display area 26l, 2nd starting port 3rd held ball image display area 26m, 2nd starting port 4th held ball image display area Icons are displayed at 26n, and each icon is located at the action position (2) and executes an action effect. The operating position (2) will be described later using FIG. 74.

FIG. 72(c) is a scene of the final change in the time-saving gaming state. That is, the possible number of games image 26y indicating the remaining number of possible games in the time-saving gaming state is displayed as "0 times remaining".
Further, in this scene, it is assumed that the player is hitting the ball to the right and is causing the game ball to enter the second starting port 22. That is, the sub-symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the second special symbol holding display 27d is "blinking together" indicating that the number of pending items is "4", and the variable icon display area 26o, 2nd starting port 1st held ball image display area 26k, 2nd starting port 2nd held ball image display area 26l, 2nd starting port 3rd held ball image display area 26m, 2nd starting port 4th held ball image display area Icons are displayed at 26n, and each icon is located at the action position (1) and executes an action effect. The operating position (1) will be described later using FIG. 74.

FIG. 72(d) is a scene in which the final change in the time-saving gaming state is confirmed and displayed. That is, a display of "time saving end" informing that the time saving game state has ended and the sub-symbols are confirmed and displayed as "5, 1, 6", for example.
In addition, in this scene, the second special symbol reservation display 27d is performing "both blinking" indicating that the number of reservations is "4", but with the confirmation display, the corresponding variable icon display area 26o is The fluctuation icon is hidden, and the second starting port first held ball image display area 26k, the second starting port second held ball image display area 26l, and the second starting port third held ball image display on the image display device 26 are The holding icons in the area 26m and the second starting port fourth holding ball image display area 26n are also all hidden.
Note that only the icons may be hidden and each display area may remain displayed.

FIG. 73(e) shows the first variation after the time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state (the symbol corresponding to the holding icon displayed in the second starting port first holding ball image display area 26k in FIG. 72) is shown in FIG. fluctuation game). That is, a left-handed hitting image is displayed that encourages left-handed hitting. It is assumed that the player does not launch the game ball into the game area 7.

In addition, in this scene, the sub-symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the second special symbol holding display 27d displays "one blinking and the other lighting" indicating that the number of pending is "3". However, the variable icon display area 26o, the second starting port first held ball image display area 26k, the second starting port second held ball image display area 26l, the second starting port third held ball image display area 26m, and the second starting port third held ball image display area 26m. No icon is displayed in the second starting port fourth held ball image display area 26n.

That is, in the time-saving game state of FIG. 72(c), in particular, the second starting port first held ball image display area 26k, the second starting port second held ball image display area 26l, and the second starting port third held ball image When executing the symbol variation game corresponding to the icon displayed in the display area 26m and the second starting port fourth held ball image display area 26n in the normal game state where the game state has changed, As shown in f), (g), and (h), the symbol variation game is executed without displaying the variation icon and the pending icon on the image display device 26. Thereby, it is possible to encourage the player to enter the game ball into the first starting port 21. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously believing that the time-saving game state has not ended.

In addition, in FIG. 73(e), since it is the first variation in the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state game number counter is incremented by "1" as the symbol variation game is executed, and the value of the counter becomes "1". It becomes.
In this way, if a ball enters the starting hole in the time-saving gaming state and the execution of the symbol variation game corresponding to the entering ball enters the normal gaming state, then the ball enters the starting slot and the execution of the symbol variation game corresponding to the entering ball is suspended and the normal gaming state is entered. When the symbol variation game is executed, the normal game state game number counter is updated.
As a result, if more determination information is stored in the time-saving gaming state, for example, up to the "fourth storage area", the counter will be updated by the amount stored, although there is an upper limit, so the player can It can give you a feeling of accomplishment.

FIG. 73(f) shows the second variation when the time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state returns (corresponding to the holding icon displayed in the second starting port second holding ball image display area 26l in FIG. 72). The second special symbol pending display 27d shows that "both lights up" indicating that the number of pending symbols is "2" is being executed.
In addition, in FIG. 73(f), since this is the second variation in the normal gaming state, when the symbol variation game is executed, the normal gaming state game number counter is incremented by "1", and the value of the counter becomes "2". It becomes.

In addition, FIG. 73(g) shows the third variation when the time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state returns (corresponding to the holding icon displayed in the second starting port third holding ball image display area 26m in FIG. 72). The second special symbol holding display 27d shows that "one is lit and the other is off" indicating that the number of pending is "1" is being executed. .
In addition, in FIG. 73(g), since it is the third variation in the normal gaming state, when the symbol variation game is executed, the normal gaming state game number counter is incremented by "1", and the value of the counter becomes "3". It becomes.

In addition, FIG. 73(h) shows the fourth variation (corresponding to the holding icon displayed in the second starting port fourth holding ball image display area 26n in FIG. 72) when the time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state returns. The second special symbol pending display 27d indicates that "both lights out" indicating that the number of pending symbols is "0" is being executed.
In addition, in FIG. 73(h), since it is the fourth variation in the normal gaming state, when the symbol variation game is executed, the normal gaming state game number counter is incremented by "1", and the value of the counter becomes "4". It becomes.

In this way, when executing a symbol variation game corresponding to a game ball that has entered the second starting port 22 in the time-saving gaming state, the symbol variation game is executed without displaying the variation icon and the pending icon on the image display device 26. Run the game. In other words, in the time-saving gaming state, for example, an action presentation is executed as shown in FIG. 72(c), but in the normal gaming state, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, the action presentation by the corresponding hold icon is not executed. I can say that. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the time-saving gaming state has not ended.

Note that the examples shown in FIGS. 72 and 73 are merely examples, and may be modified as appropriate.
For example, in FIG. 73, each time the symbol variation game is started, the symbol variation game may be started by displaying the variation icon only in the variation icon display area 26o. That is, the motion performance may not be performed, but the individual motion performance may be performed. As a result, at least the icon corresponding to the change is displayed, so that it is possible to alleviate the feeling of discomfort to the player. In addition, the player can be entertained by executing the solo action effect.

Furthermore, although FIGS. 72 and 73 have been described using the example of a transition from a time-saving gaming state to a normal gaming state, the present invention is not limited to this, and includes a gaming state transition such as shifting from a variable probability gaming state to a normal gaming state. In this case, it may be applied at the time of transition from the variable probability gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Furthermore, it may be applied when transitioning from the normal gaming state to the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state. For example, the first starting port first held ball image display area 26g, the first starting port second held ball image display area 26h, the first starting port third held ball image display area 26i, the first starting port fourth held ball image If the hold icon is displayed in all of the display area 26j and the game shifts to a winning game, the same thing will happen in the time saving game state or the variable probability game state after the winning game ends (in this case, the first holding ball image at the first starting opening Symbol variations corresponding to the holding icons in the display area 26g, the first starting port second held ball image display area 26h, the first starting port third held ball image display area 26i, and the first starting port fourth held ball image display area 26j The game may be run without displaying an icon). Further, each time the symbol variation game is started, the symbol variation game may be started by displaying the variation icon only in the variation icon display area 26o.

Furthermore, there is no problem even if the symbol variation game is executed with all the icons displayed in FIG. 73. That is, in the time-saving game state, for example, an action effect is executed as shown in FIG. 72(c), and there is no problem even if the action effect is executed in the normal game state as well.

Next, details of the above-mentioned motion effect will be explained using FIG. 74. The action performance is a display performance using the relevant fluctuating icon or pending icon. Note that the motion performance performed when only the variable icon is displayed is a single motion performance, and the motion performance performed when the fluctuation icon and at least one pending icon are displayed is a synchronous motion performance.

As shown in FIG. 74(a), the icon is formed in a diamond shape, and the image display device 26 includes a first starting port first held ball image display area 26g, a first starting port second held ball image display area 26h, 1st starting port 3rd held ball image display area 26i, 1st starting port 4th held ball image 26 display area j, 2nd starting port 1st held ball image display area 26k, 2nd starting port 2nd held ball image When displayed in the display area 26l, the second starting port third held ball image display area 26m, the second starting port fourth held ball image display area 26n, or the variable icon display area 26o, the icon shown in FIG. 74(a) The motion performance (display) shown in is performed.

In the action rendering (display), as shown in Figure 74(a), the diamond-shaped icon is rotated horizontally, and the icon moves from the initial position (0) to (1) → (2) → (3). )→(4)→(5)→(6)→(7), and returns to the initial position (0) again. That is, the numbers in parentheses shown in FIG. 74(a) indicate the operating position of the icon.

In FIG. 74(b), as an example, icons (usually colored (white) icons) are displayed, indicating that each icon is performing an action (display).
In this case, the action effects (displays) of the three icons are synchronized (all icons change to the same action position at the same timing), and when multiple icons are displayed, they are designed so that they do not spoil the aesthetic appearance. Efforts have been made.

(Second embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In the second embodiment below, only the parts that are different from the first embodiment described above will be explained, and the explanation of the parts common to the first embodiment will be omitted as appropriate.
The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment mainly in the specifications of variable probability gaming states.

(About the special symbol hit determination table, normal symbol hit determination table, and gaming status details)
FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating the special symbol winning determination table, normal symbol winning determination table, and gaming state details according to the second embodiment. In particular, the difference from the first embodiment is that the probability in the variable probability gaming state in the special symbol hit determination table is "1/99" for a win and "98/99" for a loss.
In addition, the opening/closing support of the second starting port in the variable probability game state in the details of the game state is in state B until the symbol variation game is played 100 times.
That is, the game specification shown in the second embodiment is a so-called "ST probability variation" (the probability variation gaming state ends at a predetermined upper limit number of times).

FIG. 76 shows a special symbol determination table and a normal symbol determination table according to the second embodiment. Note that the normal symbol determination table is configured similarly to the first embodiment.
In the special symbol determination table, for all of the special symbol A, special symbol B, and special symbol E, the gaming state after winning is a variable probability gaming state, but the "upper limit is 100 times" for all of them. In addition, the selection probabilities of symbols are different from the first embodiment.

In addition, the structure of the special symbol of "ST probability change" is not limited to that shown in FIG. 76, and may be as shown in another example of FIG. 77.
That is, as shown in FIG. 77, for all of the special symbols A, B, and D, the gaming state after winning is a variable probability gaming state, and the upper limit is 100 times. It is not necessary to provide a symbol (special symbol C, special symbol F in FIG. 76) that transitions to a time-saving gaming state as a gaming state after winning as shown in FIG. In other words, it may be set as "ST 100% probability variation".

Next, regarding the control flow in the case of "ST probability variation", the differences from the first embodiment will be mainly explained.
FIG. 78 shows processing by game state according to the second embodiment.
Steps S105-4-12-17 to S105-4-12-31 are the same as in the first embodiment. Then, in step S105-4-12-32, the probability variable gaming state game number counter is updated (added), in step S105-4-12-33, the probability variable gaming state management counter is updated (subtracted), and in step S105-4 If it is determined in -12-34 that the updated variable gaming state management counter value is 0, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state in step S105-4-12-35, and the gaming state is set as the normal gaming state in step S105-4-12-36. A gaming state command (normal) will be set.

FIG. 79 shows the winning game process according to the second embodiment.
The steps up to step S105-5-22 are the same as in the first embodiment. Then, in step S105-5-22, it is determined whether the special symbol A, B, or E has been hit. If it is determined that any of the special symbols has been hit, step S105-5-23 is performed. With the gaming state set as a variable probability gaming state, 100 is set in the variable probability gaming state management counter in step S105-5-24, and a gaming state command (variable probability) is set in step S105-5-25. Then, in step S105-5-26, a value indicating that the machine is stopped is set as a special symbol status flag.
Note that steps S105-5-27 to S105-5-30 are the same as in the first embodiment.

Next, FIG. 80 is a control flow in the case of assuming "ST 100% probability variation", which is another example described above. Note that the processing according to gaming state may be performed using the flow shown in FIG. 78.
In the case of "ST100% probability change", which is another example, when it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, in steps S105-5-31 to S105-5-34, steps S105-5-23 to S105-5-23 in FIG. Processing similar to S105-5-26 is performed.
In the above manner, ST probability variation is realized.

Although not shown, the probability variable gaming state management counter is provided in the counter of the main RAM 103, and is a counter for managing the number of times in ST probability variation. In the second embodiment, 100 is set in the counter, and after that, when one symbol variation game is executed, "1" is subtracted, and when the variable probability game state management counter becomes "0", the variable probability game state is When the game ends, the game returns to the normal gaming state.

(Regarding opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in normal gaming state and fixed variable gaming state)
Next, using FIG. 81, opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the normal gaming state and opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the variable probability gaming state will be explained. In addition, FIG. 81 is a simple time chart explaining the opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the normal gaming state, and the opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the probability variable gaming state (particularly ST probability variation).

Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 in the normal gaming state are the same as those described in FIG. 54, so their explanation will be omitted.
Further, since the trigger 1 in the variable probability gaming state is the same as that described in FIG. 54, the explanation will be omitted.

Opportunity 2 in the variable probability gaming state is that the variable probability gaming state game number counter is "0" at timing (a), and from there, 100 symbol variation games are played consecutively without hitting a winning game. At timing (b), the variable probability gaming state game number counter becomes 100, and the game shifts to the normal gaming state from timing (b).

In other words, among the current pachinko machines equipped with ST kokuhen, for example, those with an upper limit of less than 100 times, those with an upper limit of around 100 times, and those with an upper limit of less than 200 times are mainstream. Therefore, an event such as the variable probability gaming state game number counter reaching 1000 cannot occur while the variable probability gaming state remains in place.

That is, in the variable probability gaming state, the variable probability gaming state game number counter will never reach "1000", and the game will not shift to the time-saving gaming state unlike when the normal gaming state game number counter reaches "1000". . As a result, it is possible to prevent the most advantageous probability-variable gaming state from ending and shifting to a time-saving gaming state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the probability-variable gaming state after failing to obtain the "1000" winning game. It is possible to prevent players from feeling like they have lost.

From the above, in the variable probability gaming state, the time-saving gaming state that is activated (transitioned) by trigger 1 is executable, and the time-saving gaming state that is activated (transitioned) by trigger 2 is not executable. As a result, the same effect as in FIG. 54 can be obtained.

(Third embodiment)
A third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. In the third embodiment below, only the parts different from the first embodiment described above will be explained, and the explanation of the parts common to the first embodiment will be omitted as appropriate.
The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment mainly in the specifications of the variable probability gaming state (the point that the variable probability gaming state ends when the winning lottery occurs).

(About the special symbol hit determination table, normal symbol hit determination table, and gaming status details)
FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating the special symbol winning determination table, normal symbol winning determination table, and gaming state details according to the third embodiment. In particular, the difference from the first embodiment is that the probability in the variable probability gaming state in the special symbol hit determination table is "1/140" for a win and "139/140" for a loss.
In addition, the opening/closing support for the second starting port in the time-saving game state in the game state details is basically state B until the symbol variation game is played 100 times, and as an exception, the number of times state B is changed depending on the winning situation of the falling lottery. (less than 100 times).
In addition, the opening/closing support of the second start opening in the variable probability game state in the game state details remains in state B until the player hits the falling lottery.
That is, the game specification shown in the third embodiment is a so-called "fall probability variation" (the probability variation game state ends with a fall).

Further, the main ROM 102 stores a falling lottery table shown in FIG. 82(C). For example, when a game ball enters the second starting port 22, the random number for the falling lottery is also extracted, so that the random number for the falling lottery is the random number specified as the winning number in the falling lottery table. If it matches, the game state shifts from the variable probability gaming state to the normal gaming state.
Here, in the third embodiment, the probability of winning a fall is set to "1/270".

FIG. 83 shows a special symbol determination table and a normal symbol determination table according to the third embodiment. Note that the normal symbol determination table is configured similarly to the first embodiment.
In the special symbol determination table, the gaming state of special symbol A, special symbol B, and special symbol E after winning is a variable probability gaming state, but all of them are "until falling." In addition, the selection probabilities of symbols are different from the first embodiment.

Next, regarding the control flow in the case of "variable fall probability", the differences from the first embodiment will be mainly explained.
FIG. 84 shows a second starting port detection process according to the third embodiment. Although the process at the time of detecting the first starting port is omitted, the process at the time of detecting the first starting port (that is, when the game ball enters the first starting port 21 in the variable probability gaming state) is also the same process as shown in FIG. It will be done.
A particular difference from the first embodiment is that a random number value for determining a fall is acquired in the process of step S104-2-14. As a result, in the falling lottery process of the special symbol variation start process to be performed later, a falling lottery using the obtained random number value will be performed.

Next, FIG. 85 shows special symbol variation start processing according to the third embodiment.
A particular difference from the first embodiment is that a fall lottery process is performed in step S105-2-26. This process is performed before the special symbol hit determination process, so if you are in a variable probability gaming state and you win the falling lottery, the special symbol hit determination process is performed with a low probability, and the probability is variable game state. Therefore, if the player does not win the falling lottery, a special symbol hit determination process will be performed with a high probability.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S105-2-26 in FIG. 85) showing the falling lottery process.
First, in step S105-2-26-1, it is determined whether the random number for determining a fall is a random number for falling. If it is determined in this process that it is a falling random number, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state in step S105-2-26-2, and the gaming state command (normal ) in the command sending area.
In the above manner, the probability of falling is changed.

(Regarding opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the probability of falling)
Next, using FIG. 87 and FIG. 88, the trigger 1 and trigger 2 in the probability of falling will be explained. Note that FIG. 87 shows opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 88 is a simple time chart showing opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the variable probability gaming state.

FIG. 87 shows opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the normal gaming state. In opportunity 1, when a winning game is won at timing (a), the winning game is executed at timing (b), and then the time-saving gaming state is entered. When the time-saving gaming state is terminated at timing (c), the normal gaming state is entered from timing (c) (same as in FIG. 54).

Trigger 2 assumes that the normal game state game number counter is "0" at timing (a), and from then on, the symbol variation game is played "1000" times in a row without hitting a winning game. . Then, when the normal gaming state game number counter reaches "1000" at timing (b), the time-saving gaming state is executed from there to timing (c), and when the time-saving gaming state ends at timing (c), the time-saving gaming state is executed at timing (c). ) to the normal gaming state (same as in FIG. 54).

FIG. 88 shows opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the variable probability gaming state, and is a diagram specifically explaining a specific example of the opening/closing support of the second starting opening described in the details of the gaming state of FIG. 82.
First, in opportunity 1 case 1, it is assumed that a winning game (special symbol B) is won in the normal gaming state, and the winning game is performed from timing (a) to timing (b). Then, when the winning game ends at timing (b), the state shifts to a variable probability game state from timing (b).

The timing (c) is based on the assumption that, for example, the player wins the falling lottery in the 50th symbol variation game in the probability variation gaming state. In this case, the variable probability gaming state is ended and the time saving gaming state (low probability) is entered from timing (c). In addition, the opening/closing support of the second starting port continues as state B, and the symbol variation game continues in state B 100 times in total in the variable probability game state and the time saving game state (50 times remaining in the example of FIG. 88). Continue until done.

Note that even if the player wins the falling lottery at timing (c), it is preferable that the image display device 26 or the like does not notify that the player has won. That is, in the image display device 26, the background image is not changed, and in the speaker 10, the music and BGM are continued without being changed. In other words, the change in the game state is prevented from being noticed by the player.

Then, at timing (d), when the 100th symbol variation game from timing (b) is completed, the game shifts to the normal gaming state from timing (d).
In the case of case 1, it is preferable to perform a judgment performance to determine whether or not the player has won the falling lottery in the symbol variation game played at timing (d).
In case 1, it is assumed that the person wins the falling lottery at timing (c), so in the judge performance performed at timing (d), a failure performance is executed and it is announced that state B has ended. be done.

Next, in the trigger 1 case 2, the process is the same as the trigger 1 case 1 up to timing (b). Timing (c) indicates the execution of the symbol variation game for the 100th time after the transition to the probability variation gaming state at timing (b). That is, unlike Case 1, it is assumed that no player wins the falling lottery while the symbol variation game is played 100 times in a row in the variable probability gaming state. In this case, in the judge performance described above, a success performance is executed and it is reported that state B continues. Further, after timing (c), it is reported that the game continues to be in a variable probability gaming state.

At timing (d), it is assumed that the player wins the falling lottery in the 150th symbol variation game from timing (b). In this case, the variable probability gaming state is ended and the normal gaming state is entered from timing (d). Further, with the transition to the normal gaming state, state B is ended and state A is entered.
At timing (d), the image display device 26 executes an effect in which the player's character and the enemy character face off, and if the player's character wins, it is a winning game and the player's character wins. If you lose, you will fall down. Therefore, at timing (d), an effect in which the player's character loses is executed.
On the other hand, for example, if a hit is determined in the special symbol hit determination process between timing (c) and timing (d) (for example, the 130th symbol variation game), a similar effect is executed and the effect is As a result, an effect in which the player's character wins (in the case of a win, this effect is executed regardless of the timing) is executed.

In this way, in case 1 of case 1, the symbol variation game is played 100 times as a time-saving game state (low probability) since the player wins the falling lottery before playing the symbol variation game 100 times. Until then, it was set as state B.
On the other hand, in case 1 of opportunity 2, since the player wins the falling lottery after playing the symbol variation game 100 times, the state B is changed to the normal game state from the falling game and ends.
In this way, in the case of Opportunity 1, depending on the timing of winning the falling lottery, the game may or may not shift to the time-saving gaming state.

Next, in case 2, the process is the same as case 1 and case 2 until timing (b). Then, at timing (b), the game state changes to the variable probability game state, and the symbol variation game is executed ``1000'' times without winning the winning game or the falling lottery, and at timing (c), the variable probability game state game number counter changes to `` 1000".
In such a case, state B is also continued as a variable probability gaming state after timing (c). This can prevent players from feeling like they have lost out.

In addition, as described in FIG. 54, in opportunity 2, the variable probability gaming state may be ended at timing (c) and the time saving gaming state may be established. In other words, the time-saving gaming state may be maintained from timing (c) until the symbol variation game is executed "100" times. Furthermore, although the game remains in the variable probability gaming state at timing (c), state B may be changed to "100" times from there. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency, such as having to win the winning game by the time the timing (c) is reached, and further improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in trigger 2, if the symbol variation game is played ``1000'' times in a row without hitting a winning game, the time saving game state will be entered. When the number of times has been reached, it may be possible to shift to a time-saving gaming state.

Further, the reach loss may be all reaches greater than or equal to the normal reach, or may be only the super reach without including the normal reach.

Further, it may be configured such that only the time-saving gaming state that shifts to opportunity 2 is provided without providing the time-saving gaming state that shifts to opportunity 1. Specifically, after the winning game, the time-saving game state may not be shifted to any special symbol, and the time-saving game state may be shifted to the time-saving gaming state only at opportunity 2.

(Fourth embodiment)
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. Note that the fourth embodiment is an embodiment including the above-mentioned "opportunity 1" and a newly explained "opportunity 3". Therefore, since the parts mainly related to "Opportunity 1" are common to the first embodiment, the description will be omitted as appropriate.
Note that the configuration of the game board 6 is the same as that described in the first embodiment.
In addition, as for the specifications of the variable probability gaming state in the fourth embodiment, the ones explained in the first embodiment are used, but the ones explained in the second embodiment may be used, and the ones explained in the third embodiment can be used. May be used.

(About the special symbol hit determination table)
FIG. 89(A) shows a special symbol hit determination table in the fourth embodiment. In particular, the difference from the first embodiment is that each of the normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, and variable probability gaming state includes "loss 1" and "loss 2".

Specifically, in the normal game state and the time-saving game state, there is a probability of "317/319" for "lose 1", and a probability of "1/319" for "lose 2".
Furthermore, in the variable probability gaming state, there is a probability of "30/32" for "lose 1" and a probability of "1/32" for "lose 2".

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state and the probability-variable gaming state, "loss 2" may not be provided (consisting of only loss 1).
Furthermore, the probability of "losing 2" is just an example, and may be a probability that is easier to win than "1/319" or a probability that is harder to win than "1/319".
Other than that, FIG. 89(B) and details of the game state are the same as those in the first embodiment, so explanations thereof will be omitted.

(About the special symbol determination table)
FIG. 90(A) shows the special symbol determination table in the fourth embodiment. In particular, the difference from the first embodiment is that each of the first starting port and the second starting port includes a special symbol corresponding to "loss 1" and a special symbol corresponding to "loss 2".

Specifically, (1) If the random number for hit determination extracted at the first starting opening indicates a loss 1, a "special symbol D" is determined, and if it indicates a loss 2, a "special symbol H" is determined. is determined.
(2) If the random number for hit determination extracted at the second starting opening indicates a loss 1, "special symbol G" is determined, and if it indicates a loss 2, "special symbol I" is determined. Ru.

Note that the loss 1 is positioned in the same way as the loss in the first embodiment, but the loss 2 is configured to shift to a time-saving gaming state after the loss symbol is confirmed and displayed.
That is, in the normal gaming state, when the special symbol H or the special symbol I is confirmed and displayed, the normal gaming state is ended and the time saving gaming state is entered.
In this way, the transition to the time-saving gaming state after the losing symbol (combination) related to losing 2 is confirmed can be referred to as "trigger 3" or "the time-saving gaming state activated (transitioned) by trigger 3". be.
In other respects, FIG. 90(B) is the same as the first embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The display mode of the "special symbol D" on the first special symbol display 27a is assumed to be, for example, a "-" symbol, and the display mode of the "special symbol H" on the first special symbol display 27a is, for example, "-". A ``.'' pattern (a combination of a ``-'' pattern and a ``.'' pattern) is assumed. The same applies to "special symbol G" and "special symbol I" on the second special symbol display 27b.

In addition, the display mode of the "special pattern H" on the image display device 26 is such that the left decorative pattern image 26a and the right decorative pattern image 26c are any pattern among the "1" to "8" patterns, and the middle The decorative pattern image 26b becomes a "special" pattern. For example, a combination of symbols such as "4 special 4" is assumed.
Note that the medium decorative pattern image 26b may be a numeric pattern image without using a "special" pattern. In this case, a combination of symbols such as "454" is assumed.
In addition, the "special" design is a sub-design (decorative design image) that appears only when the special design H (or special design I) is confirmed and displayed, and is not a design consisting of numbers, but a specific character. It is assumed that the image is a design with characters, letters, etc.

(About the main RAM storage area)
FIG. 91 shows the configuration of the main RAM in the fourth embodiment. In particular, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the storage area of the main RAM does not include an "executed flag storage area." Accordingly, although not particularly illustrated, in the processes of FIGS. 10 to 29 assumed in the fourth embodiment, processes other than those related to the "executed flag storage area" are used (for example, in the initialization of the main RAM, , the "executed flag storage area" is not initialized).
The rest of the configuration of the main RAM is the same as that in the first embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a description will be given of the control flow in the fourth embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.
FIG. 92 shows processing by game state according to the fourth embodiment.
Steps S105-4-12-37 to S105-4-12-41 and S105-4-12-47 are the same as in the first embodiment. Then, in step S105-4-12-42, it is determined whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, and if it is the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S105-4-12-43, If it is not the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S105-4-12-47.

Then, in step S105-4-12-43, it is determined whether the special symbol H or the special symbol I (loss 2) has been confirmed and displayed. Then, when the special symbol H or special symbol I (loss 2) is confirmed and displayed, the process moves to step S105-4-12-44, and the special symbol H or special symbol I (loss 2) is confirmed and displayed. If not, the gaming state-based processing is ended and the processing moves to step S106 in the main control board timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

Then, in step S105-4-12-44, the gaming state is set to a time-saving gaming state. That is, when the special symbol H or the special symbol I (loss 2) is definitely displayed during the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is ended and the time saving gaming state is entered. Then, when the gaming state is set to the time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state game number counter is set to 100 in step S105-4-12-45, and the gaming state command (time-saving) is set in step S105-4-12-46. When these processes are completed, the process moves to step S106 in the main control board timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

The above is an explanation of the control flow according to the fourth embodiment, and where the explanation is omitted, the control flow described in the first embodiment is used. However, in the fourth embodiment, the specific effects described above are executed. Therefore, in the processes shown in FIGS. 10 to 29 in the fourth embodiment, the processes related to "specific effects" are excluded.

(Regarding the time-saving gaming state transitioned to at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state transitioned to at opportunity 3)
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the time-saving gaming state to which the game was transferred at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state to which it was transitioned to at opportunity 3 will be explained. In addition, FIG. 93 is a simple time chart explaining the time-saving gaming state that transitioned to opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state that transitioned to opportunity 3 (particularly the display mode in the time-saving gaming state).

First, opportunity 1 assumes that the player wins the winning game (special symbol C) at timing (a) (he did not win, and the symbol related to the winning was confirmed and displayed). In this case, a winning game is executed at timing (b). Here, in a winning game, game result information can be displayed during a round or at the winning game ending. The game result information corresponds to a winning game number image 26x showing the number of winning games and a total prize ball number image 26v showing the number of prize balls obtained in the winning games. Then, when the winning game ends at timing (b), the state shifts to the time-saving game state from timing (b).

In the time-saving gaming state, game result information can be displayed continuously, and in addition, a possible number of games image 26y indicating the number of possible games in the time-saving gaming state is displayed.
Timing (c) indicates the timing at which the symbol variation game has been played "100" times in the time-saving gaming state. That is, the time-saving game state ends at timing (c) and shifts to the time-saving game state ending (time-saving ED). At this time, on the image display device 26, the possible number of games image 26y is displayed as "0 times remaining", and an image (time saving end) indicating that the time saving gaming state has ended is displayed. Note that the game result information can continue to be displayed even in the time saving ED.

Note that the game result information may display game results for a predetermined period. The predetermined period corresponds to one winning game (period of winning game → time-saving game state), for example, when the special symbol C is won in the normal game state and the time-saving game state is entered. Also, for example, if you hit special symbol C in the normal gaming state and shift to the time-saving gaming state, and then in that time-saving gaming state, hit special symbol F again and shift to the time-saving gaming state, you will win twice. The game (winning game → time-saving game state → winning game → period of time-saving game state) corresponds to this period.

Next, as for opportunity 3, it is assumed that the special symbol H is confirmed and displayed at timing (a).
Then, from timing (a), the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state. In this time-saving gaming state, the image display device 26 can display the possible number of games image 26y, but cannot display the game result information. That is, unlike opportunity 1, opportunity 3 does not shift to the time-saving gaming state through a winning game, so in the case of opportunity 3, game result information is not displayed.

Timing (b) indicates the timing at which the symbol variation game has been played "100" times in the time-saving gaming state. That is, the time-saving game state ends at timing (b) and shifts to the time-saving game state ending (time-saving ED). At this time, on the image display device 26, the possible number of games image 26y is displayed as "0 times remaining", and an image (time saving end) indicating that the time saving gaming state has ended is displayed. Note that game result information continues to be unable to be displayed even in the time saving ED.

Note that the "100" symbol variation game (loss) in the time-saving gaming state corresponds to the fulfillment of the end condition of the time-saving gaming state, but the timing for executing the time-saving ED may be any timing. For example, the time saving ED may be executed during the execution of the ``100'' symbol variation game (loss), or the time saving ED may be executed after the confirmation display of the ``100'' symbol variation game (loss). . If it is the former, the game result information will be displayed during the execution of the "100" symbol variation game (loss), and if it is the latter, the final display of the "100" symbol variation game (loss) will be displayed. Game result information will be displayed later. Note that when the time saving ED is executed during the execution of the "100" symbol variation game (loss), the time saving ED is started at the start of the symbol variation game, and when the time saving ED is finished, the symbols are displayed as confirmed.

Furthermore, even if the "100" symbol variation game in the time saving gaming state is a win (step S105-2-9), the time saving ED may be executed during the "100" symbol variation game. . In this case, by executing the time-saving ED, it is sufficient to pretend that the time-saving gaming state has ended and to notify that the game has won in a reverse manner. Thereby, the execution of the time-saving ED does not necessarily notify the end of the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest.

In this way, in the time-saving gaming state and the ending of the time-saving gaming state, if the opportunity is 1, the game result information is displayed, but if the opportunity is 3, the game result information is not displayed. Thereby, it becomes easy to understand which trigger caused the transition to the time-saving gaming state based on whether or not game result information is displayed.
Note that any background image may be used, especially in the time-saving gaming state, but it is more effective if the same background image is used for opportunity 1 and opportunity 3. Although it is not known whether the game has entered the time-saving gaming state, it is possible to determine when the game has entered the time-saving gaming state based on whether or not game result information is displayed.
As described above, in the time-saving gaming state, suitable display according to the situation is possible.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, an image related to "setting suggestion" or an "addiction prevention" image to prevent excessive gaming may be displayed in the time saving ED. . In addition, when displaying such an image, as in the first embodiment described above, the time saving ED of trigger 1 and the time saving ED of trigger 3 may be displayed together, or one of the time saving EDs may be displayed but the time saving ED of trigger 3 may be displayed. , the other time saving ED may not be displayed.

(Regarding the time-saving gaming state transitioned to at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state transitioned to at opportunity 3)
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the time-saving gaming state to which the game was transferred at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state to which it was transitioned to at opportunity 3 will be explained. In addition, FIG. 94 is a simple time chart explaining the time-saving gaming state to which the state was transferred at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state to which the transition was made at opportunity 3 (in particular, the display timing of the highlighted display image that encourages optimal play).

First, opportunity 1 assumes that the player wins the winning game (special symbol C) at timing (a) (he did not win, and the symbol related to the winning was confirmed and displayed). In this case, the winning game OP (winning game opening) is executed at timing (b).
That is, timing (a) is the timing of switching (state or game state) at the end of the normal game state and the start of the winning game.

In the winning game OP, first, an image such as "Jackpot!" which informs that the winning game has started, and the above-mentioned right hit image 26s are displayed. After these images are displayed for a predetermined period of time, a right-handed hitting emphasis notification image 26zr that urges right-handed hitting, such as "Aim to the right!", is then displayed. At this time, the speaker 10 outputs a voice saying "Aim to the right!" in conjunction with the display of the right-handed hitting emphasis notification image 26zr. Note that when the right-hand hitting image 26s is displayed, no corresponding sound is output. Furthermore, the display continues from timing (a) without being hidden, and continues to be displayed until, for example, timing (f), which will be described later.

Then, when the winning game OP ends at timing (b), the right-handed hit emphasis notification image 26zr is hidden and the image during the winning game is displayed.
In this way, the right-handed hitting emphasis notification image 26zr that urges right-handed hitting, such as "Aim for the right!", is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) in the winning game OP, which is performed by switching (states or game states). It has become so.

Then, from timing (c), the opening (time saving OP) in the time saving gaming state starts. In this time-saving OP, the right-handed game image 26s is continuously displayed, and an image such as "○○ RUSH enters!" which informs the start of the time-saving gaming state is displayed.

Note that timing (c) is the timing at which the winning game ends and the time-saving game state starts (state or game state), but here, we will use a right-handed hit that encourages right-handed hitting, such as "Aim for the right!" The emphasized notification image 26zr is not displayed, nor is the corresponding sound output. This is because the player has started "hitting the right hand" at timing (a), and is likely to continue "hitting the right hand" at timing (c). As a result, the right-handed hitting emphasis notification image 26zr is not displayed again for a player who has already played a "right-handed game," so that it is possible to prevent the player from being bothered.

Then, when the time-saving OP ends at timing (d), the first variation of the time-saving game state is started.
Timing (f) indicates the end timing of the time-saving gaming state ending (time-saving ED), and the timing (f) is the end timing of the time-saving gaming state and the start of the normal gaming state (state or gaming state). ) is the timing of switching. Here, the right-handed hitting image 26s is hidden, and a new left-handed hitting emphasis notification image 26zl that urges left-handed hitting, such as "Please return to left-handed hitting," is displayed. This allows the player to quickly play the optimal game at the timing of switching (state or game state).

Note that the right-handed hitting emphasis notification image 26zr is hidden after being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds), and is then not displayed again even if it is detected that the player is not "right-handed hitting." It has become.
On the other hand, the left-handed hitting emphasis notification image 26zl is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) and then disappears, but is redisplayed when it is detected that the player is not "left-handed hitting". It looks like this.

Note that this is not limited to this, and both may be displayed only once, or both may be displayed multiple times, and the right-handed hitting emphasis notification image 26zr can be displayed multiple times, and the left-handed hitting emphasis The notification image 26zl may be displayed once.

Next, as for opportunity 3, it is assumed that the special symbol H is confirmed and displayed at timing (a). In this case, the time saving OP is executed at timing (b).
That is, timing (a) is the timing of switching (state or gaming state) at the end of the normal gaming state and the start of the time-saving gaming state.

In the time-saving OP, first, the right-handed image 26s is displayed in response to the final display of the special symbol H. Note that when the right-hand hitting image 26s is displayed, the corresponding sound is not output. After that, as in Trigger 1, an image such as "○○ RUSH enters!" is displayed to notify the start of the time-saving gaming state.

Thereafter, the right-handed hitting emphasized notification image 26zr is displayed, and the speaker 10 outputs a voice such as "Aim to the right!" in conjunction with the display of the right-handed hitting emphasized notification image 26zr. In other words, in Opportunity 3, there is a high possibility that players will be "hitting left-handed" up to timing (a), so the right-handed hitting emphasis notification image 26zr is displayed at this timing, and the message "Aim to the right!" is displayed. Outputs a sound such as This allows the player to quickly play the optimal game, leading to notification regarding preferred predetermined operations.
Note that the right-hand hitting image 26s continues to be displayed without being hidden from timing (a) until, for example, timing (d), which will be described later.

Note that the right-handed hitting emphasis notification image 26zr may be the same as the image displayed in the winning game OP of Opportunity 1. This can lead to a reduction in image data.
On the other hand, the right-handed hitting emphasis notification image 26zr is prepared separately (for example, with different designs and sizes) for the image to be displayed in the winning game OP of opportunity 1 and the image to be displayed in the time-saving game state OP of opportunity 3. It's okay. This makes it possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that a winning game is about to start, especially in opportunity 3.

Then, when the time-saving game state OP is ended at timing (b), the first variation of the time-saving game state is started.
Timing (d) indicates the end timing of the time-saving gaming state ending (time-saving ED), and the timing (d) is the end timing of the time-saving gaming state and the start of the normal gaming state (state or gaming state). ) is the timing of switching. Here, the right-handed hitting image 26s is hidden, and a new left-handed hitting emphasis notification image 26zl that urges left-handed hitting, such as "Please return to left-handed hitting," is displayed. This allows the player to quickly play the optimal game at the timing of switching (state or game state).

Note that the left-handed hitting emphasis notification image 26zl may be the same as the image displayed at timing (f) of opportunity 1. This can lead to a reduction in image data.
On the other hand, the left-handed hitting emphasis notification image 26zl may be prepared separately (for example, with different designs and sizes) for the timing (f) of opportunity 1 and the timing (d) of opportunity 3. This makes it possible to prevent the player from erroneously believing that the time-saving game state via the winning game has ended, especially in opportunity 3.

As described above, in Opportunity 1 (transferring to the time-saving game state via the winning game), the right-hitting emphasis notification image 26zr is displayed in the winning game OP, and is not displayed in the time-saving OP.
On the other hand, in opportunity 3 (when the special symbol H is confirmed and displayed in the normal gaming state), the right-hand hit emphasis notification image 26zr is displayed in a time-saving OP.
As a result, if the trigger is 1, it is possible to prevent the player from being bothered as described above, and if the trigger is 3, the player can be made to play the optimal game promptly. That is, it can be said that notification regarding a predetermined operation can be suitably performed depending on each situation.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 94, the right-handed hitting emphasis notification image 26zr has a larger display size than the right-handed hitting image 26s, so it can be said that it is an image that makes it easier for the player to recognize that the player is playing right-handed. .
Further, the right-handed hitting emphasis notification image 26zr can be said to be an image that makes it easy for the player to recognize that the player is playing right-handed since a corresponding sound is output when it is displayed.

(Regarding the time-saving gaming state transitioned to at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state transitioned to at opportunity 3)
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the time-saving gaming state to which the game is transferred at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state to which it is transitioned to at opportunity 3 will be explained. In addition, FIG. 95 is a simple time chart explaining the time-saving gaming state that transitioned to trigger 1 and the time-saving gaming state that transitioned to trigger 3 (particularly the difference in sub-symbols between the time of confirmation display and the time of time-saving start). .

First, opportunity 1 assumes that the player wins the winning game (special symbol C) at timing (a) (he did not win, and the symbol related to the winning was confirmed and displayed). In this case, the symbol (special symbol, sub symbol) is displayed in a fixed display period until the timing (b).
As an example, it is assumed that the sub-symbol "444" has been confirmed and displayed.

Then, the winning game OP starts at timing (b), and after the winning game, the time saving OP starts at timing (d). Note that the transition up to timing (e) is the same as the trigger 1 in FIG. 94, so detailed explanation will be omitted.

Timing (e) indicates before the start of the first variation in the time-saving gaming state. That is, this is a scene where the first variation in the time-saving gaming state is about to start.
At this time, "100 remaining games" is displayed as the possible number of games image 26y, and "444", which was displayed during the fixed display period from timing (a) to timing (b), is displayed as a sub-symbol.
In this way, in the case of opportunity 1, before the start of the first variation in the time-saving gaming state, the sub-symbols that were displayed in the fixed display period are displayed again. That is, in the case of opportunity 1, sub-symbols (combinations) of the same type (Zero) will be displayed before the start of the first variation in the time-saving gaming state.
Then, from timing (f), the first variation in the time saving gaming state is started.

Note that at timings (e) and (f), if all the reserved storage areas in the first starting port 21 and the second starting port 22 are empty, that is, if there is no executable symbol variation game, the timing ( The image shown in e) remains displayed and becomes "waiting for customers."

Next, as for opportunity 3, it is assumed that the special symbol H is confirmed and displayed at timing (a). In this case, the symbol (special symbol, sub symbol) is displayed in a fixed display period until the timing (b).
As an example, it is assumed that the sub-symbol "4 special 4" has been confirmed and displayed. Then, when the special symbol is confirmed and displayed, the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state.

Then, the time-saving OP starts at timing (b), and timing (c) is before the start of the first variation of the time-saving game state. Before the start of the first variation of this time-saving gaming state, "100 remaining" is displayed as the possible number of games image 26y, and as a sub-symbol, it is displayed in the fixed display period from timing (a) to timing (b). The "4 special 4" that was previously displayed is not displayed, and the sub-symbol "454" is displayed.
In this way, in the case of opportunity 3, before the start of the first variation in the time-saving gaming state, the sub-symbols that were displayed during the fixed display period are not displayed again, and only the medium decorative symbol image 26b changes (from the special symbol to (returns to number pattern) and is displayed.
This can prevent misunderstandings from being given that the shift will now be made to a time-saving OP.
In addition, in the trigger 3 as well as in the trigger 1, there is no problem even if the sub-symbols displayed in the fixed display period are displayed as they are.
Before the start of the first variation in the time-saving gaming state in case of opportunity 3, at least one sub-symbol may be displayed as a sub-symbol (combination) different from other sub-symbols.
Then, from timing (d), the first variation in the time saving gaming state is started.

Note that at timings (c) and (d), if all the reserved storage areas in the first starting port 21 and the second starting port 22 are empty, that is, if there is no executable symbol variation game, the timing ( The image shown in c) remains displayed and becomes "waiting for customers."

In this way, the display mode (combination of symbols) of the sub-symbols before the start of the first variation in the time-saving gaming state is made different between the case of opportunity 1 and the case of opportunity 3. Thereby, when the time-saving game state starts, by visually checking the display mode of the sub-symbols, it is possible to grasp which of trigger 1 and trigger 3 activated the time-saving game state.
In particular, if the background image in the time-saving gaming state is the same for the time-saving gaming state activated by trigger 1 and the time-saving gaming state activated by trigger 3, it can be seen from the background image which triggering triggered the time-saving gaming state. Although it is difficult to understand, if it is possible to understand which trigger triggered the time-saving game state due to the difference in the display mode of the sub-symbols, the background image data can be made common, and which trigger triggered the trigger. It is also possible to determine whether the game is in a time-saving gaming state.

(Regarding the time-saving gaming state transitioned to at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state transitioned to at opportunity 3)
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the time-saving gaming state to which the game is transferred at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state to which it is transitioned to at opportunity 3 will be explained. In addition, FIG. 96 is a simple time chart that explains the time-saving gaming state that transitioned to trigger 1 and the time-saving gaming state that transitioned to trigger 3 (particularly the difference in time from the temporary stop display of the symbol to the final display). .

First, the trigger 1 assumes that the sub-symbol (444) corresponding to the special symbol C is temporarily stopped and displayed at timing (a) (the hit is confirmed for the time being). Note that the symbol variation game continues before and after timing (a).

Then, the re-drawing effect described in FIG. 62 is executed. That is, since it is assumed that the sub-symbol (444) corresponding to the special symbol C has been temporarily stopped and displayed, an image saying "Aim for the UP symbol!" and an image imitating the effect button 14 are displayed to perform a re-drawing effect. Execute.
The sub-symbol confirmed and displayed at timing (b) after executing the re-drawing effect is "444".
Then, after passing through the winning game, the state shifts to the time-saving game state.

Next, the trigger 3 assumes that the sub-symbol "4 special 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed at timing (a). If it is trigger 3, the re-drawing effect like trigger 1 will not be performed, and if the sub-symbol "4 special 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed, "4 special 4" will be displayed as it is at timing (b). I will do it.
Then, after passing through the time-saving OP, the game will shift to the time-saving gaming state.

In this way, when comparing the time from the temporary stop display to the final display, opportunity 1 is longer because it involves the re-drawing effect, and opportunity 3 is shorter because it does not involve the re-drawing effect.
As a result, if the opportunity is 1, it is possible to make the player expect to move to the variable probability gaming state without remaining in the time-saving gaming state, and if the opportunity is 3, it is possible to quickly shift to the time-saving gaming state.

(Regarding opportunity 1 and opportunity 3 in normal gaming state)
Next, opportunity 1 and opportunity 3 in the normal gaming state will be explained using FIG. 97. In addition, FIG. 97 is a simple time chart explaining opportunity 1 and opportunity 3 in the normal gaming state (particularly the symbol variation game played immediately before shifting to the time-saving gaming state).
In addition, the symbol variation game that is played immediately before shifting to the time-saving gaming state corresponds to the symbol variation game that led to the winning game if the trigger is 1, and if it is the trigger 3, the special symbol H (or special symbol I) is This applies to symbol variation games that have a fixed display.

First, in the case of opportunity 1, variation patterns 6 to 11 in FIG. 8 can be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game. In other words, in the case of Opportunity 1, a reach is guaranteed to occur in the immediately preceding symbol variation game.

Further, as the jackpot preview performance, the above-mentioned jackpot preview performance A, jackpot preview performance B, and jackpot preview performance C can be selected. That is, in the case of Opportunity 1, jackpot preview performance A, jackpot preview performance B, and jackpot preview performance C can be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, and so-called premium preview performance can also be selected.
Note that between the jackpot preview performance A and the jackpot preview performance B, there is a tendency for the jackpot preview performance B to be easily selected.

Then, when the symbol variation game ends at timing (b) and the symbol is confirmed and displayed (win), a winning game is started, and when the winning game ends at timing (c), the state shifts to a time-saving game state.

Next, in the case of opportunity 3, variation patterns 1 to 5 in FIG. 8 can be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game. That is, in the case of opportunity 3, a reach may occur in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, or a reach may not occur. For example, in a symbol variation game in which a special symbol H is displayed as a fixed symbol, if judgment information is stored only in the variation storage area, a reach is likely to occur; In a situation where judgment information is stored up to 4 storage areas, it is difficult for a reach to occur.

Further, as the jackpot preview performance, the above-mentioned jackpot preview performance A and jackpot preview performance B can be selected. That is, in the case of opportunity 3, jackpot preview performance A and jackpot preview performance B can be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, and so-called premium preview performance cannot be selected.
Note that between the jackpot preview performance A and the jackpot preview performance B, there is a tendency for the player to easily select the jackpot preview performance A.

Then, at timing (b), when the symbol variation game ends and the symbol (special symbol H) is confirmed and displayed, the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state.

Comparing Opportunity 1 and Opportunity 3, in the case of Opportunity 1, a reach always occurs in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, but in the case of Opportunity 3, a reach may or may not occur.
Further, in the case of opportunity 1, the premium preview can be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, but in the case of opportunity 3, the premium notice cannot be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game.
In addition, in the case of Opportunity 1, it is easy to select jackpot preview performance B, which has a high expectation of winning for a winning game in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, but in the case of Opportunity 3, the expectation of winning for a winning game in the immediately preceding symbol variation game is high. It is easy to select jackpot preview presentation A with a low value.

Based on this tendency, it is possible to infer from the contents of the symbol variation game (the presence or absence of a reach, the contents of the jackpot preview performance) which trigger will cause the transition to the time-saving gaming state. Thereby, it is possible to draw attention to the content of the immediately preceding symbol variation game, and the interest in the game can be improved.
Furthermore, it becomes clear which benefits to look forward to based on the contents of the immediately preceding symbol variation game (whether there is a reach or not, the contents of the jackpot preview performance). Specifically, if jackpot preview performance C is executed, you can expect to be given the benefit of winning game + time-saving game state, and if jackpot preview performance A is executed, you can expect to be given the benefit of winning game + time-saving game state. You can expect to be given either the privilege of a state or the privilege of only a time-saving gaming state.

Note that the content of the symbol variation game is not limited to that shown in FIG. 97. For example, in the case of Trigger 1, multiple types of jackpot preview effects are likely to occur in combination, and in the case of Trigger 3, multiple types of jackpot preview effects may be combined and difficult to occur. Similar effects can also be obtained in this manner.

Further, in the case of opportunity 3, it has been stated that a reach may not occur in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, but in the case of opportunity 3, a reach may always occur. In this case, a dedicated special symbol variation pattern table may be stored in the main ROM 102 to be referred to when determining the special symbol H (or special symbol I).
With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the possibility of a winning game from disappearing due to no reach, and from sensing that the game will quickly shift to the time-saving game state due to opportunity 3. In other words, until the symbol is confirmed and displayed, it is possible to expect the transition to the time-saving gaming state due to opportunity 1.

(Regarding opportunity 1 and opportunity 3 in normal gaming state)
Next, opportunity 1 and opportunity 3 in the normal gaming state will be explained using FIG. 98. In addition, FIG. 98 is a simple time chart (another example of FIG. 97) explaining opportunity 1 and opportunity 3 in the normal gaming state (particularly the symbol variation game played immediately before shifting to the time-saving gaming state).
In FIG. 97, the jackpot preview performance that can be executed in the immediately preceding symbol variation game at each opportunity has been described, but in FIG. 98, the above-mentioned "icon change performance" will be described.

First, if it is Opportunity 1 and the previous symbol variation game is a win, in the previous symbol variation game, the change scenario (final) is "blue", "yellow", "green", "red". , "Rainbow" can be selected.

The change scenario (final) is the color of the icon that finally changes, and indicates that there will be no further changes. For example, if the final color is "blue", this is intended to be a scenario in which the previous symbol variation game was the normal color (white) and the immediately preceding symbol variation game was "blue". For example, if the final result is "green", it was "blue" in the two previous symbol variation games, "yellow" in the first symbol variation game, and "green" in the immediately previous symbol variation game. This scenario is intended.

Note that, as described above, the starting port light emitting device change effect is linked to the color of the icon in the icon change effect, so that the same color as the icon change effect can be selected.

Then, when the symbol variation game ends at timing (b) and the symbol is confirmed and displayed (win), a winning game is started, and when the winning game ends at timing (c), the state shifts to a time-saving game state.

Next, in trigger 3, when special symbol H is confirmed and displayed in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, "blue", "yellow", " "Green" can be selected.

Note that, as described above, the starting port light emitting device change effect is linked to the color of the icon in the icon change effect, so that the same color as the icon change effect can be selected.

Then, at timing (b), when the symbol variation game ends and the symbol (special symbol H) is confirmed and displayed, the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state.

Comparing Opportunity 1 and Opportunity 3, in the case of Opportunity 1, the icon change effect performed in the immediately preceding symbol change game is "blue", "yellow", "green", "red", and "rainbow". ” can be selected, but in the case of opportunity 3, the icon change effect performed in the previous symbol change game can ultimately be selected as “blue,” “yellow,” or “green.” It is.
In addition, in the case of Trigger 1, it is possible to select a scenario in which the color "Rainbow" which indicates a win in the previous symbol change game or "Red" which is likely to be selected in case of a win, but in the case of Trigger 3 , it is impossible to select a scenario that is "rainbow" or "red".

Based on this tendency, it is possible to infer which trigger causes the transition to the time-saving gaming state from the content of the icon change performance (the final icon color) executed in the immediately preceding symbol variation game. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the contents of the icon change effect executed in the immediately preceding symbol change game, thereby improving the interest in the game.
Furthermore, it becomes clear which benefit to expect from the content of the icon change effect (the final icon color) executed in the immediately preceding symbol change game. Specifically, if it changes to "red", you can expect to be given the benefit of winning game + time-saving gaming state, and if it changes to "green", you can expect to be given the benefit of winning game + time-saving gaming state, You can expect to be given one of the benefits of only a time-saving gaming state.

(Regarding opportunity 1 and opportunity 3 in normal gaming state)
Next, trigger 1 and trigger 3 in the normal gaming state will be explained using FIG. 99. In addition, FIG. 99 is a simple time chart (another example of FIGS. 97 and 98) explaining opportunity 1 and opportunity 3 in the normal gaming state (particularly the symbol variation game played immediately before shifting to the time-saving gaming state).
In FIG. 99, the above-mentioned "pseudo consecutive notice" will be described.

First, in the case of opportunity 1, variation patterns 6 to 11 in FIG. 8 can be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game. In other words, in the case of Opportunity 1, a reach is guaranteed to occur in the immediately preceding symbol variation game.

If variation pattern 8 is selected, it becomes possible to execute the number of pseudo-runs "2 times", and if variation pattern 9 is selected, it becomes possible to execute the number of pseudo-runs "3 times", and variation pattern 10 becomes possible. If selected, it becomes possible to execute the pseudo continuous number of times "4 times".

Then, when the symbol variation game ends at timing (b) and the symbol is confirmed and displayed (win), a winning game is started, and when the winning game ends at timing (c), the state shifts to a time-saving game state.

Next, in the case of opportunity 3, variation patterns 1 to 5 in FIG. 8 can be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game. That is, in the case of opportunity 3, a reach may occur in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, or a reach may not occur. For example, in a symbol variation game in which a special symbol H is displayed as a fixed symbol, if judgment information is stored only in the variation storage area, a reach is likely to occur; In a situation where judgment information is stored up to 4 storage areas, it is difficult for a reach to occur.

If variation pattern 4 is selected, it becomes possible to execute the pseudo continuous number of times "2 times", and if variation pattern 5 is selected, it becomes possible to execute the pseudo continuous number of times "3 times".

Then, at timing (b), when the symbol variation game ends and the symbol (special symbol H) is confirmed and displayed, the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state.

Comparing Opportunity 1 and Opportunity 3, in the case of Opportunity 1, the pseudo consecutive announcements made in the immediately preceding symbol fluctuation game are "2 times", "3 times", and "4 times" (linked to the selectable fluctuation pattern). ) can be selected, but in the case of opportunity 3, "2 times" and "3 times" (linked to the selectable fluctuation pattern) can be selected as the pseudo consecutive notice performed in the immediately preceding symbol fluctuation game. be.
In other words, in the case of opportunity 1, "4 times" (linked to the selectable variation pattern) can be selected as the pseudo consecutive notice performed in the immediately preceding symbol fluctuation game, but in the case of opportunity 3, the immediately preceding symbol As a pseudo consecutive preview to be performed in a variation game, "four times" (linked to a selectable variation pattern) cannot be selected.

Based on this tendency, it is possible to infer which trigger causes the transition to the time-saving gaming state from the number of pseudo consecutive notices executed in the immediately preceding symbol variation game. Thereby, it is possible to draw attention to the number of pseudo consecutive notices executed in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.
Furthermore, it becomes clear which benefits to expect from the number of pseudo consecutive notices executed in the immediately preceding symbol variation game. Specifically, if the pseudo consecutive notice "4 times" is executed, you can expect to be given the benefit of winning games + time-saving game state, and if the pseudo consecutive notice "3 times" is executed You can expect to be given either the benefit of winning game + time-saving game state, or the benefit of only time-saving game state.

(Regarding opportunity 1 and opportunity 3 in normal gaming state)
Next, opportunity 1 and opportunity 3 in the normal gaming state will be explained using FIG. 100. In addition, FIG. 100 is a simple time chart (another example of FIG. 97, FIG. 98, and FIG. 99) explaining trigger 1 and trigger 3 in the normal gaming state (particularly the symbol variation game played immediately before shifting to the time-saving gaming state). It is.
In FIG. 100, the above-mentioned "zone effect" will be described.

First, in the case of opportunity 1, variation patterns 6 to 11 in FIG. 8 can be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game. In other words, in the case of Opportunity 1, a reach is guaranteed to occur in the immediately preceding symbol variation game.

Then, in the immediately preceding symbol varying game or multiple symbol varying games including the immediately preceding symbol varying game (for example, the immediately preceding symbol varying game and the symbol varying game one time before the immediately preceding symbol varying game), the "zone effect" ” can be executed.

Then, when the symbol variation game ends at timing (b) and the symbol is confirmed and displayed (win), a winning game is started, and when the winning game ends at timing (c), the state shifts to a time-saving game state.

Next, in the case of opportunity 3, variation patterns 1 to 5 in FIG. 8 can be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game. That is, in the case of opportunity 3, a reach may occur in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, or a reach may not occur. For example, in a symbol variation game in which a special symbol H is displayed as a fixed symbol, if judgment information is stored only in the variation storage area, a reach is likely to occur; In a situation where judgment information is stored up to 4 storage areas, it is difficult for a reach to occur.

Then, in the immediately preceding symbol varying game or multiple symbol varying games including the immediately preceding symbol varying game (for example, the immediately preceding symbol varying game and the symbol varying game immediately before the immediately preceding symbol varying game), the "Zone It has become impossible to carry out "direction".

Then, at timing (b), when the symbol variation game ends and the symbol (special symbol H) is confirmed and displayed, the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state.

Comparing opportunity 1 and opportunity 3, in the case of opportunity 1, it is possible to execute the "zone effect" in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, but in the case of opportunity 3, it is possible to execute the "zone effect" in the immediately preceding symbol variation game. is not possible.
In other words, in the advance determination process (the winning determination process in FIGS. 15 and 16), for example, if it is determined that it is a win, it is possible to execute the "zone effect"; , winning determination process in FIG. 16), for example, if it is determined that the game is a loss 2, the "zone performance" cannot be executed.

From this tendency, it is possible to infer which trigger causes the transition to the time-saving gaming state, based on whether or not the "zone effect" is executed in the immediately preceding symbol variation game. Thereby, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the "zone effect" executed in the immediately preceding symbol variation game is being executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.
Furthermore, it becomes clear which benefits to look forward to based on whether or not the "zone effect" was executed in the immediately preceding symbol variation game. Specifically, if the "zone performance" is executed, you can expect to be given the benefit of a winning game + time-saving game state, and if the "zone performance" is not executed, the bonus is a winning game + time-saving game state. You can expect to be given either the benefit of a state or the benefit of only a time-saving gaming state.

(Regarding opportunity 1 and opportunity 3 in normal gaming state)
Next, opportunity 1 and opportunity 3 in the normal gaming state will be explained using FIG. 101. In addition, FIG. 101 is a simple time chart (FIG. 97, FIG. 98, FIG. 99, FIG. (separate example).
In FIG. 101, the above-mentioned "flash effect upon winning" will be described.

First, if it is Opportunity 1 and the previous symbol variation game is a win, in the previous symbol variation game, "Blue", "Green", and "Red" can be selected as the change scenario (final). It has become. Note that the change scenario (final) is the same as the above-mentioned "icon change effect", so a description thereof will be omitted.

Then, when the symbol variation game ends at timing (b) and the symbol is confirmed and displayed (win), a winning game is started, and when the winning game ends at timing (c), the state shifts to a time-saving game state.

Next, in Trigger 3, when the special symbol H is confirmed and displayed in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, "Blue" and "Green" are selected as the change scenario (final) in the immediately preceding symbol variation game. It is possible.

Then, at timing (b), when the symbol variation game ends and the symbol (special symbol H) is confirmed and displayed, the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state.

Comparing Opportunity 1 and Opportunity 3, in the case of Opportunity 1, it is possible to select a scenario in which "blue", "green", and "red" are ultimately selected as the winning flash effect performed in the immediately preceding symbol change game. However, in the case of Trigger 3, it is possible to select a scenario in which "blue" and "green" are finally selected as the winning flash effect performed in the immediately preceding symbol variation game.
In addition, in the case of opportunity 1, it is possible to select a scenario that is "red", which is likely to be selected if it is a hit in the previous symbol variation game, but in the case of opportunity 3, it is not possible to select a scenario that is "red". be.

Based on this tendency, it is possible to infer which trigger causes the transition to the time-saving gaming state from the contents of the winning flash effect (color of the speaker lamp 10a) executed in the immediately preceding symbol variation game. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the contents of the winning flash effect executed in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, and to improve the game's interest.
Furthermore, it becomes clear which benefit to expect from the content of the icon change effect (the final color of the speaker lamp 10a) executed in the immediately preceding symbol change game. Specifically, if it changes to "red", you can expect to be given the benefit of winning game + time-saving gaming state, and if it changes to "green", you can expect to be given the benefit of winning game + time-saving gaming state, You can expect to be given one of the benefits of only a time-saving gaming state.

(Regarding the time-saving gaming state transitioned to at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state transitioned to at opportunity 3)
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the time-saving gaming state to which the game is transferred at opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state to which it is transitioned to at opportunity 3 will be explained. In addition, FIG. 102 shows the time-saving gaming state transitioned to by trigger 1 and the time-saving gaming state transitioning to trigger 3 (particularly the case where the time-saving gaming state by trigger 3 is activated after the time-saving gaming state by trigger 1 is activated). This is a simple time chart for explanation.

First, case 1 assumes that the time-saving ED in the time-saving gaming state transitioned by opportunity 1 from timing (a) to timing (b) is being executed.
Since this is the time-saving ED in the time-saving gaming state that was transitioned to by trigger 1, the above-mentioned game result information is displayed in the time-saving ED.
It is assumed that the time-saving gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state at timing (b).

Timing (b) indicates the first symbol variation game to be played after transitioning to the normal gaming state. In this symbol variation game, it is assumed that the special symbol H has been determined.

Timing (c) is the timing at which the special symbol H is confirmed and displayed. Therefore, from this timing, the time-saving OP is entered, and from the timing (d), the time-saving gaming state, which was entered by trigger 3, starts.

In the time-saving game state shifted by this opportunity 3, the game result information displayed in the time-saving ED from timing (a) to timing (b) is inherited. That is, in the time-saving game state starting from timing (d), the game result information that is the same as the game result information displayed in the time-saving ED from timing (a) to timing (b) (the number of winning games image 26x is "1 win", The total award pitch count image 26v is "1500").

Next, in case 2, it is assumed that the time-saving ED in the time-saving gaming state transitioned by opportunity 1 from timing (a) to timing (b) is executed.
Since this is the time-saving ED in the time-saving gaming state that was transitioned to by trigger 1, the above-mentioned game result information is displayed in the time-saving ED.
It is assumed that the time-saving gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state at timing (b).

Timing (b) indicates the 100th symbol variation game after the transition to the normal gaming state. In this symbol variation game, it is assumed that the special symbol H has been determined.

Timing (c) is the timing at which the special symbol H is confirmed and displayed. Therefore, from the timing, the time-saving OP is entered, and from the timing (d), the time-saving gaming state, which was entered by trigger 3, starts.

In the time-saving game state shifted by this opportunity 3, the game result information displayed in the time-saving ED from timing (a) to timing (b) is not inherited. That is, in the time-saving game state starting from timing (d), the game result information displayed in the time-saving ED from timing (a) to timing (b) is not displayed.

In other words, as in Case 1, if Opportunity 3 occurs during the period from timing (b) until the 99th symbol variation game is played, it is treated as a time-saving gaming state obtained continuously, and Opportunity 3 Game result information is displayed even in the transitioned time-saving game state.
On the other hand, as in Case 2, if Opportunity 3 occurs in the symbol variation game after 100 times from timing (b), it is not treated as a time-saving gaming state obtained continuously, but the time-saving gaming state shifted to due to Opportunity 3. Do not display game result information.

The reason for doing this is that in case 1, there is a high possibility that the same player who was playing until timing (b) is playing, and in case 2, there is a high possibility that the same player is playing until timing (b). This is because there is a high possibility that a player different from the player who was playing the game is playing the game.
In other words, especially in case 2, if the game result information is inherited, and if the player is replaced, the game result information will suddenly be displayed to the player who is playing the game later, giving a sense of discomfort. It's possible.
Therefore, in case 1, the game result information is inherited, and in case 2, the game result information is not inherited.
Thereby, game result information can be suitably displayed according to each situation.

Note that in the example of FIG. 102, case 1 is a period from timing (b) to 99 times, and case 2 is a period from timing (b) to 100 times or later, but the number of times can be changed arbitrarily.

Although not shown in the fourth embodiment, for example, "trigger 2" in FIGS. 55, 61, 63, 64, 65, 66, and 67 in the first embodiment is , may be read as "opportunity 3".

On the other hand, "trigger 3" in FIGS. 93, 94, 97, 98, 99, and 100 described in the fourth embodiment may be read as "trigger 2."

In addition, it is also possible to have "opportunity 2" and "opportunity 3" without having "opportunity 1" so that when either of the opportunities occurs, the game is shifted to the time-saving gaming state, or "opportunity 1" , ``Opportunity 2'', and ``Opportunity 3'' may all be provided, so that when any of the opportunities occurs, the game is shifted to the time-saving gaming state.

The details of the means described in the above gaming machine will be explained.
A starting port (e.g., first starting port 21, second starting port 22) formed in a gaming area (e.g., gaming area 7) through which a game ball can flow down, and when a game ball enters the starting port. A determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a special symbol winning determination process) determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a winning game) based on the game information, and a game ball enters the starting hole. A variable display of identification information (for example, a special symbol, a sub symbol) is started based on the fact that the ball has been hit, and the variable display is stopped as the variation time elapses to derive the result of the determination (for example, a final display ) identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display 27a, the second special symbol display 27b, the image display device 26), and when it is determined that the special game is to be executed, after the special game is executed. A specific gaming state to which the transition can be made (for example, a time-saving gaming state to which the transition is made in the process of step S105-5-18) and a specific gaming state to which the transition can be made without executing the special game if it is determined that the special game is not to be executed. A game state (for example, the time-saving game state to which the transition is made in the process of step S105-4-12-44), and a specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the game state, and executes the special game. The combination of identification information displayed on the identification information display means (for example, in the image display device 26, the left decorative pattern image 26a, the middle decorative pattern image 26b, The same number image is displayed on the right decorative pattern image 26c), and the combination of the identification information displayed on the identification information display means when starting the specific game state to which the special game was transferred without executing the special game. (For example, the same number image is displayed in the left decorative pattern image 26a and the right decorative pattern image 26c, but the image "special" is displayed in the middle decorative pattern image 26b). It is characterized by being present.

Although this embodiment has been explained using a pachinko game machine as an example, the contents described in this embodiment can also be applied to a reel-type game machine (slot machine), or a game machine such as a basketball game machine. It can also be applied to an arranged ball game machine.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 26 Image display device 100 Main control board 200 Performance control board

Claims (1)

A starting port formed in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering the starting hole;
If it is determined that the special game is to be executed, there is a first specific game state that can be transitioned to after executing the special game, and if it is determined that the special game is not to be executed, the transition is to be made without executing the special game. a possible second specific gaming state, and a specific gaming state control means capable of controlling the second specific gaming state ;
A fluctuating display game is executed in which a fluctuating display of identification information is started based on the game ball entering the starting hole, and the fluctuating display is stopped as the fluctuating time elapses to derive the result of the determination. and a possible identification information display means ,
a combination of identification information displayed on the identification information display means when starting the first specific gaming state;
The combination of identification information displayed on the identification information display means when starting the second specific gaming state is different ,
During execution of the first specific gaming state, acquisition information regarding acquisition of game balls can be displayed;
If the first specific gaming state is terminated and the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times, then the second specific gaming state is entered, the acquired information displayed in the first specific gaming state is changed to does not continue to display in the transitioned second specific gaming state,
In the first variable display game after the end of the first specific gaming state, if the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied and the transition is made to the second specific gaming state, the first specific gaming state It is possible to continue displaying the acquired information that was displayed in the second specific gaming state to which the transition is made;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images